Varispeed g7+instruc manual

VARISPEED G7
General purpose inverter (Advanced Vector Control)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Manual No.
TOE-S616-60.2

YASKAWA
Varispeed G7
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GENERAL PURPOSE INVERTER (ADVANCED VECTOR CONTROL)
MODEL: CIMR-G7C
200V CLASS 0.4 to 110kW (1.2 to 160kVA)
400V CLASS 0.4 to 300kW (1.2 to 460kVA)
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions
thoroughly, and retain for future reference.
YASKAWA MANUAL NO. TOE-S616-60.2

i
Preface
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable
application of Varispeed G7-Series Inverters. Read
this manual before attempting to install, operate, main-
tain, or inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe, conve-
nient location for future reference. Before you
understand all precautions and safety information
before attempting application.
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details.
Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the
instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only
and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the
manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa represen-
tatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front
cover.
• If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or
the nearest Yaskawa sales office.

ii
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed pre-
cautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to
the products or to related equipment and systems.
Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending
on the situation.
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage
to the product, or faulty operation.
IMPORTANT
Indicates important information that should be memorized.
WARNING
CAUTION

iii
Safety Precautions
Confirmations upon Delivery
Installation
Wiring
CAUTION
• Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
CAUTION
• Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
• Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
• Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same
enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45°C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
WARNING
• Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
• Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200 V class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V class: Ground
to 10 Ω or less)
• Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
• Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into con-
tact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, an electric shock or ground short can occur.
CAUTION
• Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
• Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
• Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring
examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur.
• Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
• Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
• Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.

iv
Setting User Constants
Trial Operation
• Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the
Inverter to operate.
CAUTION
• Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing rotational autotuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set
with the motor attached to a load.
• Stay clear of the motor during rotational autotuning.
The motor may start operating suddenly when stopped, possibly resulting in injury.
WARNING
• Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply.
An electric shock may occur.
• Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared,
the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
• Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its
function is set.
Injury may occur.
• Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
• Don't touch the radiation fins (heatsink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can
become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
• Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event
of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the Inverter.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator
from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• Don't check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
• Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
CAUTION

v
Maintenance and Inspection
Other
WARNING
• Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely
dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When
attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out
before performance maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
• Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized person-
nel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
CAUTION
• A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully. The
CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
• Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
WARNING
• Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.

vi
Warning Information and Position
There is warning information on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration.
Always heed the warnings.
Warning Information
Illustration shows the CIMR-G7C20P4
Warning
information
position
Illustration shows the CIMR-G7C2018
Warning
information
position
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
ŸRead manual before installing.
ŸWait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge
after disconnecting power supply.
! AVERTISSEMENT
Risque de decharge electrique.
ŸLire le manuel avant l' installation.
ŸAttendre 5 minutes apres la coupure de
l' allmentation. Pour permettre la
decharge des condensateurs.
'
' '
'
!

vii
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echolon.

ix
Contents
1 Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
Varispeed G7 Introduction ............................................................................1-2
Varispeed G7 Models .....................................................................................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................1-3
Checks............................................................................................................................1-3
Nameplate Information ...................................................................................................1-3
Component Names.........................................................................................................1-5
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................................................1-7
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) .......................................................................................1-7
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 Type 1) .......................................................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ..............................................1-9
Installation Site ...............................................................................................................1-9
Controlling the Ambient Temperature .............................................................................1-9
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter....................................................................1-9
Installation Orientation and Space..............................................................1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover .............................................1-11
Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-11
Attaching the Terminal Cover........................................................................................ 1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................1-12
Inverters of 15 kW or Less............................................................................................1-12
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More ........................................................................................1-15
2 Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices ..............................................................2-2
Connection Diagram.....................................................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals.......................................................................2-6
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ......................................................2-6
Main Circuit Terminal Functions ...................................................................................2-11
Main Circuit Configurations...........................................................................................2-12
Standard Connection Diagrams....................................................................................2-13
Wiring the Main Circuits................................................................................................2-14
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .................................................................2-20
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors......................................................................2-20
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ...............................................................................2-22
Control Circuit Terminal Connections...........................................................................2-26
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions................................................................................2-27

x
Wiring Check..............................................................................................2-28
Checks ......................................................................................................................... 2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards.............................................................2-29
Option Card Models and Specifications ....................................................................... 2-29
Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-29
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications................................................. 2-30
Wiring ........................................................................................................................... 2-32
Wiring Terminal Blocks................................................................................................. 2-36
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses ............................................................ 2-37
3 Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................ 3-2
Digital Operator Display ................................................................................................. 3-2
Digital Operator Keys ..................................................................................................... 3-2
Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-4
Inverter Modes ............................................................................................................... 3-4
Switching Modes ............................................................................................................ 3-5
Drive Mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-6
Quick Programming Mode.............................................................................................. 3-7
Advanced Programming Mode....................................................................................... 3-9
Verify Mode .................................................................................................................. 3-12
Autotuning Mode .......................................................................................................... 3-13
4 Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Trial Operation Procedure............................................................................ 4-2
Trial Operation Procedures .......................................................................... 4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or Higher) 4-3
Power ON....................................................................................................................... 4-3
Checking the Display Status .......................................................................................... 4-4
Basic Settings................................................................................................................. 4-5
Settings for the Control Methods.................................................................................... 4-7
Autotuning ...................................................................................................................... 4-9
Application Settings...................................................................................................... 4-14
No-load Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-14
Loaded Operation......................................................................................................... 4-14
Check and Recording User Constants ......................................................................... 4-15
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................................................ 4-16
5 User Constants ........................................................................5-1
User Constant Descriptions.......................................................................... 5-2
Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode.................................................. 5-4

xi
User Constant Tables ...................................................................................5-8
A: Setup Settings............................................................................................................5-8
Application Constants: b...............................................................................................5-10
Autotuning Constants: C...............................................................................................5-20
Reference Constants: d................................................................................................5-26
Motor Constant Constants: E........................................................................................5-32
Option Constants: F......................................................................................................5-38
Terminal Function Constants: H ...................................................................................5-45
Protection Function Constants: L..................................................................................5-57
N: Special Adjustments.................................................................................................5-67
Digital Operator Constants: o........................................................................................5-70
T: Motor Autotuning ......................................................................................................5-74
U: Monitor Constants....................................................................................................5-75
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) ...................................5-83
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04).................................5-86
6 Constant Settings by Function.............................................. 6-1
Frequency Reference...................................................................................6-2
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source...................................................................6-2
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation .................................................................................6-5
Run Command .............................................................................................6-7
Selecting the Run Command Source .............................................................................6-7
Stopping Methods.........................................................................................6-9
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent.....................................6-9
Using the DC Injection Brake........................................................................................6-13
Using an Emergency Stop ............................................................................................6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics...........................................6-15
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times...............................................................6-15
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function).....................................6-19
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention During
Acceleration Function)..................................................................................................6-20
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During Deceleration
Function).......................................................................................................................6-22
Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-24
Adjusting Analog Frequency References .....................................................................6-24
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function).......................................6-27
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs ...........................................6-29
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ...................................6-30
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency...........................................................................6-30
Limiting Minimum Frequency........................................................................................6-30
Improved Operating Efficiency ...................................................................6-32
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)..............................6-32
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation) ................................................................................................6-34
Hunting-prevention Function.........................................................................................6-36

xii
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function)............................................ 6-37
Machine Protection ....................................................................................6-38
Reducing Noise and Leakage Current ......................................................................... 6-38
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function) ............................................................ 6-41
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................................. 6-43
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input .................. 6-44
Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................ 6-44
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input ....... 6-48
Motor Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 6-49
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time ..................................................................... 6-51
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ....................................... 6-52
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction ................................................................................. 6-54
Continuing Operation .................................................................................6-55
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored........................................................ 6-55
Speed Search............................................................................................................... 6-56
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost ........... 6-62
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function) ............................ 6-63
Inverter Protection......................................................................................6-64
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors............................. 6-64
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels ......................................... 6-65
Input Terminal Functions............................................................................ 6-66
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit
Terminals ...................................................................................................................... 6-66
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)...................................................... 6-67
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold)....... 6-68
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) .... 6-69
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References
(+/- Speed) ................................................................................................................... 6-72
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing ........................................................... 6-73
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit
Terminals ...................................................................................................................... 6-73
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG) . 6-74
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Fault Function).............................................................................................. 6-75
Monitor Constants ......................................................................................6-76
Using the Analog Monitor Constants............................................................................ 6-76
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents............................................................................. 6-79
Individual Functions ...................................................................................6-81
Using MEMOBUS Communications............................................................................. 6-81
Using the Timer Function ............................................................................................. 6-93
Using PID Control......................................................................................................... 6-94
Energy-saving ............................................................................................................ 6-103
Setting Motor Constants............................................................................................. 6-105
Setting the V/f Pattern ................................................................................................ 6-107
Torque Control ........................................................................................................... 6-114
Speed Control (ASR) Structure .................................................................................. 6-122

xiii
Droop Control Function...............................................................................................6-127
Zero-servo Function....................................................................................................6-128
Digital Operator Functions........................................................................6-132
Setting Digital Operator Functions..............................................................................6-132
Copying Constants .....................................................................................................6-135
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator .............................................6-139
Setting a Password.....................................................................................................6-140
Displaying User-set Constants Only ...........................................................................6-141
Options .....................................................................................................6-142
Performing Speed Control with PG.............................................................................6-142
Using Digital Output Cards .........................................................................................6-146
Using an Analog Reference Card...............................................................................6-148
Using a Digital Reference Card ..................................................................................6-149
7 Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ............................................................7-2
Fault Detection................................................................................................................7-2
Alarm Detection ..............................................................................................................7-9
Operation Errors ...........................................................................................................7-13
Errors During Autotuning .............................................................................................7-15
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................7-16
Troubleshooting..........................................................................................7-17
If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set...........................................................................7-17
If the Motor Does Not Operate......................................................................................7-18
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed........................................................7-19
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow..................................7-20
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference .......................................................7-20
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision......................................7-20
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop Vector
Control Mode ................................................................................................................7-21
If Motor Deceleration is Slow........................................................................................7-21
If the Motor Overheats..................................................................................................7-22
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio...........................7-22
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run..............................7-23
If There is Mechanical Oscillation.................................................................................7-23
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped........................................7-24
If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls.............................................7-24
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ......................................7-24
8 Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1
Maintenance and Inspection.........................................................................8-2
Outline of Maintenance...................................................................................................8-2
Daily Inspection ..............................................................................................................8-2
Periodic Inspection .........................................................................................................8-2

xiv
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ................................................................................. 8-4
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card........................................... 8-6
9 Specifications ..........................................................................9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................................................. 9-2
Specifications by Model.................................................................................................. 9-2
Common Specifications.................................................................................................. 9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ....................................... 9-5
10 Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Varispeed G7 Control Modes .....................................................................10-2
Control Modes and Features........................................................................................ 10-2
Control Modes and Applications................................................................................... 10-5
Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................10-7
Selection....................................................................................................................... 10-7
Installation .................................................................................................................... 10-8
Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10-8
Handling ....................................................................................................................... 10-9
Motor Application Precautions ................................................................. 10-10
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor...................................................... 10-10
Using the Inverter for Special Motors ......................................................................... 10-11
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ................... 10-11
Conformance to CE Markings ..................................................................10-12
CE Markings............................................................................................................... 10-12
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings........................................................ 10-12
User Constants.........................................................................................10-19

Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed G7 Introduction ...........................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-3
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions..............................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .............1-9
Installation Orientation and Space.............................1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............ 1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover..........................................................1-12

1-2
Varispeed G7 Introduction
Varispeed G7 Models
The Varispeed-G7 Series of Inverters included two Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. Maximum
motor capacities vary from 0.4 to 300 kW (41 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed G7 Models
Voltage
Class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed G7
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-G7
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-G7C
200 V class
0.4 1.2 CIMR-G7C20P4
Remove the top and bottom cov-
ers from the Enclosed Wall-
mounted model.
20P41
0.75 2.3 CIMR-G7C20P7 20P71
1.5 3.0 CIMR-G7C21P5 21P51
2.2 4.6 CIMR-G7C22P2 22P21
3.7 6.9 CIMR-G7C23P7 23P71
5.5 10 CIMR-G7C25P5 25P51
7.5 13 CIMR-G7C27P5 27P51
11 19 CIMR-G7C2011 2011
15 25 CIMR-G7C2015 20151
18.5 30 CIMR-G7C2018 20181
22 37 CIMR-G7C2022 20220 20221
30 50 CIMR-G7C2030 20300 20301
37 61 CIMR-G7C2037 20370 20371
45 70 CIMR-G7C2045 20450 20451
55 85 CIMR-G7C2055 20550 20551
75 110 CIMR-G7C2075 20750 20751
90 140 CIMR-G7C2090 20900 -
110 160 CIMR-G7C2110 21100 -
400 V class
0.4 1.4 CIMR-G7C40P4
Remove the top and bottom cov-
ers from the Enclosed Wall-
mount model.
40P41
0.75 2.6 CIMR-G7C40P7 40P71
1.5 3.7 CIMR-G7C41P5 41P51
2.2 4.7 CIMR-G7C42P2 42P21
3.7 6.9 CIMR-G7C43P7 43P71
5.5 11 CIMR-G7C45P5 45P51
7.5 16 CIMR-G7C47P5 47P51
11 21 CIMR-G7C4011 40111
15 26 CIMR-G7C4015 40151
18.5 32 CIMR-G7C4018 40181
22 40 CIMR-G7C4022 40220 40221
30 50 CIMR-G7C4030 40300 40301
37 61 CIMR-G7C4037 40370 40371
45 74 CIMR-G7C4045 40450 40451
55 98 CIMR-G7C4055 40550 40551
75 130 CIMR-G7C4075 40750 40751
90 150 CIMR-G7C4090 40900 40901
110 180 CIMR-G7C4110 41100 41101
132 210 CIMR-G7C4132 41320 41321
160 230 CIMR-G7C4160 41600 41601
185 280 CIMR-G7C4185 41850 -
220 340 CIMR-G7C4220 42200 -
300 460 CIMR-G7C4300 43000 -

1-3
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifica-
tions, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a European standard Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW, IEC
IP20 and NEMA 1 standards
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
Table 1.2 Checks
Item Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
delivered?
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output
specifications
Lot number
Serial number
Input specifications
Inverter
specifications
Mass
G C

1-4
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity,
the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
TERMS
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1 Type 1)
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the
interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure con-
forms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the USA.
Top protective cover must be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 Type 1 requirements. Refer to
Fig. 1.4 for details.
CIMR - G7 C 2 0P4
Inverter
Varispeed G7
No.
C European standard
Specification
No.
2
4
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
Voltage Class
No.
0P4
0P7
300
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
300 kW
Max. Motor Capacity
to to
"P" indicates the decimal point.
*
2 0P4 1
No.
0
1
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20,
NEMA 1 Type 1)
Protective Structure
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
No.
0P4
0P7
300
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
300 kW
Max. Motor Capacity
to to
"P" indicates the decimal point.
*

1-5
Component Names
Inverters of 15 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4. The Inverter with the ter-
minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5.
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (15 kW or Less)
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (15 kW or Less)
Top protective cover
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Mounting hole
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Diecast case
NPJT31278-1-0NPJT31278-1-0
CAUTIONCAUTION Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals

1-6
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.6. The Inverter with the ter-
minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.7.
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or More)
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or More)
Mounting holes
Cooling fan
Nameplate
Inverter cover
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Terminal Arrangement(18.5kW or More)
Charge indicator
Control circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Ground terminal

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
1-7
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 Type 1)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 Type 1) are shown below.
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
W
W1
3
H1H2
D
H
D1
4-d
t1
200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 or 22 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 30 to 45 kW
W
W1 4-d
H2
(5)
D1
D
H1
H
t1
(5)(5)
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW
W
W1
3
H1H2
D
H0
D1
H3
4H
4-d
t1
200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 or 22 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 30 to 45 kW
W
W1
H3H0
H1H2
D1
D(5)
4-d
t1
(5)(5)
H
Grommet
Max.10
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW

1-8
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Voltage
Class
Max.
Appli-
cable
Motor
Output
[kW]
Dimensions (mm)
Heat Genera-
tion (W)
Cool-
ing
Method
Open Chassis (IP00) Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
Exter
nal
Inter-
nal
Total
Heat
Gen-
era-
tion
W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1
Ap-
prox.
Mass
W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1
Ap-
prox.
Mass
Mount-
ing
Holes
d*
200 V
(3-phase)
0.4
140 280
157
126 266 7
39
5
3
140 280
157
126 280 266 7
0
39
5
3
M5
20 39 59
Natu-
ral
0.75 27 42 69
1.5 50 50 100
2.2
177 59 4 177 59 4
70 59 129
Fan
3.7 112 74 186
5.5
200 300 197 186 285 8 65.5
2.3
6
200
300
197 186 300 285 8 65.5
2.3
6
M6
164 84 248
7.5 7 310 10 7 219 113 332
11
240 350 207 216 335
7.5
78 11 240
350
207 216 350 335
7.5
0
78 11
374 170 544
15 380 30 429 183 612
18.5 250 400
258
195 385
100
21 254 535
258
195 400 385 135
100
24 501 211 712
22 275 450 220 435 24 279 615 220 450 435 165 27 586 274 860
30
375 600
300
250 575
13
100
3.2
57
380 890
300
250 600 575
13
210
100
3.2
62
M10
865 352 1217
37 330
130
63 330
130
68 1015 411 1426
45
450 725 350 325 700
86
455 1100 350 325 725 700 305
94 1266 505 1771
55 87 95 1588 619 2207
75 500 850 360 370 820
15 4.5
108
--- M12
2019 838 2857
90
575 885 380 445 855 140 150
2437 997 3434
110 2733 1242 3975
400 V
(3-phase)
0.4
140 280
157
126 266 7
39
5
3
140 280
157
126 280 266 7
0
39
5
3
M5
14 39 53 Natu-
ral0.75 17 41 58
1.5
177 59 4 177 59 4
36 48 84
Fan
2.2 59 56 115
3.7 80 68 148
5.5
200 300 197 186 285 8 65.5
2.3
6 200 300 197 186 300 285 8 65.5
2.3
6
M6
127 82 209
7.5 193 114 307
11
240 350 207 216 335
7.5
78 10 240 350 207 216 350 335
7.5
78 10
252 158 410
15 326 172 498
18.5
275 450 258 220 435 100 21 279 535 258 220 450 435
85
100 24
426 208 634
22 466 259 725
30
325 550 283 260 535 105 36 329
635
283 260 550 535 105 40
678 317 995
37 784 360 1144
45 715 165 901 415 1316
55
450 725 350 325 700 13
130
3.2
88
455 1100 350 325 725 700 13 305
130
3.2
96
M10
1203 495 1698
75 89 97 1399 575 1974
90
500 850 360 370 820
15 4.5
102
505 1245 360 370 850 820
15
395
4.5
122
M12
1614 671 2285
110 120 130 2097 853 2950
132
575 925 380 445 895 140 160 580 1325 380 445 925 895 400 140 170
2388 1002 3390
160 2791 1147 3938
185
Under development220
300

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
1-9
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions.
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 15 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed
panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other
foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
Table 1.4 Installation Site
Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted -10 to + 40 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis -10 to + 45 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)

1-10
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wall-
mounted (IP20, NEMA 1 Type 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
15 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or more in a panel.
30 mm min. 30 mm min.
120 mm min.
120 mm min.
Air
Air
Vertical SpaceHorizontal Space

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc-
tions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7C23P7 Shown Above)
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7C2018 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce-
dure.
For Inverters with an output of 15 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the grove on
the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1
2
1
1
2

1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover are described in this sec-
tion.
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in
addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the
terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-G7C43P7 Shown Above)
1
2

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
1-13
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7C43P7 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to
remove the front cover.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverting using the following proce-
dure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
1
1
2

1-14
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than
those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
A
B
1
2

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
1-15
For Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce-
dures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7C2018 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the
front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 15 kW or less.
1
2

Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit termi-
nal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2
Connection Diagram....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................2-20
Wiring Check .............................................................2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-29

2-2
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
Power supply
Molded-case
circuit breaker
or ground fault
interrupter
Magnetic con-
tactor (MC)
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
Braking resistor
Input noise filter
Inverter
DC reactor for power
factor improvement
Ground
Output noise filter
Ground
Motor

Connection Diagram
2-3
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-G7C2018 Shown Above)
Inverter
CIMR-G7C2018
Multi-function
contact oputput 2
Open collector 3
Open collector 4
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VDC, 50 mA max.
Factory setting:
Zero speed
Multi-function
contact oputput
Factory setting:
Frequency
agree signal
MA
MC
MB
Error contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VAC, 1 A max.
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VAC, 1 A max.
Factory setting: Running
signal
AC
MP
Pulse train output
Default: Output
frequency
3-phase power
200 to 240 V
50/60 Hz
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
1MCCB
T
S
R
S5
S8
S9
(Main speed switching) )g)
External
baseblock command
Multi-step speed
reference 3
Multi-step speed
reference 4
Acc/dec time 1
Emergency stop (NO)
S1
S2
S3
S4
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-step speed reference 1
contact inputs
Multi-function
Factory
settings
IG
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
R+
R-
S-
S+
(Note 1)((
Braking Unit
(optional)
+ 1 + 3
FM
AM
Multi-function analog output 1
AC
FM
E(G)
-10 to 10 V, 2 mA/4 to 20 mA
Factory setting: Output frequency
0 to +10 V
Factory setting: Output currentt
0 to +10 V
-10 to 10 V, 2 mA/4 to 20 mA
(Note 7)
Ammeter adjustment
20 kΩ
SC
E (G) Shield wire
connection terminal
(Note 3)
P4
C4
P3
Factory setting:
FOUT frequency
detection 2
Factory setting:
Inverter operation
ready
S6
S7
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Jog frequency
selection
S11
S12
CN5 (NPN setting) +24V 8mA
+24V
S10
P
P4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
Pulse train input
RP
+V
A2
A3
AC
0V
Master speed
pulse train
Frequency setting power
Master speed reference
Multi-function anlog input
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
+15 V, 20 mA
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Frequency
Frequency setting
adjustment
setter
External
frequency
references
2
1
3
P
-V (15V 20mA)
Terminating
resistance
C3
Factory setting:
Auxiliary frequency
command
PG
PG-X2 TA1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(optional)
TA3
TA2
1
Pulse monitor output
Wiring distance:d :
100 m max.
Shieded twisted-pair
wires
H
B
G
A
F
C
D
UU/T1
V/T2
W/T3
IM
(Ground to 100 max.)
V
W
IM
FU
FV
FW
R1
S1
T1
R1
S1
T1
2MCCB
MC
Cooling fan
Motor
SA
2MCCB THRX OFF
ON
MC
MC
SA
THRX
21
21
SA
TRX
TRX
MC
CMC
Fault contact
MA
Thermal relay
trip contact
for motor cooling fan
MA
CMC
for Braking Unit
-
Level
detector
-
-
+0
0
B
P
Braking Resistor Unit
(optional)
43 21
+
Thermal switch contact
Thermal relay trip contact
for Braking Resistor Unit
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
(Note 1)
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
2 k Ω
2 k Ω
Thermal relay trip contact
A1
Pulse A
Pulse B
1
2
3
3 4
4
Ammeter adjustment
20 kΩ
AM

2-4
IMPORTANT
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
2. The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set constant L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during decel-
eration.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single
circles.
5. The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling motors.
6. PG circuit wiring (i.e., wiring to the PG-B2 Card) is not required for open-loop vector control.
7. Sequence input signals S1 to S12 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode)
for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V exter-
nal power supply, refer toTable 2.13.
8. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
9. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, volt-
meter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
10.DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200 V Class Inverters for 18.5 to 110 kW and 400
V Class Inverters for 18.5 to 300 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 15 kW or less.
11.Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor (ERF). When using a Braking Resistor Unit, a
shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.
S12S11
M2
MCMB
M1
MA
M3
M5
M4
M6
IG
RP
S-
AM
AC
S+
AC
MP
R-
FM
A3
R+
S8
-V
C4
S7
AC
P4
S6
+V
C3
S5
A2
P3
S4
A1
S3
SP
S1
SN
S9
S2
SC
S10
E(G)E(G)

Terminal Block Configuration
2-5
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW Shown Above)
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 18.5 kW Shown Above)
NPJT31278-1-0NPJT31278-1-0
CAUTIONCAUTION Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Terminal Arrangement(18.5kW or More)
Charge indicator
Control circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Ground terminal

2-6
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.3. Refer to instruction manual
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
Termi-
nal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2
(AWG)
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
G7C20P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
G7C20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
G7C21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
G7C22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
G7C23P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
5.5
(10)
G7C25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
G7C27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
14
(6)
14
(6)
G7C2011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M6 4.0 to 5.0
22 to 30
(4 to 3)
22
(4)
B1, B2 M5 2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
-
M6 4.0 to 5.0
22
(4)
22
(4)
G7C2015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M8 9.0 to 10.0
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
30
(3)
B1, B2 M5 2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
-
M6 4.0 to 5.0
22
(4)
22
(4)
G7C2018
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M8 9.0 to 10.0
30 to 60
(3 to 1)
30
(3)
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
-
M8 9.0 to 10.0
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
G7C2022
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M8 9.0 to 10.0
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
50
(1)
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
-
M8 9.0 to 10.0
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
G7C2030
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10 17.6 to 22.5
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
60
(2/0)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
-
M10 17.6 to 22.5
30 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
30
(2)
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)

2-7
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C
G7C2037
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10 17.6 to 22.5
80 to 125
(3/0 to 250)
80
(3/0)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
-
M10 17.6 to 22.5
38 to 60
(1 to 2/0)
38
(1)
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C2045
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10 17.6 to 22.5
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
-
M10 17.6 to 22.5
30 to 60
(3 to 4/0)
50
(1/0)
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C2055
, 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
80 to 125
(3/0 to 250)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10 17.6 to 22.5
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
-
M12 17.6 to 22.5
80 to 200
(2/0 to 400)
80
(2/0)
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C2075
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
150 to 200
(250 to 350)
150 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
M12 31.4 to 39.2
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
100 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
-
M12 31.4 to 39.2
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
60 × 2P
(2/0 × 2P)
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C2090
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
200 to 325
(350 to 600)
200 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(350 × 2P,
or 1/0 × 4P)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
M12 31.4 to 39.2
150 to 325
(300 to 600)
150 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(300 × 2P,
or 1/0 × 4P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
-
M12 31.4 to 39.2
150
(300)
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C2110
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
200 to 325
(350 to 600)
200 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(350 × 2P,
or 1/0 × 4P)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/
L31
M12 31.4 to 39.2
150 to 325
(300 to 600)
150 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(300 × 2P,
or 1/0 × 4P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
-
M12 31.4 to 39.2
150
(300)
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
Termi-
nal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type

2-8
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
Termi-
nal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2
(AWG)
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Wire Type
G7C40P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
G7C40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
G7C41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
G7C42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
G7C43P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
G7C45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5
(10)
G7C47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8
(8)
G7C4011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5 2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
(M6)
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
5.5
(10)
G7C4015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M5 4.0 to 5.0
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
B1, B2 M5 2.5
8
(8)
8
(8)
M5
(M6)
4.0 to 5.0
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
8
(8)
G7C4018
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6 4.0 to 5.0
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14
(6)
M8 9.0 to 10.0
14 to 38
(6 to 2)
14
(6)
G7C4022
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6 4.0 to 5.0
22
(4)
22
(4)
M8 9.0 to 10.0
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
G7C4030
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M8 9.0 to 10.0
22 to 60
(4 to 1/0)
38
(2)
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
-
M8 9.0 to 10.0
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
G7C4037
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M8 9.0 to 10.0
30 to 60
(2 to 1/0)
38
(2)
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
-
M8 9.0 to 10.0
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)

2-9
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
G7C4045
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M8 9.0 to 10.0
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
50
(1)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
-
M8 9.0 to 10.0
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
G7C4055
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10 17.6 to 22.5
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50
(1/0)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
-
M10 17.6 to 22.5
38 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
38
(2)
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C4075
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10 17.6 to 22.5
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
100
(4/0)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
-
M10 17.6 to 22.5
50 to 100
(1 to 4/0)
50
(1)
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C4090
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
M10 17.6 to 22.5
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
-
M10 17.6 to 22.5
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
60
(2/0)
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C4110
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
M10 17.6 to 22.5
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
-
M10 17.6 to 22.5
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
100
(4/0)
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C4132
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M12 31.4 to 39.2
80 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
-
M12 31.4 to 39.2
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C4160
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M12 31.4 to 39.2
100 to 200
(4/0 to 400)
100 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8
80 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
-
M12 31.4 to 39.2
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
1.25
(16)
G7C4185
Under developmentG7C4220
G7C4300
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
Termi-
nal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2 (AWG)
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type

2-10
Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm2
) Terminal Screws Size
0.5
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
M4 1.25 to 4
0.75
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
M4 1.25 to 4
1.25
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
M4 1.25 to 4
2
M3.5 2 to 3.5
M4 2 to 4
M5 2 to 5
M6 2 to 6
M8 2 to 8
3.5/5.5
M4 5.5 to 4
M5 5.5 to 5
M6 5.5 to 6
M8 5.5 to 8
8
M5 8 to 5
M6 8 to 6
M8 8 to 8
14
M6 14 to 6
M8 14 to 8
22
M6 22 to 6
M8 22 to 8
30/38 M8 38 to 8
50/60
M8 60 to 8
M10 60 to 10
80
M10
80 to 10
100 100 to 10
100
M12
100 to 12
150 150 to 12
200 200 to 12
325
M12 x 2 325 to 12
M16 325 to 16
IMPORTANT
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-33

2-11
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals
correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose Terminal Symbol
Model: CIMR-G7C
200 V Class 400 V Class
Main circuit power input
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4160
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2018 to 2110 4018 to 4160
Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4160
DC power input 1, 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4160
Braking Resistor Unit connec-
tion
B1, B2 20P4 to 27P5 40P4 to 4015
DC reactor connection 1, 2 20P4 to 2015 40P4 to 4015
Braking Unit connection 3, 2018 to 2110 4018 to 4160
Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4160

2-12
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2.5.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
200 V Class 400 V Class
B1 B2
1+
+ 2
−
CIMR-G7C20P4 to 2015
Power
supply
Control
circuits
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
1+
+ 2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
−
B1 B2
CIMRG7C40P4 to 4015
Power
supply
Control
circuits
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
+ 3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
CIMR-G7C2018, 2022
Power
supply
Control
circuits
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
3
+
+
CIMR-G7C4018 to 4045
Power
supply
Control
circuits
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
+ 3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
/l2
r/ 1l
Power
supply
Control
circuits
+ 1
+ 3
200/ 2200l
400/ 2400l
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
−
r/ 1l
Power
supply
Control
circuits

2-13
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
CIMR-G7C20P4 to 2015 and 40P4 to
4015
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC
reactor.
CIMR-G7C2018, 2022, and 4018 to 4045
The DC reactor is built in.
CIMR-G7C2030 to 2110 CIMR-G7C4055 to 4300
+ 1 + 2 B1 B2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2 IM
W/T3
−
DC reactor
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
+ 1 + 3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2 IM
W/T3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (200 VAC)
+ 1 + 3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2 IM
W/T3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
/l2
r/l1
3-phase
200 VAC
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
+ 1 + 3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2 IM
W/T3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
200/l2200
400/l2400
r/l1
3-phase
400 VAC
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)

2-14
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
• If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the
power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.6.
Fig 2.6 MCCB Installation
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the
Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range
that is hazardous to humans and exclude high-frequency leakage current.
• For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sen-
sitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amper-
age of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
* For 400 V class Inverters, connect a 400/200 V transformer.
Power
supply
Inverter
Fault output
(NC)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
20P4 to 2030: 3-phase,
200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2037 to 2110: 3-phase,
200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
40P4 to 4300: 3-phase,
380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz

2-15
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
• If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by
the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the con-
verter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac-
tor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include mag-
netic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side
Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation
Fig 2.7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation
IM
MCCB
MCCB
Power
supply
Noise
filter Inverter
Other
controllers
Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.

2-16
• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation
Fig 2.8 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output termi-
nals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals,
the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter cas-
ing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency
components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage
to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during
operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the
overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate.
IM
MCCB
MCCB
IM
MCCB
MCCB
Power
supply
Power
supply
Inverter
Inverter
Other
controllers
Other
controllers
General-
purpose
noise filter
General-
purpose
noise filter
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No general-
purpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise
generated from the Inverter.

2-17
When using an MC to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the Inverter and motor before operating the
MC. Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation. If measures for momentary power
interrupts are required, use a delayed release MC.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side
Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.
Fig 2.9 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the out-
put side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keep-
ing the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.
Fig 2.10 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
Inductive Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio Noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make
noise.
IM
MCCB
Power
supply
Inverter Noise
filter
Signal line
Inductive
noise
Radio noise
AM radio
Controller
IM
MCCBPower
supply
Inverter
Signal line
Controller
Metal pipe
30 cm min.

2-18
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Fig 2.11 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, caus-
ing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 User Con-
stants.)
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the
ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
Fig 2.12 Ground Wiring
Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length 50 m max. 100 m max. More than 100 m
Carrier frequency 15 kHz max. 10 kHz max. 5 kHz max.
IM
MCCB
Power
supply
InverterNoise
filter
Metal pipe
Noise
filter
Steel box
OK NO

2-19
Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs
from 0.4 to 3.7 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.13.
Fig 2.13 Connecting the Braking Resistor
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Use the following settings when using a Braking Resistor Unit. Refer to User Constants on page 10-19 for con-
nection methods for a Braking Resistor Unit.
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to
3.7 kW.
L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted to
Inverter) is connected.
The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter if L3-
04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration).
Table 2.7
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 1 (Enables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
IMPORTANT
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting
to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equip-
ment.
Table 2.8
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 0 (Disables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
Inverter Braking resistor

2-20
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or opera-
tion signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or
relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.
Fig 2.14
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9.
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Close-loop Connector Sizes for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminals
Termi-
nal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible Wire
Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
FM, AC, AM, M3, M4,
SC, A1, A2, A3, +V, -V,
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6,
S7, S8, MA, MB, MC,
M1, M2, P3, C3, P4, C4,
MP, RP, R+, R-, S9, S10,
S11, S12, S+, S-, IG, SN,
SP
Phoenix
type
0.5 to 0.6
Single wire*3
:
0.14 to 2.5
Stranded wire:
0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
0.75
(18)
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-cov-
ered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electri-
cal Wire or equivalent)
E (G) M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2*2
(20 to 14)
1.25
(12)
Shield ter-
Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA
Master speed reference, -10 to 10 V
Master speed reference, 4 to 20 mA
Pulse input, 32 kHz
Auxiliary reference
Analog common
2 kΩ
2 kΩ
2 kΩ
2 kΩ

2-21
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Fig 2.15 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Fig 2.16 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wire Size mm2
(AWG) Model d1 d2 L Manufacturer
0.25 (24) AI 0.25 - 8YE 0.8 2 12.5
Phoenix Contact
0.5 (20) AI 0.5 - 8WH 1.1 2.5 14
0.75 (18) AI 0.75 - 8GY 1.3 2.8 14
1.25 (16) AI 1.5 - 8BK 1.8 3.4 14
2 (14) AI 2.5 - 8BU 2.3 4.2 14
L
Thin-slot screwdriver
Strip the end for
7 mm if no sold-
erless terminal is
used.
Control circuit
terminal block
Blade of screwdriver
Solderless terminal or wire
without soldering
Wires
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.

2-22
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.11. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
Se-
quence
input
signals
S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3 Multi-function input 1*1 Factory setting: External fault when ON.
S4 Multi-function input 2*1 Factory setting: Fault reset when ON.
S5 Multi-function input 3*1 Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference
1 effective when ON.
S7 Multi-function input 5*1 Factory setting: Jog frequency selected when
ON.
S8 Multi-function input 6*1 Factory setting: External baseblock when
ON.
S11 Multi-function input 9*1 Factory setting: Acceleration/deceleration
time selected when ON.
S12 Multi-function input 10*1 Factory setting: Emergency stop (NO con-
tact) when ON.
SC Sequence input common -
Analog
input
signals
+V +15 V power output +15 V power supply for analog references
+15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-V -15 V power output -15 V power supply for analog references
-15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1
Master speed frequency ref-
erence
-10 to +10 V/-100 to 100%
0 to +10 V/100%
-10 to +10 V, 0 to +10 V
(Input impedance:
20 kΩ)
A2 Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%, -10 to +10 V/-100 to
+100%, 0 to +10 V/100%
Factory setting: Added to terminal A1
(H3-09 = 0)
4 to 20 mA (Input imped-
ance: 250 Ω)
A3 Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%, -10 to +10 V/-100 to
+100%, 0 to +10 V/100%
Factory setting: Analog speed 2
(H3-05 = 2)
4 to 20 mA (Input imped-
ance: 250 Ω)
AC Analog reference common 0 V -
E(G)
Shield wire, optional ground
line connection point
- -

2-23
* 1. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.17.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
Photo-
coupler
outputs
P3
Multi-function PHC output 3
Factory setting: Ready for operation when
ON.
50 mA max. at 48 VDC*2
C3
P4
Multi-function PHC output 4
Factory setting: FOUT frequency detected
when ON.C4
Relay
outputs
MA
Fault output signal (NO con-
tact) Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
MB
Fault output signal (NC con-
tact)
MC
Relay contact output com-
mon
-
M1
(NO contact)
Factory setting: Operating
Operating when ON across M1 and M2.
M2
M3 Multi-function contact output
2
Factory setting: Zero speed
Zero speed level (b2-01) or below when ON.M4
M5
3
Factory setting: Frequency agreement detec-
tion
Frequency within 2 Hz of set frequency
when ON.
M6
Analog
moni-
tor out-
puts
FM
Multi-function analog moni-
tor 1
0 to 10 V/100% frequency
0 to +10 VDC ±5%
2 mA max.AM
Multi-function analog moni-
tor 2
Factory setting: Current monitor
5 V/Inverter's rated current
AC Analog common -
Pulse
I/O
RP Multi-function pulse input*3 Factory setting: Frequency reference input
(H6-01 = 0)
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
MP Multi-function pulse monitor
(H6-06 = 2)
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
RS-
485/
422
R+ MEMOBUS communica-
tions input
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well
as R- and S-.
Differential input, PHC
isolationR-
S+ MEMOBUS communica-
tions output
Differential output, PHC
isolationS-
IG Communications shield wire - -
Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V
H duty 30% to 70%
Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level

2-24
Fig 2.17 Flywheel Diode Connection
Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
Fig 2.18 Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V
common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external 24-V power supply is also supported, providing
more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.12 DIP Switch S1
Name Function Setting
S1-1
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resis-
tance
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
S1-2 Input method for analog input A2
OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
External power:
48 V max.
Coil
Flywheel diode
50 mA max.
The rating of the flywheel diode
must be at least as high as the
circuit voltage.
ONOFF Terminating resistance*
Analog input switch
Factory settings
Analog output switch**
Voltage output
Current output
*Note: Refer to Table 2.12 for S1 functions and
to Table 2.13 for Sinking/Sourcing Mode
and Input Signals.
**Note:CN15 is not available at the standard ter-
minal board. An optional terminal board
with CN15 Shunt Connector is available.
The standard setting is voltage output.

2-25
Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply External Power Supply
Sink-
ing
Mode
Sourc-
ing
Mode
IP24V(+24V)
SN
SC
SP
S1
S2
IP24V(+24V)
SN
SC
SP
S1
S2
External +24V
IP24V(+24V)
SN
SC
SP
S1
S2
IP24V(+24V)
SN
SC
SP
S1
S2
External +24V

2-26
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.19.
Fig 2.19 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Inverter
CIMR-G7C2018
Multi-function
contact output2
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VDC, 50 mA
Factory setting:
Zero speed
Multi-function
contact output
Factory setting:
Frequency
agree signal
MA
MB
MC
Error contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VDC, 1 A max.
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Multi-function contact output 1
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 DC, 1 A max.
Factory setting: Running
signal
AC
MP
Pulse train output
Factory setting: Output
frequency
S5
S8
S9
Multi-step speed
reference 3
Multi-step speed
reference 4
S1
S2
S3
S4
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-function
contact input
Factory
settings
IG
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
R-
R+
S-
S+
Terminating
resistance
FM
AM
AC
E(G)
-10 to 10 V, 2 mA/4 to 20 mA
AM
FM
+
+−
−
Factory setting: Output current
0 to +10 V
Factory setting: Output current
0 to +10 V
-10 to 10 V, 2 mA/4 to 20 mA
Ammeter adjustment
20 kΩ
Ammeter adjustment
20 kΩ
+24V 8mA
SC
+24V
SN
P4
C4
P3
S6
S7
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Jog frequency
selection
S11
S12
S10
P
P4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
Pulse train input
RP
+V
A1
A2
AC
0V
Master speed pulse train
Frequency setting power
+15 V 20 mA
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
Frequency setting
adjustment
Frequency
setter
2 kΩ
External
frequency
references
2 kΩ
2
1
3
E(G)
A3
0 to 10 V
P
-V (−15V 20mA)
C3
MA
MC
43
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V
input
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
(Main speed switching)
External
baseblock command
for Braking Unit
Acc/dec time 1
Emergency stop (NO)
Shield wire
connection terminal
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Factory setting:
Auxiliary frequency
command
Open collector 3
Open collector 4
Factory setting:
FOUT frequency
detection 2
Factory setting:
Inverter operation
ready

2-27
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to
other control circuit terminals.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process
cable ends as shown in Fig 2.20.
• Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
• Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Fig 2.20 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables
Shield sheath Armor
Connect to shield sheath ter-
minal at Inverter (terminal E
(G))
Insulate with tape
Do not connect here.

2-28
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform
the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?

Installing and Wiring Option Cards
2-29
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to three Option Cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one Card into each of the three
places on the controller card (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.21.
Table 2.14 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front
cover and then mount the Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for actual mounting instructions for option slots A, C,
and D.
Table 2.14 Option Card Specifications
Card Model Specifications
Mounting Loca-
tion
PG Speed Control Cards
PG-A2 Serial open-collector/complimentary inputs A
PG-B2 Phase A/B complimentary inputs A
PG-D2 Single line-driver inputs A
PG-X2 Phase A/B line-driver inputs A
Speed Reference Cards
AI-14U
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 kΩ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 1 channel
Input resolution: 14-bit
C
AI-14B
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 3 channels
Input resolution: 13-bit with sign bit
C
DI-08 8-bit digital speed reference setting C
DI-16H2 16-bit digital speed reference setting C
DeviceNet Communications
Card
SI-N DeviceNet communications support C
Profibus-DP Communica-
tions Card
SI-P Profibus-DP communications support C
InterBus-S Communications
Card
SI-R InterBus-S communications support C
Analog Monitor Card
AO-08 8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels D
AO-12 12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels D
Digital Output Card
DO-08 Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs D
DO-02C 2 relay outputs D

2-30
Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot C or D, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector
from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and
pulling it out.
Remove the Option Clip before installing an Option Card into slot C or D. The Option Card can not be
installed completely and may not function properly if it is installed with the Option Clip attached.
Fig 2.21 Mounting Option Cards
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Cards are given in the following tables.
PG-A2
The terminal specifications for the PG-A2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.15 PG-A2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal No. Contents Specifications
TA1
1
Power supply for pulse generator
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
2 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3 +12 V/open collector switching ter-
minal
Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input
and open collector input. For open collector input,
short across 3 and 4.4
5
Pulse input terminal
H: +4 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum response fre-
quency: 30 kHz)
6 Pulse input common
7
Pulse motor output terminal
12 VDC (±10%), 20 mA max.
8 Pulse monitor output common
TA2 (E) Shield connection terminal -
A Option Card mounting spacer hole
4CN
A Option Card connector
2CN
C Option Card connector
A Option Card mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Card.)
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D Option Cards)
3CN
D Option Card connector
A Option Card
A Option Card mounting spacer
D Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card mounting spacer
D Option Card
C Option Card

2-31
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
PG-D2
The terminal specifications for the PG-D2 are given in the following table.
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
Table 2.16 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
TA1
1
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
3
A-phase pulse input terminal
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
5
B-phase pulse input terminal
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
TA2
1
A-phase monitor output terminal
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
2 A-phase monitor output common
3
B-phase monitor output terminal
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
4 B-phase monitor output common
Table 2.17 PG-D2 Terminal Specifications
TA1
1
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
3 5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4 Pulse input + terminal Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz5 Pulse input - terminal
6 Common terminal -
7 Pulse monitor output + terminal
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
8 Pulse monitor output - terminal

2-32
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
Wiring
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the Control Cards.
Wiring the PG-A2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-A2.
Fig 2.22 Wiring a 12 V Voltage Input
Table 2.18 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
TA1
1
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
3 5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4 A-phase + input terminal
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
5 A-phase - input terminal
6 B-phase + input terminal
7 B-phase - input terminal
8 Z-phase + input terminal
9 Z-phase - input terminal
10 Common terminal 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
TA2
1 A-phase + output terminal
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
2 A-phase - output terminal
3 B-phase + output terminal
4 B-phase - output terminal
5 Z-phase + output terminal
6 Z-phase - output terminal
7 Control circuit common Control circuit GND
Three-phase, 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
+12 V power supply
0 V power supply
12 V voltage input (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
R/L1
V/T2
W/T3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
4CN 4CN
E E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TA1
TA2 (E)
PC-A2

2-33
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.23 Wiring an Open-collector Input
Fig 2.24 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-A2
Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC) Inverter
+12 V power supply
0 V power supply
Open collector output (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
R/L1
V/T2
W/T3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
4CN 4CN
E E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TA1
TA2 (E)
PC-A2
PG power
supply
+12 V
Short for
open-col-
lector
input
Pulse
input
Pulse input
Pulse
monitor
output

2-34
Wiring the PG-B2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-B2.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05. The factory preset if for forward
rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.25 PG-B2 Wiring
• When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with
a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
• The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using constant F1-06.
Fig 2.26 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
A-phase pulse output (+)
A-phase pulse output (-)
B-phase pulse output (+)
B-phase pulse output (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
PG power
supply +12 V
A-phase pulse
input
B-phase pulse
input
A-phase
pulses
B-phase
pulses
Divisionratecircuit
B-phase pulse
monitor output
A-phase pulse
monitor output
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses

2-35
Wiring the PG-D2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-D2.
Fig 2.27 PG-D2 Wiring
Wiring the PG-X2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X2.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if
for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.28 PG-X2 Wiring
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
Pulse input + (A/B phase)
Pulse input - (A/B phase)
Three-phase
200 VAC (400
VAC)
Inverter
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output
R/L1
S/L2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3T/L3

2-36
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power
lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the
shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.19.
Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals
We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Refer to Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications.
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.20.
Wiring Method and Precautions
The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to page 2-2-21. Observe
the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main circuit lines and power lines.
• Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors
caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long. Refer to Fig 2.20 for details on
connecting the shield.
• Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).
• Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
• When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.
Table 2.19 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Terminal
Screws Wire Thickness (mm2
) Wire Type
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
-
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl
sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or
equivalent)Shield connection terminal M3.5 0.5 to 2
Table 2.20 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques
Wire Thickness [mm2
]
Terminal
Screws
Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N • m)
0.5
M3.5
1.25 - 3.5
0.8
0.75 1.25 - 3.5
1.25 1.25 - 3.5
2 2 - 3.5

2-37
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Card being used. Set the
correct number for your model.
PG-A2/PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in
Table 2.21.
Note 1. The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 V.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a
backup capacitor or other method.)
Fig 2.29 PG-B2 Connection Example
Table 2.21 PG Pulse Selection Examples
Motor's Maximum Speed (min−1)
PG Rating
(p/rev)
PG Output Frequency for Maximum Fre-
quency Output (Hz)
1800 600 18,000
1500 800 20,000
1200 1000 20,000
900 1200 18,000
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (min−1
)
60
× PG rating (p/rev) = 20,000 Hz
PG power supply
Capacitor for momentary
power loss
Signals

2-38
PG-D2/PG-X2
There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (fPG).
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary
power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
Fig 2.30 PG-X2 Connection Example (for 12 V PG power supply)
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (min−1
)
60
× PG rating (p/rev)fPG (Hz) =
TA1
IP12
IG
IP5
A (+)
A (-)
B (+)
B (-)
Z (+)
Z (-)
IG
TA3
PG-X2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
AC
PG
+ +
+
-
-
0 V
Capacitor for
momentary
power loss
0V +12V
PG power
supply
+12 V

Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes..........................................................................3-4

3-2
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key Name Function
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
JOG Key
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
Digital Operator.
Drive Mode Indicators
FWD: Lit when there is a forward run command input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse run command input.
SEQ: Lit when the run command from the control
circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control
circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and settings.
Mode Display (Displayed at upper left of data display.)
DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE: Lit in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants,
monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Frequency Ref

Digital Operator
3-3
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the
dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is
shown in the Fig 3.2.
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
FWD/REV Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
operated from the Digital Operator.
Shift/RESET Key
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Increment Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set
values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Decrement Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set
values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
DATA/ENTER Key
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
Also used to switch from one display to another.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by
the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Key Name Function
Inverter output frequency
Frequency setting
STOP STOPRUN
RUN
STOP
: Lit : Blinking : Not lit

3-4
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it eas-
ier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Autotuning mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error
has occurred. The default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector control 1 (A1-02 = 2).
Table 3.2 Modes
Mode Primary function(s)
Drive mode
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output cur-
rent, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Quick programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the
Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Advanced programming mode Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Verify mode
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factory-
set values.
Autotuning mode*
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector
control mode. The motor constants are calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.

Modes
3-5
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to
access the setting display.
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
IMPORTANT
When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to select the drive mode (dis-
played on the LCD screen) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the
monitor display. Run commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the drive mode
will appear when the power is turned ON.)
Frequency Ref
-DRIVE-
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Operation
** Main Menu **
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Modified Consts
** Main Menu **
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
Rdy
U1- 01=60.00Hz
Monitor
-DRIVE-
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Rdy
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
MENU
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Control Method
-QUICK-
A1-02=2
Initialization
-ADV-
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
None Modified
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
-DRIVE-
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1- 01=60.00Hz
Frequency Ref
-DRIVE- Rdy
U1- 01=060.00Hz
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
RESET
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Control Method
-QUICK-
A1-02= 2
Open Loop Vector
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Select Language
-ADV-
A1- 00 =0 *1*
English
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
English
ESC
DATA
ENTERRESET
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
The constant number will be displayed if a
constant has been changed. Press the
DATA/ENTER Key to enable the change.
Monitor Display Setting Display
Mode Selection
Display
Display at Startup
Open Loop Vector
Tuning Mode Sel
-A.TUNE-
Standard Tuning
"0"
Tuning Mode Sel
-A.TUNE-
Standard Tuning
"0"
*2*
Rdy
A1- 00= 0 *1*
T1- 01=0 1 *0* T1- 01= 0 *0*
*2*

3-6
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in
drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault
information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be
written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the
setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
Frequency Ref
-DRIVE-
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Operation
** Main Menu **
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Modified Consts
** Main Menu **
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
U1- 01=60.00Hz
Monitor
-DRIVE-
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
MENU
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
-DRIVE-
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1- 01=60.00Hz
Frequency Ref
-DRIVE-
U1-01= 060.00Hz
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
RESET
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Monitor Display Frequency Setting DisplayMode Selection
Display
Display at Startup
Fault Trace
-DRIVE-
U2-02= OV
U2-03=60.00Hz
U2 - 01=OC
Fault History
-DRIVE-
U3-02= OV
U3-03= OH
U3 - 01= OC
Output Freq
-DRIVE-
U1-04= 2
U1-03=10.05A
U1- 02=60.00Hz
FAN Elapsed Time
-DRIVE-
U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1- 40 = 10H
1 2
1 2
Last Fault
-DRIVE-
U3-02=OV
U3-03=OH
U3 - 01 = OC
Fault Message 2
-DRIVE-
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
U3 - 02 = OV
RESET
ESC
5 6
5 6
A B
A B
Current Fault
-DRIVE-
U2-02=OV
U2-03=60.00Hz
U2 - 01 = OC
Last Fault
-DRIVE-
U3-03=60.00Hz
U3-04=60.00Hz
U2 - 02 = OV
3 4
3 4
RESET
ESC
U2 - 01= OC
U2 - 02= OV
Over Current
DC Bus Overvolt
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
U3 - 01= OC
Over Current
DATA
ENTER
ESC
U3 - 02= OV
DC Bus Overvolt
DATA
ENTER
ESC
The fault name will be
displayed if the DATA/ENTER
Key is pressed while a constant
is being displayed for which a
fault code is being displayed.
Rdy
Rdy
Rdy
Rdy
Rdy
Rdy
Rdy
Rdy
Rdy Rdy
Rdy
Rdy
The Frequency Setting
Display will not be
displayed when using an
analog reference.
ESC
Monitor
-DRIVE-
U1-04= 2
U1-03=10.05A
U1 - 02=60.00Hz
Rdy
RESET
ESC
Monitor
-DRIVE-
U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1 - 40 = 10H
Rdy RESET
ESC
Rdy
Rdy
Rdy
Fault Trace
-DRIVE-
U3-03=60.00Hz
U3-04=60.00Hz
U2 - 02 = OV
Rdy RESET
ESC
Fault Message 2
-DRIVE-
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
U3 - 02 = OV
Rdy
RESET
ESC
DATA
ENTER

Modes
3-7
Note When changing the display with the Increment and Decrement Keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the
first parameter number and vise versa. For example, the next display after the one for U1-01 will be U1-40. This is indicated in the figures by the letters
A and B and the numbers 1 to 6.
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
IMPORTANT
The display for the first monitor constant (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.

3-8
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Operation
** Main Menu **
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Modified Consts
** Main Menu **
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
MENU
Control Method
-QUICK-
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
Reference Source
-QUICK-
b1-01=1 *1*
Terminals
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
ESC
DATA
ENTER DATA
ENTER
ESC
Run Source
-QUICK-
b1-02=1 *1*
Terminals
Monitor Display Frequency Setting DisplayMode Selection Display
MOL Fault Select
-QUICK-
L1-01=1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
StallP Decel Sel
-QUICK-
L3-04=1 *1*
Enabled
Terminal AM Gain
-QUICK-
H4-05=0.50
A B
A B
Control Method
-QUICK-
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
Reference Source
-QUICK-
b1-01= 1 *1*
Terminals
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Run Source
-QUICK-
b1-02= 1 *1*
Terminals
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Terminal AM Gain
-QUICK-
H4-05= 0 .50
MOL Fault Select
-QUICK-
L1-01= 1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
StallP Decel Sel
-QUICK-
L3-04= 1 *1*
Enabled
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC

Modes
3-9
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode, all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
A1- 00= 0
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Operation
** Main Menu **
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Modified Consts
** Main Menu **
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
MENU
Initialization
-ADV-
A1-00=1
Select Language
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Select Language
-ADV-
A1- 00 =0
English
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
English
*1*
ESC
DATA
ENTER
RESET
Monitor Display Setting DisplayMode Selection Display
PID Control
-ADV-
b5-01=0
PID Mode
ESC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
RESET
Control Method
-ADV-
A1- 02 =2
Open Loop Vector
PID Mode
-ADV-
b5- 01 =0
Disabled
Control Method
-ADV-
A1- 02= 2
Open Loop VectorESC
DATA
ENTER
*2*
*1*
*2*
1 2
1 2
PID Mode
-ADV-
b5-01= 0
Disabled
*0* *0*
Fb los Det Time
-ADV-
b5-14= 1.0Sec
Fb los Det Time
-ADV-
b5-14=01.0Sec
ESC
DATA
ENTER
3 4
3 4
Torque Limit
-ADV-
L7-01=200%
Fwd Torque Limit
ESC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
RESET
ESC
DATA
ENTER
5 6
5 6
Fwd Torque Limit
-ADV-
L7- 01= 200%
Fwd Torque Limit
-ADV-
L7-01= 2 00%
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn
-ADV-
L7-04= 2 00%
Fwd Torque Limit
-ADV-
L7- 04= 200%
A B
A B
Initialization
-ADV-
A1- 02 =2
Control Method
ESC
RESET
PID Control
-ADV-
b5 - 14= 1.0Sec
Fb los Det Time
ESC
RESET
Fwd Torque Limit
-ADV-
L7- 04= 200%
Torque Limit
ESC
RESET

3-10
Setting User Constants
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.
Table 3.3 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display Description
1 Power supply turned ON.
2 MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
3 MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.
4 MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.
5 DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
6 Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
7
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting display. The setting of C1-01
(10.00) is displayed.
8 Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right.
9 Increment Key pressed to change set value to 20.00 s.
10 DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data.
11
“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1.0 s after the data setting has been con-
firmed with the DATA/ENTER Key.
12 The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
Frequency Ref
-DRIVE-
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Rdy
U1- 01=60.00Hz
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Operation
** Main Menu **
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
Initialization
-ADV-
A1-00=1
Select Language
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
(0.0 6000.0)
10.0Sec
C1-00= 10.0Sec
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
C1-01= 0 010.0Sec
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
C1-01= 0 010.0Sec
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
C1-01= 00 10.0Sec
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
C1-01= 00 20.0Sec
Entry Accepted
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
C1- 01= 20.0Sec

Modes
3-11
External Fault Setting Procedure
Examples of the Digital Operator displays that appear when setting an eternal error for a multi-function con-
tact input in Advanced Programming Mode are shown in the following diagram.
Fig 3.7 External Fault Function Setting Example
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Operation
** Main Menu **
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Modified Consts
** Main Menu **
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
MENU
Digital Inputs
-ADV-
H1-01=24
Terminal S3 Sel
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Terminal S3 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 01 =24
External Fault
ESC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
RESET
*24*
1 2A B
A B
Digital Inputs
-ADV-
H2-01= 0
Term M1-M2 Sel
Pulse I/O Setup
-ADV-
H6-01= 0
Pulse Input Sel
Terminal S4 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 02 =14*14*
Terminal S8 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 08 =08
Ext BaseBlk N.O.
*08*
Terminal S3 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 01= 24
NO/Always Det
*24*
Coast to Stop
Terminal S3 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 01= 25
NC/Always Det
*24*
Coast to Stop
Terminal S3 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 01= 26
NO/During RUN
*24*
Coast to Stop
Terminal S3 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 01= 27
NC/During RUN
*24*
Coast to Stop
Terminal S3 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 01= 2F
NC/During RUN
*24*
Alarm Only
3 4
3 4
1 2
DATA
ENTER
Fault Reset
Terminal S4 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 02 =14
Digital Inputs
ESC
RESET
"24"
"14"
"08"Terminal S8 Sel
-ADV-
H1- 08 =08
Digital Inputs
ESC
RESET

3-12
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a program-
ming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Of the environment mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment
modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the programming
modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will
be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing
the setting.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their
default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Fig 3.8 Operations in Verify Mode
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Operation
** Main Menu **
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Modified Consts
** Main Menu **
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
DATA
ENTER
Reference Source
-VERIFY-
b1-01=0 *0*
Terminals
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Accel Time 1
-VERIFY-
C1-01=200.0Sec
A B
A B
Reference Source
-VERIFY-
b1-01= 0 *0*
Terminals
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Input Voltage
-VERIFY-
E1-01=200VAC
Motor Rated FLA
-VERIFY-
E2-01=2.00A
Motor Rated FLA
-VERIFY-
E2-01= 2.00A
Input Voltage
-VERIFY-
E1-01= 200VAC
Accel Time 1
-VERIFY-
C1-01=0200.0Sec
DATA
ENTER
ESC
"1"
"1"

Modes
3-13
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the vector control
modes. Always perform autotuning before starting operation.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning. Contact your Yaskawa
representatives to set motor constants by calculation.
The Inverter's autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants, while a servo system's auto-
tuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different. The
default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector control 1.
Example of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of
poles specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN Key. The motor is automatically run
and the motor constants measured based on these settings and autotuning will be set.
Always set the above items. Autotuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g., it cannot be started from the motor
rated voltage display.
The following example shows autotuning for open-loop vector control while operating the motor without
switching to motor 2.

3-14
* TUn10 will be displayed during rotational autotuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary autotuning. The DRIVE indicator will light when
autotuning starts.
Fig 3.9 Operation in Autotuning Mode
IMPORTANT
The setting displays in for autotuning depend on the control mode (V/f, V/f with PG, open-loop vector 1, open-
loop vector 2, or flux vector). If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
START GOAL
** Main Menu **
-DRIVE-
Operation
** Main Menu **
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Modified Consts
** Main Menu **
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
DATA
ENTER
Tuning Mode Sel
-A.TUNE-
T1- 01 =0 *0*
ESC
DATA
ENTER
A
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
RUN
Auto-Tuning
-A.TUNE-
Press RUN key
Tuning Ready ?
Tune Proceeding
-A.TUNE-
48.0Hz/10.5A
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Standard Tuning
Tuning Mode Sel
-A.TUNE-
01 = 0*0*
Rated Frequency
-A.TUNE-
T1- 05 = 60.0Hz
Number of Poles
-A.TUNE-
T1- 06 = 4
Rated Frequency
-A.TUNE-
T1-05 = 0 60.0Hz
Number of Poles
-A.TUNE-
T1- 06 = 04
A
Rdy
Tune Aborted
-A.TUNE-
STOP key
STOP
The display will
automatically
change depending
on the status of
autotuning.
Standard Tuning
START GOAL
Tune Proceeding
-A.TUNE-
48.0Hz/10.5A
Tune Successful
-A.TUNE-
Tune Successful
Tune Proceeding
-A.TUNE-
"0" "0"
0.0Hz/0.0A

Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example
of trial operation.
Trial Operation Procedure............................................4-2
Trial Operation Procedures..........................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions............................................4-16

4-2
Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
V/f with PG
(A1-02 = 1)
START
Installation
Wiring
Turn ON power.
Confirm status.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
Set power supply voltage.
Select operating
method.
Settings according
to control mode
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
No-load operation
Loaded operation
Optimum adjustments and
constant settings
Check/record constants.
END
YESV/f
(Default: A1-02 = 0)
Vector (A1-02 = 2, 3, or 4)*5
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz (400 V/60 Hz)
YES
NO
YES
NO
V/f control?
PG?
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall or
overload?
OK to operate
motor during autotuning?
Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only
Rotational autotuning Stationary autotuning
*3
*4
*2
*1 Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 55 kW or more.
*2 If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set
the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced
programming mode.
*3 Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy
whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
*4 If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual
installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line
resistance only on-site.
*5 The default control mode is open-loop vector control 2
(A1-02 = 2).
*1
*6 *6
*6 If the maximum output frequency and base frequency
are different, set the maximum output frequency (E1-
04) after autotuning.

Trial Operation Procedures
4-3
The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW
or Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters
of 55 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply
voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Jumper
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)
Power tab
Jumper (factory-set position)
CHARGE indicator
200 V class power supply
400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals

4-4
Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
Display for normal operation The frequency reference monitor is dis-
played in the data display section.
Display for fault operation
The display will differ depending on the
type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0 0 0.0 0Hz
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01= 60.0 0Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-02=60.00Hz
01
Frequency Ref
-DRIVE-
UV
DC Bus Undervolt

4-5
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (“QUICK” will be displayed on the LCD screen) and then set the fol-
lowing user constants. Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating proce-
dures and to Chapter 5 User Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on the user
constants.
Constants that must be set are listed in Table 4.1 and those that are set according to the application are listed in
Table 4.2.
Table 4.1 Constants that Must Be Set
Con-
stant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
A1-02
Control method
selection
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control 1
3: Flux vector
0 to 4 2 5-8
b1-01
Reference selec-
tion
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4 1
5-10
6-6
6-60
6-75
b1-02
Operation
method selection
Set the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
3: Option Card
0 to 3 1
5-10
6-11
6-60
6-75
C1-01
Acceleration time
1
Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output
frequency to climb from 0% to 100%.
0.0 to 6000.0 10.0 s
5-18
6-18
C1-02
Deceleration time
1
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output
frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
0.0 to 6000.0 10.0 s
5-18
6-18
E1-01
Input voltage set-
ting
Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage in volts.
155 to 255 V
(200 V class)
310 to 510 V
(400 V class)
200 V
(200 V
class)
400 V
(400 V
class)
5-28
6-99
E2-01
Motor rated cur-
rent
Set the motor rated current.
10% to 200%
of Inverter's
rated current
Settingfor
general-
purpose
motor of
same
capacity
as Inverter
5-30
6-45
6-97
L1-01
Motor protection
selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protec-
tion function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
0 to 3 1
5-48
6-45

4-6
Table 4.2 Constants that Are Set as Required
Con-
stant
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
b1-03
Stopping method
selection
Select stopping method when stop command is
sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
0 to 3 0
5-10
6-13
C6-02
Carrier fre-
quency selection
The carrier frequency is set low if the motor cable
is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio noise or leak-
age current.
1 to F
Depends
on capac-
ity, volt-
age, and
control
mode.
5-23
C6-11
Carrier fre-
quency selection
for open-loop
vector control 2
1 to 4
Depends
on kVA
setting.
5-25
d1-01 to
d1-04and
d1-17
Frequency refer-
ences 1 to 4 and
jog frequency ref-
erence
Set the required speed references for multi-step
speed operation or jogging.
0 to 400.00 Hz
d1-01 to
d1-04:
0.00 Hz
d1-17:
6.00 Hz
5-24
6-9
H4-02
and H4-
05
FM and AM ter-
minal output gain
Adjust when an instrument is connected to the FM
or AM terminal.
0.00 to 2.50
H4-02:
1.00
H4-05:
0.50
5-45
L3-04
Stall prevention
selection during
deceleration
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resis-
tor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be
sure to set constant L3-04 to 0 (disabled) or 3
(enabled with braking resistor).
0 to 3 1
5-52
6-23

4-7
Settings for the Control Methods
Autotuning methods depend on the control method set for the Inverter. Make the settings required by the con-
trol method.
Overview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to the following flow-
chart.
Note If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on-site.
* 1. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated. Always perform rotational autotuning when
using open-loop vector control 2.
* 2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13.
* 3. The default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector control 1 (A1-02 = 2).
* 4. If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) after autotuning.
Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method
START
YES
V/f
V/f control?
(A1-02 = 0 or 1)
PG?
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall
or overload?
NO
(Default: A1-02 = 0)
YES
(A1-02 = 1)
NO
Vector (A1-02 = 2, 3, or 4)*3
Set E1-03.
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
NO
YES
YES
NO
END
*2
Control mode selection
OK to operate
motor during autotuning?*1
Rotational autotuning*4 Stationary autotuning*4
Stationary autotuning for

4-8
Setting the Control Method
Any of the following five control methods can be set.
Note With vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The motor capacity for which stable control is possible is 50% to 100% of the capac-
ity of the Inverter.
PG Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced program-
ming mode.
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced program-
ming mode.
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
• Set the number of rotations per pulse in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the
motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Control Mode
Constant Set-
ting
Basic Control Main Applications
V/f control A1-02 = 0 Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
Variable speed control, particularly
control of multiple motors with one
Inverter and replacing existing invert-
ers
V/f control with PG A1-02 = 1
Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
with speed compensation using a PG
Applications requiring high-precision
speed control using a PG on the
machine side
Open-loop vector
control 1
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
Current vector control without a PG
Variable speed control, applications
requiring speed and torque accuracy
using vector control without a PG
Flux vector control A1-02 = 3 Flux vector control
Very high-performance control with a
PG (simple servo drives, high-preci-
sion speed control, torque control, and
torque limiting)
Open-loop vector
control 2
A1-02 = 4
Current vector control without a PG
with an ASR (speed controller)
(Always perform rotational autotun-
ing.)
Very high-performance control with-
out a PG (torque control without a PG,
torque limiting, applications requiring
a 1:200 speed control range without a
PG)
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz: E1-03 = 0
motor at 60 Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
motor at 50 Hz: E1-03 = 0
motor at 60 Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz

4-9
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
Open-loop Vector Control 1 (A1-02 = 2)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be oper-
ated, perform stationary autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 3)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be oper-
ated, perform stationary autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Open-loop Vector Control 2 (A1-02 = 4)
Perform autotuning. Be sure to perform rotational autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for
details on autotuning.
Autotuning
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set motor constants when using the vector
control method, when the cable length is long, etc.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
One of the following three autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotational autotuning
• Stationary autotuning
• Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Always confirm the precautions before autotuning before performing autotuning.
Rotational Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)
Rotational autotuning is used only for open-vector control. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the nameplate,
and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will stop the motor for approximately
1 minute and then set the required motor constants automatically while operating the motor for approximately
1 minute.
Stationary Autotuning (T1-01 = 1)
Stationary autotuning is used for open-vector control or flux vector control. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from
the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the sta-
tionary motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor constants will be set automatically. The
remaining motor constants will be set automatically the first time operation is started in drive mode.

4-10
Stationary Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Only (T1-01 = 2)
Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only auto-
tuning possible for V/f control and V/f control with PG modes.
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long (50 m or longer) or the cable
length has changed since installation or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities.
Set T1-01 to 2 for open-loop vector control, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter
will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resis-
tance (E2-05) and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
Precautions Before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning the Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning the servo system. Inverter autotuning
automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor constants, whereas servo system autotuning
adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the load.
• When speed precision or torque precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher),
use a motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for
200V-class Inverters and 40 V less for 400V-class Inverters. If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as
the input power supply voltage, the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds and
sufficient performance will not be possible.
• Use stationary autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a load.
• Use rotational autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that has fixed output characteris-
tics, when high precision is required, or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
• If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load, the motor constants will not be found
accurately and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for a motor
connected to a load.
• If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more between autotuning and motor
installation, perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.
• If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
even when using V/f control.
• The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs will be as shown in the following table
during autotuning. When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that the hold-
ing brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment.
• To cancel autotuning, always use the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Tuning Mode Multi-function Inputs Multi-function Outputs
Rotational autotuning Do not function.
Same as during normal
operation
Stationary autotuning Do not function.
Maintain same status as
when autotuning is started.
Stationary autotuning for line-
to-line resistance only
Do not function.
Maintain same status as
when autotuning is started.
IMPORTANT
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning is performed even though the motor
will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
holding brake is not activated during autotuning.

4-11
Precautions for Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
Lower the base voltage based on Fig 4.4 to prevent saturation of the Inverter’s output voltage when the rated
voltage of the motor is higher than the voltage of the power supply to the Inverter. Use the following proce-
dure to perform autotuning.
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
(Base frequency from the motor’s nameplate × setting of T1-03)/(Rated voltage from motor’s nameplate)
3. Perform autotuning.
After completing autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s name-
plate.
Fig 4.4 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting
Precautions after Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E1-
04) after autotuning.
IMPORTANT
1. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor
rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage × 0.9.
2. When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the output current will increase as
the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
Output voltage
Output frequency
Rated voltage from
motor nameplate
T1-03
0
Rated voltage from motor nameplate
Base frequency
from motor nameplate ×T1-03
Base frequency
from motor nameplate

4-12
Constant Settings for Autotuning
The following constants must be set before autotuning.
Table 4.3 Constant Settings before Autotuning
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Data Displays during Autotuning
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor 1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor 2
Display
T1-00
Motor 1/2
selection*1
When switching to motor 2 is
selected, set the motor for
which autotuning is to be per-
formed. (This constant is
ignored if motor 2 is not
selected.)
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
1 or 2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Select
Motor
T1-01
Autotun-
ing mode
selection
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning
1: Stationary autotuning
2: Stationary autotuning for
0 to 2
2 (V/f)
0 (Vec-
tor)*4
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Tuning
Mode Sel
T1-02
Motor out-
put power
Set the output power of the
motor in kilowatts.*5 *7
0.00 to
650.00 kW
0.40 kW
*2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mtr Rated
Power
T1-03
Motor
rated volt-
age
Set the rated voltage of the
motor in volts.*5 *6
0 to
255.0 V
(200 V
class)
0 to
510.0 V
(400 V
class)
200.0 V
(200 V
class)
400.0 V
(400 V
class)
- - Yes Yes Yes
Rated
Voltage
T1-04
Motor
rated cur-
rent Set the rated current of the
motor in amps.*5 *7
0.32 to
6.40 A*3 1.90 A*2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Rated Cur-
rent
T1-05
Motor
base fre-
quency Set the base frequency of the
motor in hertz.*3 *4 *5 *6
0 to
400.0 Hz
60.0 Hz - - Yes Yes Yes
Rated Fre-
quency
T1-06
Number of
motor
poles
Set the number of motor poles.
2 to 48
poles
4 poles - - Yes Yes Yes
Number of
Poles

4-13
* 1. Not normally displayed. Displayed only when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-05 set to 16).
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. Values are given for a 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverter.
* 3. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter capacity.
* 4. For V/f control, the only setting that is possible is 2 (stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only).
* 5. For fixed output motors, set the base speed value.
* 6. For inverter motors or for specialized vector motors, the voltage or frequency may be lower than for general-purpose motors. Always confirm the infor-
mation on the nameplate or in test reports. If the no-load values are known, input the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load current in T1-05 to
ensure accuracy.
* 7. The settings that will ensure stable vector control are between 50% and 100% of the Inverter rating.
Refer to page 3-14 for Digital Operator displays during autotuning.
T1-07
Motor
base speed
Set the base speed of the motor
in min−1
.*3 *5 0 to 24000
1750
min−1 - - Yes Yes Yes
Rated
Speed
T1-08
Numberof
PG pulses
when turn-
ing
Set the number of pulses for the
PG (pulse generator or
encoder). Set the number of
pulses per motor revolution
without a multiplication factor.
0 to 60000 600 - Yes - Yes -
PG Pulses/
Rev
Table 4.3 Constant Settings before Autotuning(Continued)
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Data Displays during Autotuning
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor 1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor 2
Display

4-14
Application Settings
User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode (“ADV” will be displayed on the LCD
screen). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in
advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor
overheating protection.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
• To increase the speed of a 60 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 66.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 60 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54 Hz (0%
to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of
the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator
should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, con-
firm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be
taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.
Loaded Operation
Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the
Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).
Connecting the Load
• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
INFO
Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).

4-15
Operation using the Digital Operator
• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too
high.
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-16 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the
control system occur.
Check and Recording User Constants
Use verify mode (“VERIFY” will be displayed on the LCD screen) to check user constants that have been
changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be
used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed set-
tings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
• Recording user constants
• Setting access levels for user constants
• Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate
memory area in the Inverter. Later, after Inverter settings have been changed, the user constants can be initial-
ized to the settings saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to
1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set
to 1 (User-specified Constants) and used along with A2 constants to display only constants required by the
machine or application in a programming mode.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will
be displayed only when the correct password is input.

4-16
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation,
adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the
most commonly used user constants.
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants
Control
Method
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recom-
mended
Setting
Adjustment Method
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0
or 1)
Hunting-prevention
gain (N1-02)
Controlling hunting
and vibration in mid-
dle-range speeds (10 to
40 Hz)
1.00 0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque is insufficient for
heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunt-
ing or vibration occurs for
light loads.
Carrier frequency
selection
(C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds
Depends
on capac-
ity
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunt-
ing or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Increasing torque
and speed response
and vibration
Depends
on capac-
ity
200 to 1000
ms
torque or speed response is
slow.
ing or vibration occurs.
Torque compensation
gain (C4-01)
• Improving torque at
low speeds (10 Hz
or lower)
and vibration
1.00 0.50 to 1.50
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
ing or vibration occurs for
light loads.
Middle output fre-
quency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output fre-
quency voltage
(E1-10)
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capac-
ity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 3
to 5 V*
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
Open-loop
vector con-
trol
(A1-02 = 2)
Speed feedback detec-
tion control (AFR)
gain
(N2-01)
and speed response
and vibration in mid-
dle-range speeds (10
to 40 Hz)
1.00 0.50 to 2.00
slow.
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
and speed response
and vibration
20 ms
20 to
100 ms
slow.
Slip compensation pri-
mary delay time (C3-
02)
• Increasing speed
response
• Improving speed sta-
bility
200 ms
100 to
500 ms
• Reduce the setting if speed
response is slow.
• Increase the setting if the
speed is not stable.
Slip compensation
gain (C3-01)
• Improving speed
accuracy
1.0 0.5 to 1.5
speed response is slow.
• Reduce the setting if the
speed is too fast.

4-17
Open-loop
vector con-
trol 1
(A1-02 = 2)
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
speeds (10 Hz or
less)
Depends
on capac-
ity
0 to
default
high.
low speeds.
Middle output fre-
quency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output fre-
quency voltage
(E1-10)
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capac-
ity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 1
or 2 V*
slow.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
Flux vector
control
(A1-02 = 3)
ASR proportional gain
1 (C5-01) and
2 (C5-03)
• Torque and speed
response
and vibration
20.00
10.00 to
50.00
slow.
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02)
and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
response
and vibration
0.500 s
0.300 to
1.000 s
slow.
ASR switching fre-
quency (C5-07)
Switching the ASR
proportional gain and
integral time accord-
ing to the output fre-
quency
0.0 Hz
0.0 to max.
output fre-
quency
Set the output frequency at
which to change the ASR
proportional gain and inte-
gral time when the same val-
ues cannot be used for both
high-speed and low-speed
operation.
ASR primary delay
time (C5-06)
and vibration
0.004 s
0.004 to
0.020
Increase the setting if
machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily.
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
speeds (3 Hz or less)
Depends
on the
capacity.
2.0 kHz to
default
high.
low to middle-range
speeds.
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)
Control
Method
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recom-
mended
Setting
Adjustment Method

4-18
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
• Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using open-
loop vector control 1.
• If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector control 1, enable Slip Compensation Dur-
ing Regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
• Use slip compensation to improve speed precision during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and
then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control
is C3-01 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
• To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR constants (C5-
01 to C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary to adjust this setting.)
ASR for V/f control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible for
open-loop vector control 2 or flux vector control, cannot be set.
The following user constants will also indirectly affect the control system.
Open-loop
vector con-
trol 2
(A1-02 = 4)
1 (C5-01) and
2 (C5-03)
response
and vibration
10.00
10.00 to
50.00
slow.
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02)
and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
response
and vibration
0.500 s
0.300 to
1.000 s
slow.
ASR switching fre-
quency (C5-07)
Switching the ASR
proportional gain and
integral time accord-
ing to the output fre-
quency
0.0 Hz
0.0 to max.
output fre-
quency
Set the output frequency at
which to change the ASR
proportional gain and inte-
gral time when the same val-
ues cannot be used for both
high-speed and low-speed
operation.
ASR primary delay
time (C5-06)
and vibration
0.010 s 0.04 to 0.020
Increase the setting if
machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily.
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-11)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
speeds (3 Hz or less)
Depends
on the
capacity.
Default
value
high.
low to middle-range
speeds.
Table 4.5 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications
Name (Constant Number) Application
Dwell function (b6-01 to b6-04) Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Droop function (b7-01 to b7-02)
Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors. Can
be used when the control mode (A1-02) is set to 3 or 4.
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04) Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)
Control
Method
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recom-
mended
Setting
Adjustment Method

4-19
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04) Used to avoid resonance points during operation.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12) Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)
Used to prevent 0 V (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using
a braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration
by setting L3-04 to 0.
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04)
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased,
use a motor with higher capacity than the Inverter. If a setting is reduced,
stalling can occur under heavy loads.
Feed forward control (N5-01 to N5-03)
Used to increase response for acceleration/deceleration or to reduce over-
shooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed
controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio between the load
and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running alone must be
set.
Table 4.5 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications(Continued)
Name (Constant Number) Application

User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3
User Constant Tables ..................................................5-8

5-2
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables
User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an
example.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
Display
b1-01
Reference
selection
Set the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communi-
cations
3: Option Card
0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 180H -
Reference
Source
• Constant Number: The number of the user constant.
• Name: The name of the user constant.
• Description: Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
• Setting Range: The setting range for the user constant.
• Factory Setting: The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is
changed.)
Refer to page 5-83 for factory settings by control method.
• Change during Operation: Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No: Changes not possible during operation.
• Control Methods: Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be moni-
tored or set.
Q: Items which can be monitored and set in either quick program-
ming mode or advanced programming mode.
A: Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced pro-
gramming mode.
No: Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.
• MEMOBUS Register: The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page: Reference page for more detailed information on the constant.

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
5-3
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and
its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum constants required
for operation can be monitored
or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All constants can be monitored
or set.
Verify Mode
Constants changed from the
default settings can be moni-
tored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor con-
stants if autotuning data (from
motor nameplate) is input for
open-loop vector control or to
measure the line-to-line resis-
tance for V/f control.
No. Function Display Page
U1 Status Monitor Constants Monitor 5-75
U2 Fault Trace Fault Trace 5-80
U3 Fault History Fault History 5-82
A1 Initialize Mode Initialization 5-8
A2 User-specified Setting Mode User
Parameters 5-9
b1 Operation Mode Selections Sequence 5-10
b2 DC Injection Braking DC Braking 5-12
b3 Speed Search Speed
Search 5-13
b4 Timer Function Delay Timers 5-14
b5 PID Control PID Control 5-14
b6 Dwell Functions PID Control 5-16
b7 Droop Control Droop Con-
trol 5-17
b8 Energy Saving Energy Sav-
ing 5-18
b9 Zero Servo Zero Servo 5-19
C1 Acceleration/Deceleration Accel/Decel 5-20
C2 S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration S-Curve Acc/
Dcc 5-21
C3 Motor Slip Compensation Motor-Slip
Comp 5-22
C4 Torque Compensation Torque
Comp 5-23
C5 Speed Control (ASR) ASR Tuning 5-24
C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq 5-25
d1 Preset Reference Preset Ref-
erence 5-26
d2 Reference Limits Reference
Limits 5-27
d3 Jump Frequencies Jump Fre-
quencies 5-28
d4 Reference Frequency Hold Sequence 5-28
d5 Torque Control Torque Control 5-29
d6 Field Control Field-weak-
ening 5-30
E1 V/f Pattern V/f Pattern 5-32
E2 Motor Setup Motor
Setup
5-33
E3 Motor 2 V/f Pattern V/f Pattern 2 5-35
E4 Motor 2 Setup Motor Setup
2 5-37
F1 PG Option Setup PG Option
Setup 5-38
F2 Analog Reference Card AI-14 Setup 5-40
F3 Digital Reference Card DI-08, 16
Setup 5-41
F4 Analog Monitor Cards AO-08, 12
Setup 5-40
F5 Digital Output Card DO-02,08
Setup 5-43
F6 Communications Option Card CP-916
Setup 5-44
H1 Multi-function Contact Inputs Digital
Inputs 5-45
H2 Multi-function Contact Outputs Digital Out-
puts 5-48
H3 Analog Inputs Analog
Inputs 5-50
H4 Multi-function Analog Outputs Analog Out-
puts 5-53
H5 MEMOBUS Communications Serial Com
Setup 5-54
H6 Pulse Train Pulse I/O
Setup 5-56
L1 Motor Overload Motor Over-
load 5-57
L2 Power Loss Ridethrough PwrLoss
Ridethru 5-58
L3 Stall Prevention Stall Preven-
tion 5-60
L4 Reference Detection Ref Detec-
tion 5-61
L5 Fault Restart Fault Restart 5-62
L6 Torque Detection Torque
Detection 5-63
L7 Torque Limits Torque Limit 5-64
L8 Hardware Protection Hdwe Pro-
tection 5-65
N1 Hunting Prevention Function Hunting Prev 5-67
N2 Speed Feedback Protection Control AFR 5-68
N3 High-slip Braking High Slip 5-68
N4 Speed Estimation Observer 5-69
N5 Feed Forward Feedfoward
Cont 5-70
o1 Monitor Select Monitor
Select 5-70
o2 Multi-function Selections Key Selec-
tions 5-72
o3 Copy Function COPY Func-
tion 5-73
T Motor Autotuning Auto-Tuning 5-74

5-4
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and
all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-4 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
A1-02
Control
method
selection
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
3: Flux vector control
0 to 4 2 No Q Q Q Q Q 102H
Control
Method
b1-01
Reference
selection
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
input)
3: Option Card
0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 180H
Reference
Source
b1-02
Operation
method
selection
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
input)
3: Option Card
0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 181H
Run
Source
b1-03
Stopping
method
selection
Select stopping method when stop
command is sent.
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
coast to stop, without regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
commands are disregarded during
deceleration time.)
0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q Q Q 182H
Stopping
Method
C1-01
Accelera-
tion time 1 Set the acceleration time in seconds
for the output frequency to climb from
0% to 100%.
0.0 to
6000.0
*1
10.0 s
Yes Q Q Q Q Q 200H
Accel
Time 1
C1-02
Decelera-
tion time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds
for the output frequency to fall from
100% to 0%.
Yes Q Q Q Q Q 201H
Decel
Time 1
C6-02
Carrier fre-
quency
selection
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
1 to F
6
*2
No Q Q Q Q No 224H
Carrier
Freq Sel

5-5
C6-11
Carrier fre-
quency for
open-loop
vector con-
trol 2
Select carrier frequency when open-
loop vector control 2 is used.
1: 2.0kHz
2: 4.0kHz
3: 6.0kHz
4: 8.0kHz
1 to 4 4*2 No No No No No Q 22DH
Carrier
Freq Sel
d1-01
Frequency
reference 1 Set the frequency reference in the unit
specified in o1-03.
0 to
400.00
*9
0.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q Q Q 280H
Reference
1
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2 Frequency reference when multi-step
speed reference 1 is ON for a multi-
function input.
Reference
2
d1-03
Frequency
speed reference 2 is ON for a multi-
function input.
Reference
3
d1-04
Frequency
speed reference 1 and 2 are ON for a
multi-function input.
Reference
4
d1-17
Jog
frequency
reference
Frequency reference when Jog Fre-
quency Selection, FJOG command, or
RJOG command is ON for a multi-
function input.
Jog
Reference
E1-01
Input volt-
age setting Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt.
This set value will be the basis for the
protection functions.
155 to
255
*3
200 V
*3
No Q Q Q Q Q 300H
Input Volt-
age
E1-03
V/f pattern
selection 0 to E: Select from 15 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns (Applica-
ble for setting E1-04 to E1-10).
0 to F F No Q Q No No No 302H
V/F Selec-
tion
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-6
E1-04
Max.
output
frequency
(FMAX)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight
line, set the same values for E1-07 and
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-
08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequen-
cies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07
(FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
40.0 to
400.0*9
60.0Hz
*4
No Q Q Q Q Q 303H
Max
Frequency
E1-05
Max.
voltage
(VMAX)
0.0 to
255.0
*3
200.0
V
*3*4
No Q Q Q Q Q 304H
Max
Voltage
E1-06
Base fre-
quency
(FA) 0.0 to
400.0*9
60.0Hz
*4
No Q Q Q Q Q 305H
Base Fre-
quency
E1-09
Min. out-
put fre-
quency
(FMIN)
0.0 to
400.0*9
0.5 Hz
*4
No Q Q Q A Q 308H
Min Fre-
quency
E1-13
Base
voltage
(VBASE)
Change this setting only when making
advanced adjustments for V/f in the
fixed outputs area. Normally, there is
no need to make these settings.
0.0 to
255.0
*3
0.0 V
*5
No A A Q Q Q 30CH
Base
Voltage
E2-01
Motor
rated cur-
rent
Set the motor rated current in amps.
This set value becomes the base value
for motor protection, torque limit, and
torque control. It is set automatically
when using autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*7
1.90 A
*6
No Q Q Q Q Q 30EH
Motor
Rated FLA
E2-04
Number of
motor
poles
Set the number of motor poles. The
value is set automatically during auto-
tuning.
2 to 48 4 No No Q No Q Q 311H
Number of
Poles
E2-11
Motor
rated
output
Set the output of the motor in units of
0.01kW. This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.00 to
650.000
0.40*10
No Q Q Q Q Q 318H
Mtr Rated
Power
F1-01
PG con-
stant
Set the number of pulses per rotation
for the PG (pulse generator or
encoder) being used. (Do not set as a
multiple.)
0 to
60000
600 No No Q No Q No 380H
PG Pulses/
Rev
H4-02
Gain (ter-
minal FM)
Set the voltage level gain for multi-
function analog output 1.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
be output as the 100% output for the
monitor items. Voltage output from the
terminals, however, have a 10 V max.
meter calibration function.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00 Yes Q Q Q Q Q 41EH
Terminal
FM Gain
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-7
* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to
0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
* 5. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 6. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 7. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 8. L3-04 cannot be set to 3 for flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2.
* 9. The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
* 10.The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
* 11.The setting range is 0 to 2 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
H4-05
Gain (ter-
minal AM)
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
be output as the 100% output for the
monitor items. Voltage output from the
terminals, however, have a 10 V max.
meter calibration function.
0.00 to
2.50
0.50 Yes Q Q Q Q Q 421H
Terminal
AM Gain
L1-01
Motor pro-
tection
selection
Set to enable or disable the motor
overload protection function using the
electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned off,
the thermal value is reset, so even if
this constant is set to 1, protection
may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to
one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that
each motor is installed with a protec-
tion device.
0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 480H
MOLFault
Select
L3-04
Stall pre-
vention
selection
during
decelera-
tion
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If
deceleration time is too short, a
main circuit overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped
when the main circuit voltage
exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage
is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is automatically
adjusted so that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest possible
time. Set deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
Unit) *8
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Brak-
ing Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
0 to 3
*11 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 492H
StallP
Decel Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-8
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
The following settings are made with the environment constants (A constants): Language displayed on the
Digital Operator, access level, control method, initialization of constants.
Initialize Mode: A1
User constants for the environment modes are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
A1-00
Language
selection for
Digital
Operator
display
Used to select the language
displayed on the Digital
Operator (LCD).
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This constant is not initialized
by the initialize operation.
0 to 6 1 Yes A A A A A 100H -
Select Lan-
guage
A1-01
Constant
access level
Used to set the constant
access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode
and setting A1-01 and A1-
04.)
1: Used to select user
constant
(Only constants set in A2-
01 to A2-32 can be read
and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read
and set in both quick
programming mode and
advanced programming
(A) mode.)
0 to 2 2 Yes A A A A A 101H
6-
139
6-
141
Access
Level
A1-02
Control
method
selection
Used to select the control
method for the Inverter
0: V/f control
1: V/f with PG feedback
2: Open-loop vector control
1
3: Flux vector
2
This constant is not initialized
by the initialize operation.
0 to 4 2 No Q Q Q Q Q 102H
4-5
4-7
4-16Control
Method

5-9
User-set Constants: A2
The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.
A1-03
Initialize Used to initialize the con-
stants using the specified
method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
User constants
2220: Initializes using a
two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
0 to
3330
0 No A A A A A 103H -Init Parame-
ters
A1-04
Password Password input when a pass-
word has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some constants of the initial-
ize mode.
If the password is changed,
A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to
A2-32 constants can no
longer be changed. (Program-
ming mode constants can be
changed.)
0 to
9999
0 No A A A A A 104H
6-
140Enter Pass-
word
A1-05
Password
setting
Used to set a four digit num-
ber as the password.
This constant is not usually
displayed. When the Pass-
word (A1-04) is displayed,
hold down the RESET Key
and press the Menu Key and
the password will be dis-
played.
0 to
9999
0 No A A A A A 105H
6-
140Select Pass-
word
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
A2-01
to
A2-32
User setting
constants
Used to set the constant num-
bers that can be set/read.
Maximum 32.
Effective when the Constant
Access Level (A1-01) is set to
User Program (1). Constants
set in constants A2-01 to A2-
32 can be set/read in pro-
gramming mode.
b1-01
to
o3-02
- No A A A A A
106H
to
125H
6-
141User Param 1
to 32
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-10
Application Constants: b
The following settings are made with the application constants (B constants): Operation method selection, DC
injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions, and energy saving functions.
Operation Mode Selections: b1
User constants for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b1-01
Reference
selection
Set the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communica-
tions
3: Option Card
0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 180H
4-5
6-2
6-66
6-83
Reference
Source
b1-02
Operation
method
selection
Set the run command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communica-
tions
3: Option Card
0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 181H
4-5
6-7
6-66
6-83Run Source
b1-03
Stopping
method
selection
Used to set the stopping
method used when a stop com-
mand is input.
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
(Stops faster than coast to
stop, no regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run commands are
disregarded during
deceleration.)
0 to 3* 0 No Q Q Q Q Q 182H
4-6
6-9
Stopping
Method
b1-04
Prohibition
of reverse
operation 0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 183H 6-54
Reverse
Oper

5-11
* The setting range is 0 or 1 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
b1-05
Operation
selection
for setting
E1-09 or
less
Used to set the method of
operation when the fre-
quency reference input is less
than the minimum output fre-
quency (E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference
(E1-09 not effective).
1: STOP (Frequencies below
E1-09 in the coast to stop
state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero speed (Fre-
quencies below E1-09 are
zero)
0 to 3 0 No No No No A No 184H 6-9
Zero-Speed
Oper
b1-06
Read
sequence
input twice
Used to set the responsiveness
of the control inputs (forward/
reverse and multi-function
inputs.)
0: Two scans every 2 ms (Use
for fast responses.)
1: Two scans every 5 ms (Use
for possible malfunction
due to noise.)
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 185H -
Cntl Input
Scans
b1-07
Operation
selection
after
switchingto
remote
mode
Used to set the operation mode
by switching to the Remote
mode using the Local/Remote
Key.
0: Run signals that are input
during mode switching are
disregarded. (Input Run
signals after switching the
mode.)
1: Run signals become
effective immediately after
switching to the Remote
mode.
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 186H -
LOC/REM
RUN Sel
b1-08
Run com-
mand selec-
tion in
program-
ming modes
Used to set an operation inter-
lock in programming modes.
0: Cannot operate.
1: Can operate (Disabled
when Digital Operator is
set to select run command
(when b1-02 = 0).
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 187H -
RUN CMD
at PRG
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-12
DC Injection Braking: b2
User constants for injection braking are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b2-01
Zero speed
level (DC
injection
braking start-
ing fre-
quency)
Used to set the frequency
which starts DC injection
braking in units of Hz when
deceleration to stop is
selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-
09, E1-09 becomes the DC
injection braking starting fre-
quency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz No A A A A A 189H 6-9
DCInj Start
Freq
b2-02
DC injection
braking cur-
rent
Sets the DC injection braking
current as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50% No A A A No No 18AH
6-9
6-13
DCInj Cur-
rent
b2-03
DC injection
braking time
at start
Used to set the time to per-
form DC injection braking at
start in units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor
and restart it. When the set
value is 0, DC injection brak-
ing at start is not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s No A A A A A 18BH 6-13
DCInj
Time@Start
b2-04
DC injection
braking time
at stop
Used to set the time to per-
form DC injection braking at
stop in units of 1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after
the stop command is input.
When the set value is 0.00,
DC injection braking at stop
is not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s No A A A A A 18CH 6-9
DCInj
Time@Stop
b2-08
Magneticflux
compensa-
tion volume
Sets the magnetic flux com-
pensation as a percentage of
the no-load current.
0 to
1000
0% No No No A No No 190H -
Field Comp

5-13
Speed Search: b3
User constants for the speed search are shown in the following table.
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b3-01
Speed
search
selection
(current
detection or
speed calcu-
lation)
Enables/disables the speed
search function for the run
command and sets the speed
search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified
frequency (motor direction is
also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started
from the frequency when
power was momentarily lost
and the maximum frequency,
and the speed is detected at
the search current level.
0 to 3 2* No A A A No A 191H 6-56
SpdSrch at
Start
b3-02
Speed
search oper-
atingcurrent
(current
detection)
Sets the speed search operation
current as a percentage, taking
the Inverter rated current as
100%.
Not usually necessary to set.
When restarting is not possible
with the factory settings,
reduce the value.
0 to
200 100%* No A No A No A 192H 6-56
SpdSrch
Current
b3-03
Speed
search
decelera-
tion time
(current
detection)
Sets the output frequency
deceleration time during speed
search in 1-second units.
Set the time for deceleration
from the maximum output fre-
quency to the minimum output
frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s No A No A No No 193H 6-56
SpdSrch
Dec Time
b3-05
Speed
search wait
time (cur-
rent detec-
tion or
speed calcu-
lation)
Sets the contactor operating
delay time when there is a con-
tactor on the output side of the
Inverter. When a speed search
is performed after recovering
from a momentary power loss,
the search operation is delayed
by the time set here.
0.0 to
20.0 0.2 s No A A A A A 195H 6-56
Search
Delay

5-14
Timer Function: b4
User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table.
PID Control: b5
User constants for PID control are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b4-01
Timer func-
tion ON-
delay time
Sets the timer function out-
put ON-delay time (dead
band) for the timer function
input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer func-
tion is set in H1- or H2-
.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s No A A A A A 1A3H 6-93
Delay-ON
Timer
b4-02
Timer func-
tion OFF-
delay time
Sets the timer function out-
put OFF-delay time (dead
band) for the timer function
input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer func-
tion is set in H1- or H2-
.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s No A A A A A 1A4H 6-93
Delay-OFF
Timer
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b5-01
PID control
mode selec-
tion
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is D-
controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value
is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
deviation)
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
feedback value).
0 to 4 0 No A A A A A 1A5H 6-95
PID Mode
b5-02
Proportional
gain (P)
Sets P-control proportional
gain as a percentage.
P-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
1.00 Yes A A A A A 1A6H 6-95
PID Gain
b5-03
Integral (I)
time
Sets I-control integral time in
1-second units.
I-control is not performed
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s Yes A A A A A 1A7H 6-95
PID I Time
b5-04
Integral (I)
limit
Sets the I-control limit as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0% Yes A A A A A 1A8H 6-95
PID I Limit
b5-05
Derivative
(D) time
Sets D-control derivative time
in 1-second units.
D-control is not performed
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s Yes A A A A A 1A9H 6-95
PID D Time

5-15
b5-06
PID limit Sets the limit after PID-con-
trol as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0% Yes A A A A A 1AAH 6-95
PID Limit
b5-07
PID offset
adjustment
Sets the offset after PID-con-
trol as a percentage of the
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A 1ABH 6-95
PID Offset
b5-08
PID primary
delay time
constant
Sets the time constant for low
pass filter for PID-control
outputs in 1-second units.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s Yes A A A A A 1ACH 6-95
PID Delay
Time
b5-09
PID output
characteris-
tics selection
Select forward/reverse for
PID output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output
code)
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 1ADH 6-95
Output Level
Sel
b5-10
PID output
gain Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0 No A A A A A 1AEH 6-95
Output Gain
b5-11
PID reverse
output selec-
tion
0: 0 limit when PID output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PID output
is negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit
is selected using b1-04.
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 1AFH 6-95
Output Rev
Sel
b5-12
Selection of
PID feed-
back com-
mand loss
detection
0: No detection of loss of
PID feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Operation continues
during detection, with the
malfunctioning contact
not operating.
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault
contact operates.
0 to 2 0 No A A A A A 1B0H 6-96
Fb los Det Sel
b5-13
PID feed-
back com-
mand loss
detection
level
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level as a percent
units, with the maximum out-
put frequency at 100%.
0 to
100
0% No A A A A A 1B1H 6-96
Fb los Det
Lvl
b5-14
PID feed-
back com-
mand loss
detection
time
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level in s units.
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s No A A A A A 1B2H 6-96
Fb los Det
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-16
Dwell Functions: b6
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
b5-15
PID sleep
function
operation
level
Set the PID sleep function
start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A 1B3H 6-96
PID Sleep
Level
b5-16
PID sleep
operation
delay time
Set the delay time until the
PID sleep function starts in
seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s No A A A A A 1B4H 6-96
PID Sleep
Time
b5-17
Accel/decel
time for PID
reference Set the accel/decel time for
PID reference in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s No A A A A A 1B5H 6-96
PID SFS
Time
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Description Setting
Range
Fac-
tory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b6-01
Dwell fre-
quency at
start
The dwell function is used to output
frequency temporarily when driving
a motor with a heavy load.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A 1B6H 6-19
Dwell Ref
@Start
b6-02
Dwell time
at start
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s No A A A A A 1B7H 6-19Dwell
Time
@Start
b6-03
Dwell fre-
quency at
stop 0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A 1B8H 6-19
Dwell Ref
@Stop
b6-04
Dwell time
at stop
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s No A A A A A 1B9H 6-19Dwell
Time
@Stop
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
Run command
Output frequency
Time
ON
b6-03
OFF
b6-01
b6-04b6-02

5-17
DROOP Control: b7
User constants for droop functions are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b7-01
Droopcontrol
gain
Sets the slip as a percentage
of maximum frequency when
the maximum output fre-
quency is specified and the
rated torque occurs.
Droop-control is not per-
formed when the setting is
0.0.
0.0 to
100.0
0.0% Yes No No No A A 1CAH
4-18
6-
127Droop Quan-
tity
b7-02
Droopcontrol
delay time
Droop control responsive-
ness constant
When hunting or oscillation
occurs, increase the value.
0.03 to
2.00
0.05 s No A A A A A 1A4H
4-18
6-
127Droop Delay
Time

5-18
Energy Saving: b8
User constants for energy-saving control functions are shown in the following table.
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vec-
tor 1 factory settings are given.)
* 3. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
* 4. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b8-01
Energy-sav-
ing mode
selection
Select whether to enable or
disable energy-saving con-
trol.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 1CCH -
Energy Save
Sel
b8-02
Energy-sav-
ing gain Set the energy-saving gain
with the open-loop vector
control method.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
*1
Yes No No A A A 1CDH -
Energy Save
Gain
b8-03
Energy-sav-
ing filter time
constant
Set the energy-saving filter
time constant with the open-
loop vector control method.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
*2
Yes No No A A A 1CEH -
Energy Save
F.T
b8-04
Energy-sav-
ing coeffi-
cient
Set the maximum motor effi-
ciency value.
Set the motor rated capacity
in E2-11, and adjust the value
by 5% at a time until output
power reaches a minimum
value.
0.0 to
655.00
*3
*4
No A A No No No 1CFH -
Energy Save
COEF
b8-05
Power detec-
tion filter
time constant Set the time constant for out-
put power detection.
0 to
2000
20 ms No A A No No No 1D0H -
kW Filter
Time
b8-06
Search opera-
tion voltage
limiter
Set the limit value of the volt-
age control range during
search operation.
Perform search operation to
optimize operations using
minute variations in voltage
using energy-saving control.
Set to 0 to disable the search
operation. 100% is the motor
base voltage.
0 to
100
0% No A A No No No 1D1H -
Search V
Limit

5-19
Zero Servo: b9
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b9-01
Zero-servo
gain
Adjust the strength of the
zero-servo lock.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
command” is set for the
multi-function input. When
the zero-servo command has
been input and the frequency
reference drop below excita-
tion level (b2-01), a position
control loop is created and the
motor stops. Increasing the
zero-servo gain in turn
increases the strength of the
lock. Increasing it by too
much will cause oscillation.
0 to
100
5 No No No No A No 1DAH
Zero Servo
Gain
b9-02
Zero-servo
completion
width
Sets the output width of the
P-lock completion signal.
completion (end)” is set for a
multi-function input. The
zero-servo completion signal
is ON when the current posi-
tion is within the range (the
zero-servo position + zero-
servo completion width.)
Set the allowable position dis-
placement from the zero-
servo position to 4 times the
pulse rate of the PG (pulse
generator, encoder) in use.
0 to
16383
10 No No No No A No 1DBH
Zero Servo
Count

5-20
Autotuning Constants: C
The following settings are made with the autotuning constants (C constants): Acceleration/deceleration times,
s-curve characteristics, slip compensation, torque compensation, speed control, and carrier frequency func-
tions.
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
User constants for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vect
or
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
C1-01
Accelera-
tion time 1
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 to the maxi-
mum output frequency, in 1-
second units.
0.0 to
6000.0
*
10.0 s
Yes Q Q Q Q Q 200H
4-5
6-15Accel Time
1
C1-02
Decelera-
tion time 1
Sets the deceleration time to
decelerate from the maximum
output frequency to 0, in 1-
second units.
Yes Q Q Q Q Q 201H
4-5
6-15Decel Time
1
C1-03
Accelera-
tion time 2
The acceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” is set to
ON.
Yes A A A A A 202H 6-15
Accel Time
2
C1-04
Decelera-
tion time 2
The deceleration time when
ON.
Yes A A A A A 203H 6-15
Decel Time
2
C1-05
Accelera-
tion time 3
ON.
No A A A A A 204H 6-15
Accel Time
3
C1-06
Decelera-
tion time 3
ON.
No A A A A A 205H 6-15
Decel Time
3
C1-07
Accelera-
tion time 4
“accel/decel time 1” and
“accel/decel time 2” are set to
ON.
No A A A A A 206H 6-15
Accel Time
4
C1-08
Decelera-
tion time 4
“accel/decel time 1” and
“accel/decel time 2” are set to
ON.
No A A A A A 207H 6-15
Decel Time
4
C1-09
Emergency
stop time
“Emergency (fast) stop” is set
to ON.
This function can be used a
stopped method when a fault
has been detected.
No A A A A A 208H 6-14
Fast Stop
Time

5-21
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/decel-
eration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
User constants for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.
C1-10
Accel/decel
time setting
unit 0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 209H 6-15
Acc/Dec
Units
C1-11
Accel/decel
time switch-
ing fre-
quency
Sets the frequency for auto-
matic acceleration/decelera-
tion switching.
Below set frequency: Accel/
decel time 4
Above set frequency: Accel/
decel time 1
The multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” or
“accel/decel time 2” take pri-
ority.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A 20AH -
Acc/DecSW
Freq
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Description Setting
Range
Fac-
tory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
C2-01
S-curve
characteris-
tic time at
accelera-
tion start
All sections of the S-curve characteris-
tic time are set in seconds units.
When the S-curve characteristic time is
set, the accel/decel times will increase
by only half of the S-curve characteris-
tic times at start and end.
0.00to
2.50
0.20 s No A A A A A 20BH -
SCrv Acc
@ Start
C2-02
S-curve
characteris-
tic time at
accelera-
tion end
0.00to
2.50
0.20 s No A A A A A 20CH -
SCrv Acc
@ End
C2-03
S-curve
characteris-
tic time at
decelera-
tion start
0.00to
2.50
0.20 s No A A A A A 20DH -
SCrv Dec
@ Start
C2-04
S-curve
characteris-
tic time at
decelera-
tion end
0.00to
2.50
0.00 s No A A A A A 20EH -
SCrv Dec
@ End
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vect
or
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
Run command
Output frequency
Time
ON
OFF
C2-02 C2-03
C2-04C2-01

5-22
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
User constants for slip compensation are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
C3-01
Slip compen-
sation gain
Used to improve speed accu-
racy when operating with a
load.
Usually setting is not neces-
sary.
Adjust this constant at the fol-
lowing times.
• When actual speed is low,
increase the set value.
• When actual speed is high,
decrease the set value.
0.0 to
2.5
1.0* Yes A No A A A 20FH
4-16
6-32Slip Comp
Gain
C3-02
Slip compen-
sation pri-
mary delay
time
Slip compensation primary
delay time is set in ms units.
sary.
Adjust this constant at the fol-
lowing times.
• Reduce the setting when
slip compensation respon-
sive is slow.
• When speed is not stabi-
lized, increase the setting.
0 to
10000
200 ms
*
No A No A No No 210H
4-16
6-32
Slip Comp
Time
C3-03
Slip compen-
sation limit Sets the slip compensation
limit as a percentage of motor
rated slip.
0 to
250
200% No A No A No No 211H 6-32
Slip Comp
Limit
C3-04
Slip compen-
sation selec-
tion during
regeneration
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation
during regeneration function
has been activated, as regen-
eration capacity increases
momentarily, it may be neces-
sary to use a braking option
(braking resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit or Braking
Unit.)
0 or 1 0 No A No A No No 212H 6-32
Slip Comp
Regen
C3-05
Output volt-
age limit
operation
selection
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux
will be lowered automati-
cally when the output
voltage become satu-
rated.)
0 or 1 0 No No No A A A 213H 6-32
Output V
limit

5-23
Torque Compensation: C4
User constants for are torque compensation shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
C4-01
Torque com-
pensation
gain
Sets torque compensation
gain as a ratio.
sary.
Adjust in the following cir-
cumstances:
• When the cable is long;
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter
capacity (Max. applicable
motor capacity), increase
the set values.
• When the motor is oscillat-
ing, decrease the set val-
ues.
Adjust the output current
range at minimum speed rota-
tion so that it does not exceed
the Inverter rated output cur-
rent.
Do not alter the torque com-
pensation gain from its
default (1.00) when using the
open-loop vector control
method.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00 Yes A A A No No 215H
4-16
6-35
Torq Comp
Gain
C4-02
Torque com-
pensation
primary
delay time
constant
The torque compensation
delay time is set in ms units.
sary.
cumstances:
• When the motor is oscillat-
ing, increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness
of the motor is low,
decrease the set values.
0 to
10000
20 ms
*
No A A A No No 216H
4-16
6-35
Torq Comp
Time
C4-03
Forward
starting
torque Sets the forward starting
torque as a percentage of the
motor rated torque.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0% No No No A No No 217H -
F
TorqCmp@
start
C4-04
Reverse
starting
torque Sets the reverse starting
torque as a percentage of the
motor rated torque.
-200.0
to 0.0
0.0% No No No A No No 218H -
R
TorqCmp@
start
C4-05
Starting
torque time
constant
Sets the delay time in ms for
starting torque. The filter is
disabled if the time is set to 0
to 4 ms.
0 to
200
10 ms No No No A No No 219H -
TorqCmp
DelayT

5-24
Speed Control (ASR): C5
User constants for speed control are shown in the following table.
* 1. When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The flux vector control factory settings will be displayed.)
* 2. The setting range is 1.00 to 3.00 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Description Setting
Range
Fac-
tory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
C5-01
ASR pro-
portional
gain 1 Sets the proportional gain of the speed
loop (ASR.)
0.00to
300.00
*2
0.20* Yes No A No A A 21BH -
ASR P
Gain 1
C5-02
ASR inte-
gral (I)
time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed loop
(ASR) in 1-second units.
0.000
to
10.000
0.500
s*
Yes No A No A A 21CH -
ASR I
Time 1
C5-03
ASR pro-
portional
gain 2 Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
0.00to
300.00
*2
0.20* Yes No A No A A 21DH -
ASR P
Gain 2
C5-04
ASR inte-
gral (I)
time 2
0.000
to
10.000
0.500
s*
Yes No A No A A 21EH -
ASR I
Time 2
C5-05
ASR limit Sets the upper limit for the compensa-
tion frequency for the speed control
loop (ASR) to a percentage of the
0.0 to
20.0
5.0% No No A No No No 21FH -
ASR Limit
C5-06
ASR pri-
mary delay
time
Sets the filter time constant; the time
from the speed loop to the torque com-
mand output, in units of 1-second.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0.000
to
0.500
0.004
*
No No No No A A* 220H -
ASR Delay
Time
C5-07
ASR
switching
frequency
Set the frequency for switching
between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Inte-
gral Time 1, 2 in Hz units.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 No No No No A A 221H -
ASR Gain
SW Freq
C5-08
ASR inte-
gral (I)
limit
Set to a small value to prevent any rad-
ical load change. Set to 100% of the
0 to
400
400 No No No No A A 222H -
ASR I
Limit
P, I
0 E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
P=C5-03
I=C5-04

5-25
Carrier Frequency: C6
User constants for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.
* 1. The setting range depends on the control method of the Inverter.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 3. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 4. This constant can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
* 5. Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi-function input.
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Description Setting
Range
Fac-
tory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
C6-02
Carrier fre-
quency
selection
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
1 to F
6
*2
No Q Q Q A
No
*5
224H
4-6
4-16
6-38Carrier
Freq Sel
C6-03
Carrier
frequency
upper limit
Set the carrier frequency upper limit and
lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as fol-
lows:
With the vector control method, the
upper limit of the carrier frequency is
fixed in C6-03.
K is a coefficient that depends on the
setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
2.0 to
15.0
*3 *4
15.0
kHz
*2
No A A A A No 225H -
Carrier
Freq Max
C6-04
Carrier
frequency
lower limit
0.4 to
15.0
*3 *4
15.0
kHz
*2
No A A No No No 226H -
Carrier
Freq Min
C6-05
Carrier fre-
quency
propor-
tional gain 00 to
99
*4
00 No A A No No No 227H -
Carrier
Freq Gain
C6-11
Carrier fre-
quency
selection
for open-
loop vec-
tor control
2
Select the carrier frequency when open-
loop vector control 2 is used.
1: 2 kHz
2: 4 kHz
3: 6 kHz
4: 8 kHz
1 to 4 4*2 No
No
*5
No
*5
No
*5
No
*5
Q 22DH -
Carrier
Freq Sel
Carrier frequency
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
(Max. output frequency)
Output
frequency

5-26
Reference Constants: d
The following settings are made with the reference constants (d constants): Frequency references.
Preset Reference: d1
User constants for frequency references are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
d1-01
Frequency
reference 1 Sets the frequency reference
in the units used in o1-03.
0 to
400.00
*
4-6
6-5
Reference 1
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed refer-
ence 1 is ON for a multi-func-
tion input.
4-6
6-5
Reference 2
d1-03
Frequency
reference 3
tion input.
4-6
6-5
Reference 3
d1-04
Frequency
reference 4
ences 1 and 2 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
4-6
6-5
Reference 4
d1-05
Frequency
reference 5
The frequency when multi-
step speed reference 3 is ON
for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 284H 6-5
Reference 5
d1-06
Frequency
reference 6
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 285H 6-5
Reference 6
d1-07
Frequency
reference 7
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 286H 6-5
Reference 7
d1-08
Frequency
reference 8
ences 1, 2, and 3 are ON for
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 287H 6-5
Reference 8
d1-09
Frequency
reference 9
tion input.
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 288H -
Reference 9
d1-10
Frequency
reference 10
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 28BH -
Reference 10
d1-11
Frequency
reference 11
ences 2 and 4 are ON for a
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 28CH -
Reference 11

5-27
Note The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor). The default for o1-03 is 0 (increments of 0.01 Hz).
* The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
Reference Limits: d2
User constants for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table.
d1-12
Frequency
reference 12
0 to
400.00
*
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 28DH -
Reference 12
d1-13
Frequency
reference 13
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 28EH -
Reference 13
d1-14
Frequency
reference 14
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 28FH -
Reference 14
d1-15
Frequency
reference 15
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 290H -
Reference 15
d1-16
Frequency
reference 16
ences 1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON
for multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz Yes A A A A A 291H -
Reference 16
d1-17
Jogfrequency
reference
when the jog frequency refer-
ence selection, FJOG com-
mand, or RJOG command is
ON.
4-6
6-74Jog
Reference
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
d2-01
Frequency
reference
upper limit
Set the output frequency
upper limit as a percent, tak-
ing the max. output frequency
to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No A A A A A 289H
6-30
6-69
Ref Upper
Limit
d2-02
Frequency
reference
lower limit
Sets the output frequency
lower limit as a percentage of
quency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0% No A A A A A 28AH
6-30
6-69
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
Master speed
reference
lower limit
Set the master speed refer-
ence lower limit as a percent,
taking the max. output fre-
quency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0% No A A A A A 293H
6-30
6-69
Ref1 Lower
Limit
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-28
Jump Frequencies: d3
User constants for jump frequencies are shown in the following table.
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
User constants for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
d3-01
Jump fre-
quency 1
Set the center values of the
jump frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by
setting the jump frequency to
0 Hz. Always ensure that the
following applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump fre-
quency range is prohibited
but during acceleration and
deceleration, speed changes
smoothly without jump.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A 294H 6-27
Jump Freq 1
d3-02
Jump fre-
quency 2 0.0 Hz No A A A A A 295H 6-27
Jump Freq 2
d3-03
Jump fre-
quency 3 0.0 Hz No A A A A A 296H 6-27
Jump Freq 3
d3-04
Jump fre-
quency width
Sets the jump frequency
bandwidth in Hz.
The jump frequency will be
the jump frequency ± d3-04.
0.0 to
20.0
1.0 Hz No A A A A A 297H 6-27
Jump Band-
width
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
d4-01
Frequency
reference
hold function
selection
Sets whether or not frequen-
cies on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at
0.)
1: Enabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at
the previous hold
frequency.)
This function is available
when the multi-function
inputs “accel/decel Ramp
Hold” or “up/down” com-
mands are set.
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 298H 6-68
MOP Ref
Memory
d4-02
+ - Speed
limits
Set the frequency to be add to
or subtracted from the analog
frequency reference as a per-
cent, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.
Enabled when the increase
(+) speed command or
decrease (-) speed command
is set for a multi-function
input.
0 to
100
10% No A A A A A 299H 6-72
Trim Control
Lvl

5-29
Torque Control: d5
User constants for the torque control are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
d5-01
Torque con-
trol selection
0: Speed control (C5-01 to
C5-07)
1: Torque control
This function is only avail-
able in flux vector control
mode. To use the function for
switching between speed and
torque control, set to 0 and set
the multi-function input to
“speed/torque control
change.”
0 or 1 0 No No No No A A 29AH -
Torq Control
Sel
d5-02
Torque
reference
delay time
Set the torque reference delay
time in ms units.
This function can be used to
adjust the noise of the torque
control signal or the respon-
siveness with the host con-
troller. When oscillation
occurs during torque control,
0 to
1000 0 ms* No No No No A A 29BH -
Torq Ref
Filter
d5-03
Speed limit
selection
Set the speed limit command
method for the torque control
mode.
1: The analog input limit
from a frequency refer-
ence
2: Limited by d5-04 constant
setting values.
1 or 2 1 No No No No A A 29CH -
Speed Limit
Sel
d5-04
Speed limit Set the speed limit during
torque control as a percentage
of the maximum output fre-
quency.
This function is enabled when
d5-03 is set to 2. Directions
are as follows.
+: run command direction
-: run command opposite
direction
-120 to
+120
0% No No No No A A 29DH -Speed Lmt
Value
d5-05
Speed limit
bias
Set the speed limit bias as a
output frequency.
Bias is given to the specified
speed limit. It can be used to
adjust the margin for the
speed limit.
0 to
120
10% No No No No A A 29EH -
Speed Lmt
Bias

5-30
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed.
Field Control: d6
User constants for the field weakening command are shown in the following table.
d5-06
Speed/torque
control
switching
timer
Set the delay time from input-
ting the multi-function input
change” (from On to OFF or
OFF to ON) until the control
is actually changed, in ms
units.
This function is enabled when
change” is set. In the speed/
torque control switching
timer, the analog inputs hold
the values of when the
change” changes. Always be
sure to allow time for this
process to finish completely.
0 to
1000
0 ms No No No No A A 29FH -
Ref Hold
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
d6-01
Field weak-
ening level
Set the Inverter output volt-
age when the field weakening
command is input.
It is enabled when the field
weakening command is set
for a multi-function input.
Set the level as a percentage
taking the voltage set in the
V/f pattern as 100%.
0 to
100
80% No A A No No No 2A0H -
Field-Weak
Lvl
d6-02
Field
frequency
Set the lower limit in hertz of
the frequency range where
field control is valid.
The field weakening com-
mand is valid only at frequen-
cies above this setting and
only when the speed is in
agreement with the current
speed reference.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A No No No 2A1H -
Field-Weak
Freq
d6-03
Field forcing
function
selection
Set the field forcing function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 No No No No A A 2A2H -
Field Force
Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-31
d6-05
AφR time
constant
Set the factor to multiple
times the secondary circuit
time constant of the motor to
achieve the AφR time
constant.
AφR time constant =
Secondary circuit time
constant x d6-05
AφR will not function when
d6-05 is 0. If d6-05 is not 0,
the lower limit of the value
will be internally adjusted to
200 ms in the Inverter.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00 No No No No No A 2A4H -
A PHI R
Filter
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-32
Motor Constant Constants: E
The following settings are made with the motor constant constants (E constants): V/f characteristics and motor
constants.
V/f Pattern: E1
User constants for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO-
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
E1-01
Input volt-
age setting
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1
volt.
This setting is used as a reference
value in protection functions.
155 to
255
*1
200 V
*1
No Q Q Q Q Q 300H
4-5
6-
107Input Volt-
age
E1-03
V/f pattern
selection
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for settings E1-04
to E1-10.)
0 to F F No Q Q No No No 302H
6-
107V/F Selec-
tion
E1-04
Max.
output
frequency
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values for
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the
setting for E1-08 will be disre-
garded.
Always ensure that the four fre-
quencies are set in the following
manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-
07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
40.0 to
400.0
*5
60.0
Hz
*2
No Q Q Q Q Q 303H
6-
107
Max
Frequency
E1-05
Max.
voltage 0.0 to
255.0
*1
200.0
V
*1*2
No Q Q Q Q Q 304H
6-
107Max
Voltage
E1-06
Base
frequency 0.0 to
400.0
*5
60.0
Hz
*2
No Q Q Q Q Q 305H
6-
107Base
Frequency
E1-07
Mid.output
frequency
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
*2
No A A A No No 306H
6-
107Mid
Frequency
A
E1-08
Mid.output
frequency
voltage
0.0 to
255.0
*1
11.0 V
*1 *2
No A A A No No 307H
4-17
6-
107Mid
Voltage A
E1-09
Min.output
frequency 0.0 to
400.0
*5
0.5 Hz
*2
No Q Q Q A Q 308H
6-
107Min
Frequency
E1-10
Min.output
frequency
voltage
0.0 to
255.0
*1
2.0 V
*1 *2
No A A A No No 309H
4-16
4-17
6-
107Min
Voltage
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)

5-33
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
* 3. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Motor Setup: E2
User constants for motor 1 are shown in the following table.
E1-11
Mid.output
frequency 2
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the
output range. Normally, this setting
is not required.
0.0 to
400.0
*5
0.0 Hz
*3
No A A A A A 30AH
6-
107Mid
Frequency
B
E1-12
Mid.output
frequency
voltage 2
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*3
No A A A A A 30BH
6-
107
Mid
Voltage B
E1-13
Base
voltage 0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*4
No A A Q Q Q 30CH
6-
107Base
Voltage
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
E2-01
Motor rated
current
Sets the motor rated current in
1 A units.
These set values will become
the reference values for motor
protection, torque limits and
torque control.
This constant is automatically
0.32 to
6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No Q Q Q Q Q 30EH
6-49
6-
105
Motor Rated
FLA
E2-02
Motor rated
slip
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
the reference values for slip
compensation.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*1
No A A A A A 30FH
6-
103
6-
105
Motor Rated
Slip
E2-03
Motor no-
load current
Sets the motor no-load cur-
rent in 1 A units.
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
No A A A A A 310H
6-
105No-Load
Current
E2-04
Number of
motor poles
Sets the number of motor
poles.
2 to 48 4 poles No No Q No Q Q 311H
6-
105Number of
Poles
E2-05
Motor line-
to-line resis-
tance
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
resistance in Ω units.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
Ω
*1
No A A A A A 312H
6-
105
Term Resis-
tance
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO-
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-34
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
E2-06
Motor leak
inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as a
percentage of the motor rated
voltage.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
*1
No No No A A A 313H
6-
105Leak Induc-
tance
E2-07
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 1
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 50% of mag-
netic flux.
0.00 to
0.50
0.50 No No No A A A 314H
6-
105
Saturation
Comp1
E2-08
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 2
coefficient at 75% of mag-
netic flux.
0.00 to
0.75
0.75 No No No A A A 315H
6-
105
Saturation
Comp2
E2-09
Motor
mechanical
loss
Sets motor mechanical loss as
a percentage of motor rated
output (W).
sary.
cumstances:
• When torque loss is large
due to motor bearing.
• When the torque loss in the
pump or fan is large.
The set mechanical loss will
compensate for torque.
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 No No No No A A 316H
Mechanical
Loss
E2-10
Motor iron
loss for
torque com-
pensation
Sets motor iron loss in W
units.
0 to
65535
14 W
*1
No A A No No No 317H
6-
105
Tcomp Iron
Loss
E2-11
Motor rated
output
Set the rated output of the
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
*4
No Q Q Q Q Q 318H -
Mtr Rated
Power
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-35
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3
User constants for motor 2 V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO-
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
E3-01
Motor 2
control
method
selection
0: V/f control
3: Flux vector control
0 to 4 2 No A A A A A 319H -
Control
Method

5-36
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
E3-02
Motor 2
max. out-
put fre-
quency
(FMAX)
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values for
E3-05 and E3-07.
In this case, the setting for E3-06
will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequen-
cies are set in the following manner:
E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E3-
05 (FB) > E3-07 (FMIN)
40.0 to
400.0
*3
60.0
Hz
No A A A A A 31AH -
Max Fre-
quency
E3-03
Motor 2
max. volt-
age
(VMAX)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
200.0
V
*2
No A A A A A 31BH -
Max Volt-
age
E3-04
Motor 2
max. volt-
age fre-
quency
(FA)
0.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
No A A A A A 31CH -
Base Fre-
quency
E3-05
Motor 2
mid. out-
put fre-
quency 1
(FB)
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
*2
No A A A No No 31DH -
Mid Fre-
quency
E3-06
Motor 2
mid. out-
put fre-
quency
voltage 1
(VC)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
11.0 V
*1
No A A A No No 31EH -
Mid Volt-
age
E3-07
Motor 2
min. out-
put fre-
quency
(FMIN)
0.0 to
400.0
0.5 Hz
*2
No A A A A A 31FH -
Min Fre-
quency
E3-08
Motor 2
min. out-
put fre-
quency
voltage
(VMIN)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
2.0 V
*1
No A A A No No 320H -
Min Volt-
age
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO-
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)

5-37
Motor 2 Setup: E4
User constants for motor 2 are shown in the following table.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. If a multi-function input is set for motor 2 (H1- = 16), the factory setting will depend upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class
Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
E4-01
Motor 2 rated
current
Sets the motor rated current in
1 A units.
the reference values for motor
protection, torque limits and
torque control.
0.32
to 6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No A A A A A 321H 6-49
Motor Rated
FLA
E4-02
Motor 2 rated
slip
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
the reference values for slip
compensation.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*1
No A A A A A 322H -
Motor Rated
Slip
E4-03
Motor 2 no-
load current
Sets the motor no-load cur-
rent in 1 A units.
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
No A A A A A 323H -
No-Load
Current
E4-04
Motor 2 num-
ber of poles
(number of
poles)
Sets the number of motor
poles.
2 to 48 4 poles No No A No A A 324H -
Number of
Poles
E4-05
Motor 2 line-
to-line resis-
tance
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
Ω
*1
No A A A A A 325H -
Term Resis-
tance
E4-06
Motor 2 leak
inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as a
percentage of the motor rated
voltage.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
*1
No No No A A A 326H -
Leak Induc-
tance
E4-07
Motor 2 rated
capacity
Set the rated output of the
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
*4
No A A A A A 327H -
Mtr Rated
Power

5-38
Option Constants: F
The following settings are made with the option constants (F constants): Settings for Option Cards
PG Option Setup: F1
User constants for the PG Speed Control Card are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
F1-01
PG constant Sets the number of PG (pulse
generator or encoder) pulses.
Sets the number of pulses per
motor revolution.
0 to
60000
600 No No Q No Q No 380H
6-
142PG Pulses/
Rev
F1-02
Operation
selection at
PG open cir-
cuit (PGO)
Sets the PG disconnection
stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
0 to 3 1 No No A No A No 381H
6-
142
PG Fdbk
Loss Sel
F1-03
Operation
selection at
overspeed
(OS)
Sets the stopping method
when an overspeed (OS) fault
occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
02.)
1: Coast to stop
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
0 to 3 1 No No A No A A 382H
6-
142
PG Over-
speed Sel
F1-04
Operation
selection at
deviation
Sets the stopping method
when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
02.)
1: Coast to stop
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV
is displayed and operation
continued.)
0 to 3 3 No No A No A A 383H
6-
142
PG Devia-
tion Sel

5-39
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Flux vector control factory settings are given.)
F1-05
PG rotation 0: Phase A leads with
forward run command.
(Phase B leads with
reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with
forward run command.
(Phase A leads with
reverse run command.)
0 or 1 0 No No A No A No 384H
6-
142PG Rotation
Sel
F1-06
PG division
rate (PG
pulse moni-
tor)
Sets the division ratio for the
PG speed control card pulse
output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
This constant is only effective
when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio
settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1.
1 to
132
1 No No A No A No 385H
6-
143
PG Output
Ratio
F1-07
Integral value
during accel/
decel enable/
disable
Sets integral control during
acceleration/deceleration to
either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral
function isn't used while
accelerating or
decelerating; it is used at
constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all
times.)
0 or 1 0 No No A No No No 386H
6-
143
PG Ramp PI/I
Sel
F1-08
Overspeed
detection
level
Sets the overspeed detection
method.
Frequencies above that set for
F1-08 (set as a percentage of
quency) that continue to
exceed this frequency for the
time set in F1-09 are detected
as overspeed faults.
0 to
120
115% No No A No A A 387H
6-
143
PG Overspd
Level
F1-09
Overspeed
detection
delay time 0.0 to
2.0 0.0 s* No No A No A A 388H
6-
143
PG Overspd
Time
F1-10
Excessive
speed devia-
tion detec-
tion level
Sets the speed deviation
detection method.
Any speed deviation above
the F1-10 set level (set as a
output frequency) that contin-
ues for the time set in F1-11 is
detected as a speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the differ-
ence between actual motor
speed and the reference com-
mand speed.
0 to 50 10% No No A No A A 389H
6-
143
PG Deviate
Level
F1-11
Excessive
speed devia-
tion detec-
tion delay
time
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 s No No A No A A 38AH
6-
143
PG Deviate
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-40
Analog Reference Card: F2
User constants for the Analog Reference Card are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
F1-12
Number of
PG gear teeth
1
Sets the number of teeth on
the gears if there are gears
between the PG and the
motor.
A gear ratio of 1 will be used
if either of these constants is
set to 0.
0 to
1000
0 No No A No No No 38BH
6-
143
PG # Gear
Teeth1
F1-13
Number of
PG gear teeth
2 0 No No A No No No 38CH
6-
143
PG # Gear
Teeth2
F1-14
PG open-cir-
cuit detection
time
Used to set the PG disconnec-
tion detection time. PGO will
be detected if the detection
time continues beyond the set
time.
0.0 to
10.0
2.0 s No No A No A No 38DH
6-
143
PGO Detect
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
F2-01
Bi-polar or
uni-polar
input selec-
tion
Sets the functions for channel
1 to 3 which are effective
when the AI-14B Analog
Reference Card is used.
0: 3-channel individual
(Channel 1: terminal A1,
Channel 2: terminal A2,
Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Addi-
tion values are the fre-
quency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-
01. In this case the multi-
function input “Option/
Inverter selection” cannot be
used.
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 38FH
6-
149
AI-14 Input
Sel

5-41
Digital Reference Card: F3
User constants for the Digital Reference Card are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
F3-01
Digital input
option
Sets the Digital Reference
Card input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5-
digit input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the
DI-16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or
higher, the input will be BCD,
and the units will change to
the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7 0 No A A A A A 390H
6-
149
DI Input

5-42
Analog Monitor Cards: F4
User constants for the Analog Monitor Card are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
F4-01
Channel 1
monitor
selection
Effective when the Analog
Monitor Card is used.
Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor
item to be output. (U1- )
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for
outputting monitor items.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41
are not used. When the AO-
12 Analog Monitor Card is
used, outputs of ± 10 V are
possible. To output ± 10 V, set
F4-07 or F4-08 to 1. When
the AO-08 Analog Monitor
Card is used, only outputs of
0 to +10 V are possible.
A meter calibration function
is available.
1 to 45 2 No A A A A A 391H 6-77
AO Ch1
Select
F4-02
Channel 1
gain 0.00 to
2.50
1.00 Yes A A A A A 392H 6-77
AO Ch1 Gain
F4-03
Channel 2
monitor
selection 1 to 45 3 No A A A A A 393H 6-77
AO Ch2
Select
F4-04
Channel 2
gain 0.00 to
2.50
0.50 Yes A A A A A 394H 6-77
AO Ch2 Gain
F4-05
Channel 1
output moni-
tor bias
Sets the channel 1 item bias
to 100%/10 V when the ana-
log monitor card is used.
-10.0to
10.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A 395H 6-77
AO Ch1 Bias
F4-06
Channel 2
output moni-
tor bias
Sets the channel 2 item bias
to 100%/10 V when the ana-
log monitor card is used.
-10.0to
10.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A 396H 6-77
AO Ch2 Bias
F4-07
Analog out-
put signal
level for
channel 1
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 397H -
AO Opt
Level Sel
F4-08
Analog out-
put signal
level for
channel 2
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 398H 6-77
AO Opt
Level Sel

5-43
Digital Output Card (DO-02 and DO-08): F5
User constants for the Digital Output Card are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
F5-01
Channel 1
output selec-
tion
Effective when a Digital Out-
put Card (DO-02 or DO-08)
is used.
Set the number of the multi-
function output to be output.
0 to 37 0 No A A A A A 399H
6-
146
DO Ch1
Select
F5-02
Channel 2
output selec-
tion
Effective when a Digital Out-
put Card (DO-02 or DO-08)
is used.
0 to 37 1 No A A A A A 39AH
6-
146
DO Ch2
Select
F5-03
Channel 3
output selec-
tion
Effective when a DO-08 Dig-
ital Output Card is used.
0 to 37 2 No A A A A A 39BH
6-
146
DO Ch3
Select
F5-04
Channel 4
output selec-
tion
0 to 37 4 No A A A A A 39CH
6-
146
DO Ch4
Select
F5-05
Channel 5
output selec-
tion
0 to 37 6 No A A A A A 39DH
6-
146
DO Ch5
Select
F5-06
Channel 6
output selec-
tion
0 to 37 37 No A A A A A 39EH
6-
147
DO Ch6
Select
F5-07
Channel 7
output selec-
tion
0 to 37 0F No A A A A A 39FH
6-
147
DO Ch7
Select
F5-08
Channel 8
output selec-
tion
0 to 37 0F No A A A A A 3A0H
6-
147
DO Ch8
Select
F5-09
DO-08 out-
put mode
selection
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual out-
puts
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 2 0 No A A A A A 3A1H
6-
147
DO-08 Selec-
tion

5-44
Communications Option Cards: F6
User constants for a Communications Option Card are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
F6-01
Operation
selectionafter
communica-
tions error
Set the stopping method for
communications errors.
0: Deceleration stop using
deceleration time in C1-
02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3 1 No A A A A A 3A2H -
BUS Fault
Sel
F6-02
Input level of
external fault
from Com-
munications
Option Card
0: Always detect
1: Detect during operation
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 3A3H -
EF0 Detec-
tion
F6-03
Stopping
method for
external fault
from Com-
munications
Option Card
0: Deceleration stop using
02
1: Coast to stop
09
0 to 3 1 No A A A A A 3A4H -
EF0 Fault
Action
F6-04
Trace sam-
pling from
Communica-
tions Option
Card
-
0 to
60000
0 No A A A A A 3A5H -
Trace Sam-
ple Tim
F6-06
Torque refer-
ence/torque
limit selec-
tion from
optical option
0: Torque reference/torque
limit from transmission
disabled.
1: Torque reference/torque
limit from transmission
enabled.
0 or 1 1 No No No No A A 3A7H -
Torq Ref/Lmt
Sel

5-45
Terminal Function Constants: H
The following settings are made with the terminal function constants (H constants): Settings for external ter-
minal functions.
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
User constants for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
H1-01
Terminal S3
function selec-
tion Multi-function contact input
1
0 to 78 24 No A A A A A 400H -
Terminal S3
Sel
H1-02
Terminal S4
function selec-
2
0 to 78 14 No A A A A A 401H -
Terminal S4
Sel
H1-03
Terminal S5
function selec-
3
0 to 78 3 (0)* No A A A A A 402H -
Terminal S5
Sel
H1-04
Terminal S6
function selec-
4
0 to 78 4 (3)* No A A A A A 403H -
Terminal S6
Sel
H1-05
Terminal S7
function selec-
5
0 to 78 6 (4)* No A A A A A 404H -
Terminal S7
Sel
H1-06
Terminal S8
function selec-
6
0 to 78 8 (6) No A A A A A 405H -
Terminal S8
Sel
H1-07
Terminal S9
function selec-
7
0 to 78 5 No A A A A A 406H -
Terminal S9
Sel
H1-08
Terminal S10
function selec-
8
0 to 78 32 No A A A A A 407H -
Terminal S10
Sel

5-46
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
H1-09
Terminal S11
function selec-
tion Multi-function contactinput
9
0 to 78 7 No A A A A A 408H -
Terminal S11
Sel
H1-10
Terminal S12
function selec-
tion Multi-function contactinput
10
0 to 78 15 No A A A A A 409H -
Terminal S12
Sel
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
Page
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
0 3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-8
1 Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant setting) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-66
2 Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-73
3
When H3-05 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed
switch.
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-5
4 Multi-step speed reference 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-5
5 Multi-step speed reference 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-5
6 Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-5
7 Accel/decel time 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-16
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-67
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-67
A
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, fre-
quency on hold)
B OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
C Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
D
No V/f control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f con-
trol)
No Yes No No No -
E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled) No Yes No Yes Yes -
F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used) - - - - - -
10 Up command (Always set with the down command) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-69
11 Down command (Always set with the up command) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-69
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-74
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-74
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 7-2
15
Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
time set in C1-09 when ON.)
16 Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-47
17
Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
time set in C1-09 when OFF)
18
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function
outputs are set in H1- and H2- .)
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-97
1A Accel/Decel time 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-16
1B
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants
other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
6-
139
1C
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency refer-
ence.)
1D
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency
reference.)
1E Analog frequency reference sample/hold Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-73
20 to
2F
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped
during PID control)
31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-97
32 Multi-step speed reference 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
34 PID soft starter Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-97
35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-97
60 DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-13
61 External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes 6-57
62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes 6-57
63 Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d6-02) Yes Yes No No No -
64 External speed search command 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
65 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
66 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
67
Communications test mode (“Pass” is displayed when the communications test is
passed.)
68 High-slip braking (HSB) Yes Yes No No No -
71 Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control) No No No Yes Yes -
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo) No No No Yes No -
77 Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03) No No No Yes Yes -
78 Polarity reversing command for external torque reference No No No Yes Yes -
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
Page
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-48
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
User constants for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
H2-01
Terminal M1-
M2 function
selection
(contact) Multi-function contact output 0 to 37 0 No A A A A A 40BH -
Term M1-M2
Sel
H2-02
Terminal M3-
M4 function
selection
(open collec-
tor)
1
0 to 37 1 No A A A A A 40CH -
Term M3-M4
Sel
H2-03
Terminal M5-
M6 function
selection
(open collec-
tor)
2
0 to 37 2 No A A A A A 40DH -
Term M5-M6
Sel
H2-04
Terminal P3
function
selection
(open collec-
tor)
3
0 to 37 6 No A A A A A 40EH -
Term P3 Sel
H2-05
Terminal P4
function
selection
(open collec-
tor)
4
0 to 37 10 No A A A A A 40FH -
Term P4 Sel

5-49
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
Page
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
0 During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
1 Zero-speed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
2 Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
3
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and dur-
ing frequency agree)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
4
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, L4-02
used)
5
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output fre-
quency ≤ -L4-01, L4-02 used)
6
Inverter operation ready
READY: After initialization, no faults
7 During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
8 During baseblock (ON: during baseblock) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
9 Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
A Run command selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque
detection at ON)
C Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-62
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-64
E
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
CPF01 has occurred.)
F Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.) - - - - - -
10 Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
11 Fault reset command active Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
12 Timer function output Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-93
13 Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
14
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and dur-
ing frequency agree)
15 Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ -L4-03, L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
16 Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ -L4-03, L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-46
18 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-46
19 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-46
1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
1C Motor selection (Motor 2 selected) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
1D During regenerative operation (ON: During regenerative operation) No No No Yes Yes -
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-63
1F
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detec-
tion level)
20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit) No No Yes Yes Yes -

5-50
Analog Inputs: H3
User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
31 During speed limit (ON: During speed limit) No No No Yes Yes -
32
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected (internal
torque reference < external torque reference).
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
No No No Yes Yes
6-
116
33 Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-servo function completed) No No No Yes No -
37
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, ini-
tial excitation, operation stop)
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
H3-01
Signal level
selection (ter-
minal A1)
0: 0 to ±10V
[11-bit + polarity (posi-
tive/negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10V
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 410H 6-24
Term A1 Sig-
nal
H3-02
Gain (termi-
nal A1) Sets the frequency when 10 V
is input, as a percentage of the
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Yes A A A A A 411H 6-24
Terminal A1
Gain
H3-03
Bias (termi-
nal A1) Sets the frequency when 0 V
is input, as a percentage of the
maximum frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A 412H 6-24
Terminal A1
Bias
H3-04
Signal level
selection (ter-
minal A3)
0: 0 to ±10V
[11-bit + polarity (posi-
tive/negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10V
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 413H 6-24
Term A3 Sig-
nal
H3-05
Multi-func-
tion analog
input (termi-
nal A3)
Select from the functions
listed in the following table.
Refer to the next page.
0 to 1F 2 No A A A A A 414H 6-24
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
Gain (termi-
nal A3)
Sets the input gain (level)
when terminal 16 is 10V.
Set according to the 100%
value selected from H3-05.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Yes A A A A A 415H 6-24
Terminal A3
Gain
H3-07
Bias (termi-
nal A3)
when terminal 16 is 10V.
value selected from H3-05.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A 416H 6-24
Terminal A3
Bias
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
Page
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-51
H3-08
Multi-func-
tion analog
inputterminal
A2 signal
level selec-
tion
0: Limit negative frequency
settings for gain and bias
settings to 0.
1: Do not limit negative
frequency settings for
gain and bias settings to 0
(i.e., allow reverse
operation).
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage
input using the switch on the
control panel.
0 to 2 2 No A A A A A 417H 6-24
Term A2 Sig-
nal
H3-09
Multi-func-
tion analog
inputterminal
A2 function
selection
Select multi-function analog
input function for terminal
A2. Refer to the next table.
0 to 1F 0 No A A A A A 418H 6-25
Terminal A2
Sel
H3-10
Gain (termi-
nal A2)
when terminal 14 is 10 V (20
mA).
value for the function set for
H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Yes A A A A A 419H 6-25
Terminal A2
Gain
H3-11
Bias (termi-
nal A2)
when terminal 14 is 0 V (4
mA).
value for the function set for
H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A 41AH 6-25
Terminal A2
Bias
H3-12
Analog input
filter time
constant
Sets primary delay filter time
constant in seconds for the
two analog input terminal (A1
and A2).
Effective for noise control
etc.
0.00 to
2.00
0.03
s
No A A A A A 41BH 6-25
Filter Avg
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-52
H3-05,H3-09 Settings
Set-
ting
Value
Function Contents (100%)
Control Methods
Page
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
0 Add to terminal A1 Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-26
1 Frequency gain
Frequency reference (voltage) command
value
2
Auxiliary frequency reference (2nd
step analog)
Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-26
3
Auxiliary frequency reference 2
(3rd step analog)
4 Voltage bias Motor rated voltage (E1-05) Yes Yes No No No -
5
Accel/decel change (reduction
coefficient)
Set acceleration and deceleration times (C1-
01 to C1-08)
6 DC injection braking current Inverter rated output current Yes Yes Yes No No 6-14
7
Overtorque/undertorque detection
level
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
8 Stall prevention level during run Inverter rated output current Yes Yes No No No 6-44
9
Frequency reference lower limit
level
A Jump frequency Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-28
B PID feedback Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-97
C PID target value Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-97
E Motor temperature input 10 V = 100% Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-53
10 Positive torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes Yes 6-38
11 Negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes Yes 6-38
12 Regenerative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes Yes 6-38
13
Torque reference/torque limit at
speed control
Motor’s rated torque No No No Yes Yes
6-
116
14 Torque compensation Motor’s rated torque No No No Yes Yes
6-
116
15 Positive/negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes Yes 6-38
1F Analog input not used. - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-6
13, 14,
16to1E
Not used - - - - - - -

5-53
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
User constants for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
H4-01
Monitor
selection
(terminal
FM)
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1- )
from terminal FM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
are not used.
1 to 45 2 No A A A A A 41DH 6-76
Terminal
FM Sel
H4-02
Gain (ter-
minal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog
output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item
output will be output in multi-
ples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter cali-
bration function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
(0 to
1000.0)
1.00
(100%)
Yes Q Q Q Q Q 41EH
4-6
6-76Terminal
FM Gain
H4-03
Bias (termi-
nal FM)
output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a
percentage of 10 V.
-10.0to
+10.0
(-100.0
to
100.0)
0.0%
(0.0%)
Yes A A A A A 41FH 4-6
Terminal
FM Bias
H4-04
Monitor
selection
(terminal
AM)
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1- )
from terminal AM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
are not used.
1 to 45 3 No A A A A A 420H
4-6
6-76
Terminal
AM Sel
H4-05
Gain (ter-
minal AM)
Set the voltage level gain for
multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of
10 V to be output as the 100%
output for the monitor items.
0.00 to
2.50
(0 to
1000.0)
0.50
(200%)
Yes Q Q Q Q Q 421H
4-6
6-76Terminal
AM Gain
H4-06
Bias (termi-
nal AM)
output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a
percentage of 10 V.
-10.0to
+10.0
(0 to
1000.0)
0.0%
(0.0%)
Yes A A A A A 422H -
Terminal
AM Bias
H4-07
Analog out-
put 1 signal
level selec-
tion
Sets the signal output level for
multi-function output 1 (termi-
nal FM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
1: 0 to ±10 V output
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 423H -
AO Level
Select1

5-54
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table.
H4-08
Analog out-
put 2 signal
level selec-
tion
multi-function output 2 (termi-
nal AM)
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 424H -
AO Level
Select2
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
H5-01
Station
address
Set the Inverter's node address.
0 to 20
*
1F No A A A A A 425H 6-83
Serial
Comm Adr
H5-02
Communi-
cation
speed selec-
tion
Set the baud rate for 6CN
MEMOBUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4 3 No A A A A A 426H 6-83
Serial Baud
Rate
H5-03
Communi-
cation par-
ity selection
Set the parity for 6CN MEMO-
BUS communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2 0 No A A A A A 427H 6-83
Serial Com
Sel
H5-04
Stopping
method
after com-
munication
error
Set the stopping method for
communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
0 to 3 3 No A A A A A 428H 6-83
Serial Fault
Sel
H5-05
Communi-
cation error
detection
selection
Set whether or not a communi-
cations timeout is to be
detected as a communications
error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 429H 6-83
Serial Flt
Dtct
H5-06
Send wait
time Set the time from the Inverter
receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
5 to 65 5 ms No A A A A A 42AH 6-83
Transmit
WaitTIM
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-55
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
H5-07
RTS con-
trol ON/
OFF
Select to enable or disable
RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always
ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON
only when sending)
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 42BH 6-83
RTS Con-
trol Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-56
Pulse Train I/O: H6
User constants for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
H6-01
Pulse train
input func-
tion selec-
tion
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
0 to 2 0 No A A A A A 42CH
6-2
6-29
6-96
Pulse Input
Sel
H6-02
Pulse train
input scal-
ing
Set the number of pulses in
hertz, taking the reference to be
100%.
1000 to
32000
1440
Hz
Yes A A A A A 42DH
6-2
6-29
PI Scaling
H6-03
Pulse train
input gain Set the input gain level as a per-
cent when the pulse train set in
H6-02 is input.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Yes A A A A A 42EH 6-29
Pulse Input
Gain
H6-04
Pulse train
input bias Set the input bias when the
pulse train is 0.
-100.0
to
100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A 42FH 6-29
Pulse Input
Bias
H6-05
Pulse train
input filter
time
Set the pulse train input pri-
mary delay filter time constant
in seconds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes A A A A A 430H 6-29
PI Filter
Time
H6-06
Pulse train
monitor
selection
Select the pulse train monitor
output items (value of the
part of U1- ).
There are two types of monitor
items: Speed-related items and
PID-related items.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
2 Yes A A A A A 431H 6-79
Pulse Out-
put Sel
H6-07
Pulse train
monitor
scaling
Set the number of pulses output
when speed is 100% in hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0,
to make the pulse train monitor
output synchronously to the
output frequency.
0 to
32000
1440
Hz
Yes A A A A A 432H 6-79
PO Scaling

5-57
Protection Function Constants: L
The following settings are made with the protection function constants (L constants): Motor selection func-
tion, power loss ridethrough function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, torque limits, and hard-
ware protection.
Motor Overload: L1
User constants for motor overloads are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
L1-01
Motor pro-
tection
selection
Sets whether the motor over-
load function is enabled or dis-
abled at electric thermal
overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
Inverter power supply is
turned off, the thermal value is
reset, so even if this constant is
set to 1, protection may not be
effective.
When several motors are con-
nected to one Inverter, set to 0
and ensure that each motor is
installed with a protection
device.
0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 480H
4-5
6-49
MOL Fault
Select
L1-02
Motor pro-
tection time
constant
Sets the electric thermal detec-
tion time in seconds units.
The factory setting is 150%
overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload
resistance is known, also set the
overload resistance protection
time for when the motor is hot
started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min No A A A A A 481H 6-49
MOL Time
Const
L1-03
Alarm oper-
ation selec-
tion during
motor over-
heating
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the input motor
temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the alarm detection
level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (H3 on
the Operator flashes).
0 to 3 3 No A A A A A 482H 6-52
MOL Thm
Input

5-58
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
User constants for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table.
L1-04
Motor over-
heating
operation
selection
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the motor tem-
perature (thermistor) input
exceeds the operation detec-
tion level (2.34 V).
1: Coast to stop
0 to 2 1 No A A A A A 483H 6-52
MOL Filter
Time
L1-05
Motor tem-
perature
input filter
time con-
stant
Set H3-09 to E and set the pri-
mary delay time constant for
motor temperature (thermistor)
inputs in seconds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s No A A A A A 484H 6-52
MOL Filter
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
L2-01
Momentary
power loss
detection
0: Disabled (main circuit
undervoltage (UV)
detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when
the power returns within the
time for L2-02. When L2-
02 is exceeded, main circuit
undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. (Restarts when
power returns during
control operations. Does not
detect main circuit
undervoltage.)
0 to 2 0 No A A A A A 485H 6-55
PwrL
Selection
L2-02
Momentary
power loss
ridethru
time
Ridethrough time, when
Momentary Power Loss Selec-
tion (L2-01) is set to 1, in units
of seconds.
0 to
25.5
0.1 s
*
No A A A A A 486H 6-55
PwrL Ride-
thru t
L2-03
Min. base-
block time
Sets the Inverter's minimum
baseblock time in units of one
second, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ride-
through.
Sets the time to approximately
0.7 times the motor secondary
circuit time constant.
When an overcurrent or over-
voltage occurs when starting a
speed search or DC injection
braking, increase the set values.
0.1 to
5.0
0.2 s
*1
No A A A A A 487H
6-55
6-57PwrL Base-
block t
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-59
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.
* 3. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
L2-04
Voltage
recovery
time
Sets the time required to return
the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the comple-
tion of a speed search, in units
of one second.
Sets the time required to
recover from 0 V to the maxi-
mum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
*1
No A A A A A 488H
6-55
6-56
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
L2-05
Undervolt-
age detec-
tion level
Sets the main circuit undervolt-
age (UV) detection level (main
circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the
main circuit undervoltage
detection level.
150 to
210
*2
190 V
*2
No A A A A A 489H 6-56
PUV Det
Level
L2-06
KEB decel-
eration time
Sets in seconds the time
required to decelerate from the
speed where the deceleration at
momentary power loss com-
mand (KEB) is input to zero
speed.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 s No A A A A A 48AH -
KEB Fre-
quency
L2-07
Momentary
recovery
time
Set in seconds the time to
accelerate to the set speed after
recovery from a momentary
power loss.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
*3
No A A A A A 48BH -
UV
RETURN
TIME
L2-08
Frequency
reduction
gain at KEB
start
Sets as a percent the about to
reduce the output frequency at
the beginning of deceleration at
momentary power loss (KEB).
Reduction = slip frequency
before KEB operation × L2-08
× 2
0 to
300
100% No A A A A A 48CH -
KEB Decel
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-60
Stall Prevention: L3
User constants for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
L3-01
Stall pre-
vention
selection
during accel
0: Disabled (Acceleration as
set. With a heavy load, the
motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level is
exceeded. Acceleration
starts again when the
current is returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration
mode (Using the L3-02
level as a basis, acceleration
is automatically adjusted.
Set acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0 to 2 1 No A A A No No 48FH 6-20
StallP
Accel Sel
L3-02
Stall pre-
vention
level dur-
ing accel
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1
or 2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter
rated current.
The factory setting reduces the
set values when the motor
stalls.
0 to
200
150% No A A A No No 490H 6-20
StallP
Accel Lvl
L3-03
Stall pre-
vention
limit dur-
ing accel
Sets the lower limit for stall
prevention during acceleration,
as a percentage of the Inverter
rated current, when operation is
in the frequency range above
E1-06.
0 to
100
50% No A A A No No 491H 6-20
StallP CHP
Lvl
L3-04
Stall pre-
vention
selection
during
decel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as
set. If deceleration time is
too short, a main circuit
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main
circuit voltage exceeds the
overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration
mode (Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so
that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest
possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Brak-
ing Resistor, Braking Resistor
Unit, Braking Unit) is used,
always set to 0 or 3.
0 to 3* 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 492H
4-6
6-22
StallP
Decel Sel

5-61
* The setting range is 0 to 2 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
Reference Detection: L4
User constants for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.
L3-05
Stall pre-
vention
selection
during run-
ning
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With
a heavy load, the motor may
stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the
deceleration time for the
stall prevention function is
C1-02.)
deceleration time for the
stall prevention function is
C1-04.)
0 to 2 1 No A A No No No 493H 6-43
StallP Run
Sel
L3-06
Stall pre-
vention
level dur-
ing running
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the
The factory setting reduces the
set values when the motor
stalls.
30 to
200
160% No A A No No No 494H 6-43
StallP Run
Level
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
L4-01
Speed
agreement
detection
level
Effective when “Desired fre-
quency (ref/setting) agree 1,”
“Frequency detection 1,” or
“Frequency detection 2" is set
for a multi-function output.
Frequencies to be detected are
set in Hz units.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A 499H -
Spd Agree
Level
L4-02
Speed
agreement
detection
width
Effective when “Frequency
(speed) agree 1,” “Desired fre-
quency (speed) agree 1,” or
“Frequency (FOUT) detection
1,” is set for a multi-function
output.
Sets the frequency detection
width in Hz units.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz No A A A A A 49AH -
Spd Agree
Width
L4-03
Speed
agreement
detection
level (+/-)
Effective when “Desired fre-
quency (speed) agree 2,”
“Desired frequency (speed)
agree 1" “Frequency (FOUT)
detection 3,” or “Frequency
(FOUT) detection 4" is set for a
multi-function output.
Frequency detection width is
set in Hz units.
-400.0
to
+400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A 49BH -
Spd Agree
Lvl+-
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-62
Fault Restart: L5
User constants for restarting faults are shown in the following table.
L4-04
Speed
agreement
detection
width (+/-)
Effective when “Frequency
(speed) agree 2,” “Desired fre-
quency (speed) agree 1,” or
“Frequency detection 4" is set
for a multi-function output.
Frequency detection width is
set in Hz units.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz No A A A A A 49CH -
Spd Agree
Wdth+-
L4-05
Operation
when fre-
quency ref-
erence is
missing
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed
continues. (At 80% of speed
before the frequency
reference was lost)
Frequency reference is lost:
Frequency reference dropped
over 90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 49DH 6-62
Ref Loss
Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
L5-01
Number of
auto restart
attempts
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts.
Automatically restarts after a
fault and conducts a speed
search from the run frequency.
0 to 10 0 No A A A A A 49EH 6-63
Num of
Restarts
L5-02
Auto restart
operation
selection
Sets whether a fault contact
output is activated during fault
restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is
not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 49FH 6-63
Restart Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-63
Torque Detection: L6
User constants for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
L6-01
Torque
detection
selection 1
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
3: Overtorque detection only
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
5: Undertorque detection only
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
(warning).
7: Undertorque detection only
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
continuously during
operation; output stopped
operation).
0 to 8 0 No A A A A A 4A1H 6-45
Torq Det 1
Sel
L6-02
Torque
detection
level 1
Open-loop vector control:
Motor rated torque is set as
100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated cur-
rent is set as 100%.
0 to
300
150% No A A A A A 4A2H 6-45
Torq Det 1
Lvl
L6-03
Torque
detection
time 1
Sets the overtorque/under-
torque detection time in 1-sec-
ond units.
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s No A A A A A 4A3H 6-45
Torq Det 1
Time

5-64
Torque Limits: L7
User constants for torque limits are shown in the following table.
L6-04
Torque
detection
selection 2
Multi-function output for over-
torque detection 1 is output to
multi-function contact output
when overtorque detection 1
NO or overtorque detection 1
NC is selected. Multi-function
output for overtorque detection
2 is output to multi-function
contact output when overtorque
detection 2 NO or overtorque
detection 2 NC is selected.
0 to 8 0 No A A A A A 4A4H 6-45
Torq Det 2
Sel
L6-05
Torque
detection
level 2 0 to
300
150% No A A A A A 4A5H 6-45
Torq Det 2
Lvl
L6-06
Torque
detection
time 2 0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s No A A A A A 4A6H 6-45
Torq Det 2
Time
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Name Description Setting
Range
Fac-
tory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
L7-01
Forward
drive
torque
limit
Sets the torque limit value as a per-
centage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
0 to
300
200% No No No A A A 4A7H 6-38
Torq Limit
Fwd
L7-02
Reverse
drive
torque
limit
0 to
300
200% No No No A A A 4A8H 6-38
Torq Limit
Rev
L7-03
Forward
regenera-
tive torque
limit
0 to
300
200% No No No A A A 4A9H 6-38
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
L7-04
Reverse
regenera-
tive torque
limit
0 to
300
200% No No No A A A
4AA
H
6-38
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
Negative torque
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative
state
Regenerative
state
Forward

5-65
Hardware Protection: L8
User constants for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
L8-01
Protect selec-
tion for inter-
nal DB
resistor (Type
ERF)
0: Disabled (no overheating
protection)
1: Enabled (overheating
protection)
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 4ADH 6-64
DB Resistor
Prot
L8-02
Overheat pre-
alarm level
Sets the detection temperature
for the Inverter overheat
detection pre-alarm in °C.
The pre-alarm detects when
the cooling fin temperature
reaches the set value.
50 to
130
95 °C* No A A A A A 4AEH 6-65
OH Pre-
Alarm Lvl
L8-03
Operation
selectionafter
overheat pre-
alarm
Sets the operation for when
the Inverter overheat pre-
alarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in
deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
(Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in set-
ting 0 to 2 and a minor fault
will be given in setting 3.
0 to 3 3 No A A A A A 4AFH 6-65
OH Pre-
Alarm Sel
L8-05
Input open-
phase protec-
tion selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects if input
current open-phase, power
supply voltage imbalance
or main circuit
electrostatic capacitor
deterioration occurs.)
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 4B1H -
Ph Loss In
Sel
L8-07
Output open-
phase protec-
tion selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Enabled
Output open-phase is detected
at less than 5% of Inverter
rated current.
When applied motor capacity
is small for Inverter capacity,
output open-phase may be
detected inadvertently or
open-phase may not be
detected. In this case, set to 0.
0 to 2 0 No A A A A A 4B3H -
Ph Loss Out
Sel
L8-09
Ground pro-
tection selec-
tion 0:Disabled
1:Enabled
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 4B5H -
Ground Fault
Sel

5-66
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
L8-10
Cooling fan
control selec-
tion
Set the ON/OFF control for
the cooling fan.
0: ON only when Inverter is
ON
1: ON whenever power is
ON
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 4B6H -
FAN Control
Sel
L8-11
Cooling fan
control delay
time
Set the time in seconds to
delay turning OFF the cooling
fan after the cooling fan OFF
command is received.
0 to
300
60 s No A A A A A 4B7H -
FAN OFF
TIM
L8-12
Ambient tem-
perature Set the ambient temperature.
45 to
60
45 °C No A A A A A 4B8H -
temp
L8-15
OL2 charac-
teristics
selection at
low speeds
0: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at
low speeds enabled.
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 4BBH -
OL2
Chara@L-
Spd
L8-18
Soft CLA
selection 0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 4BFH -
Soft CLA Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-67
N: Special Adjustments
The following settings are made with the special adjustments constants (N constants): Hunting prevention and
speed feedback detection control.
Hunting Prevention Function: N1
User constants for hunting prevention are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
N1-01
Hunting-pre-
vention func-
tion selection
0: Hunting-prevention
function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention
function enabled
The hunting-prevention func-
tion suppresses hunting when
the motor is operating with a
light load.
This function is enabled in V/
f control method only.
If high response is to be given
priority over vibration sup-
pression, disable the hunting-
prevention function.
0 or 1 1 No A A No No No 580H 6-36
Hunt Prev
Select
N1-02
Hunting-pre-
vention gain
Set the hunting-prevention
gain multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as fol-
lows:
• If vibration occurs with
light load, increase the set-
ting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce
the setting.
If the setting is too large, the
voltage will be too suppressed
and the motor may stall.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00 No A A No No No 581H
4-16
6-36Hunt Prev
Gain

5-68
Speed Feedback Protection Control Functions: N2
User constants for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table.
High-slip Braking: N3
User constants for high-slip braking are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
N2-01
Speed feed-
back detec-
tion control
(AFR) gain
Set the internal speed feed-
back detection control gain
using the multiplication func-
tion.
make this setting.
Adjust this constant as fol-
lows:
• If hunting occurs, increase
the set value.
• If response is low, decrease
the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00 No No No A No No 584H
4-16
6-37
AFR Gain
N2-02
Speed feed-
back detec-
tion control
(AFR) time
constant
Set the time constant to
decide the rate of change in
the speed feedback detection
control.
0 to
2000
50 ms No No No A No No 585H 6-37
AFR Time
N2-03
Speed feed-
back detec-
tion control
(AFR) time
constant 2
Set the time constant to
decide the amount of change
in the speed.
0 to
2000
750 ms No No No A No No 586H 6-37
AFR Time 2
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
N3-01
High-slip
braking
deceleration
frequency
width
Sets the frequency width for
deceleration during high-slip
braking as a percent, taking
the Maximum Frequency
(E1-04) as 100%.
1 to 20 5% No A A No No No 588H -
HSB Down
Freq
N3-02
High-slip
braking cur-
rent limit
Sets the current limit for
deceleration during high-slip
braking as a percent, taking
the motor rated current as
100%. The resulting limit
must be 150% of the Inverter
rated current or less.
100 to
200
150% No A A No No No 589H -
HSB Current

5-69
Speed Estimation: N4
User constants for speed estimation are shown in the following table.
N3-03
High-slip
braking stop
dwell time
Set in seconds the dwell time
for the output frequency for
FMIN (1.5 Hz) during V/f
control.
Effective only during deceler-
ation for high-slip braking.
0.1 to
10.0
1.0 s No A A No No No 58AH -
HSB Dwell
Time
N3-04
High-slip
braking OL
time
Set the OL time when the out-
put frequency does not
change for some reason dur-
ing deceleration for high-slip
braking.
30 to
1200
40 s No A A No No No 58BH -
HSB OL
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
N4-07
Integral time
of speed esti-
mator
Set the integral time of the
speed estimator for PI con-
trol.
0.000
to
9.999
0.060
ms
No No No No No A 59AH -
SPD EST I
Time
N4-08
Proportional
gain of speed
estimator
Set the proportional gain of
the speed estimator for PI
control.
0 to
1000
15 No No No No No A 59BH -
SPD EST P
GAIN
N4-17
Torque
adjustment
gain Set the torque adjustment
gain for low-speed power.
0.0 to
5.0
TRQ adjust
gain
N4-18
Feeder resis-
tance adjust-
ment gain
Set the gain for the feeder
resistance in the speed esti-
mator.
0.90 to
1.30
Feeder R gain
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-70
Feed Forward: N5
User constants for the feed forward control are shown in the following table.
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Flux vector control factory settings are given.)
* 2. The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity.
Digital Operator Constants: o
The following settings are made with the Digital Operator constants (o constants): Multi-function selections
and the copy function.
Monitor Select: o1
User constants for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
N5-01
Feed forward
control selec-
tion
Select the feed forward con-
trol.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0*1 No No No No A A 5B0H -
Feedfoward
Sel
N5-02
Motor accel-
eration time
Set the time required to
accelerate the motor at the
rated torque (T100) to the
rated speed (Nr).
J: GO2
/4, P: Motor rated out-
put
However,
0.000
to
10.000
0.178 s
*2
No No No No A A 5B1H -
Motor Accel
Time
N5-03
Feed forward
proportional
gain
Set the proportional gain for
feed forward control.
Speed reference response will
increase as the setting of N5-
03 is increased.
0.00 to
100.00
1.0 No No No No A A 5B2H -
Feedfoward
Gain
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
o1-01
Monitor
selection
Set the number of the monitor
item to be displayed in the
earliest 4 monitor items. (U1-
)
The output monitor voltage
(factory setting) can be
changed.
4 to 45 6 Yes A A A A A 500H -
User Monitor
Sel
2π · J [kgm2] · Nr [r/min]
ta =
60 · T100 [N · m]
[s]
T100 = × 103 [N · m]
60
2π
·
P [kW]
Nr [n/min]

5-71
o1-02
Monitor
selectionafter
power up
Sets the monitor item to be
displayed when the power is
turned on.
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for
o1-01
1 to 4 1 Yes A A A A A 501H
6-
132
Power-On
Monitor
o1-03
Frequency
units of refer-
ence setting
and monitor
Sets the units that will be set
and displayed for the fre-
quency reference and fre-
quency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is
100%)
2 to 39:
min−1 units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for
setting and display for the
max. output frequency.
Example: When the max. out-
put frequency value is 200.0,
set 12000
0 to
39999
0 No A A A A A 502H
6-
132
Display Scal-
ing
o1-04
Setting unit
for frequency
constants
related to V/f
characteris-
tics
Set the setting unit for fre-
quency reference-related con-
stants.
0: Hz
1: min−1
0 or 1 0 No No No No A A 503H
6-
132
V/f Display
Unit
o1-05
LCD bright-
ness adjust-
ment
Set a smaller value to lighten
the LCD and a larger value
to darken the LCD (stan-
dard: 3).
0 to 5 3 Yes A A A A A 504H -
LCD Contrast
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.

5-72
Multi-function Selections: o2
User constants for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
o2-01
LOCAL/
REMOTE
key enable/
disable
Sets the Digital Operator
Local/Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches
between the Digital
Operator and the constant
settings.)
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 505H
6-
132
Local/
Remote Key
o2-02
STOP key
during con-
trol circuit
terminal
operation
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
0: Disabled (When the run
command is issued from
and external terminal, the
Stop Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A 506H
6-
132
Oper STOP
Key
o2-03
User con-
stant initial
value
Clears or stores user initial
values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records
the set constants as user
initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all
recorded user initial
values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial val-
ues, 1110 will be set in A1-
03.
0 to 2 0 No A A A A A 507H
6-
133
User Defaults
o2-04
kVA selection
Do not set. 0 to FF 0* No A A A A A 508H -Inverter
Model #
o2-05
Frequency
reference set-
ting method
selection
When the frequency reference
is set on the Digital Operator
frequency reference monitor,
sets whether the Enter Key is
necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency refer-
ence without Enter Key oper-
ation.
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 509H
6-
133
Operator
M.O.P.
o2-06
Operation
selection
when digital
operator is
disconnected
Sets the operation when the
Digital Operator is discon-
nected.
0: Disabled (Operation
continues even if the
Digital Operator is
disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected
at Digital Operator
disconnection. Inverter
output is cut off, and fault
contact is operated.)
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 50AH -
Oper Detec-
tion

5-73
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
o2-07
Cumulative
operation
time setting
Sets the cumulative operation
time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated
from the set values.
0 to
65535
0 hr No A A A A A 50BH
6-
133
Elapsed Time
Set
o2-08
Cumulative
operation
time selection
0: Cumulative time when the
Inverter power is on. (All
time while the Inverter
power is on is
accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run
time. (Only Inverter
output time is
accumulated.)
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 50CH -
Elapsed Time
Run
o2-10
Fan opera-
tion time set-
ting
Set the initial value of the fan
operation time using time
units.
The operation time accumu-
lates from the set value.
0 to
65535
0 hr No A A A A A 50EH
6-
133
Fan ON Time
Set
o2-12
Fault trace/
fault history
clear function
0: Disabled (U2 and U3 con-
stants are on hold.)
1: Enabled (Initializes U2
and U3 constants.)
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 510H -
Fault Trace
Init
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
o3-01
Copy func-
tion selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to
Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to
Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3 0 No A A A A A 515H
6-
135Copy Func-
tion Sel
o3-02
Read permit-
ted selection 0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 516H
6-
135Copy Allow-
able
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-74
T: Motor Autotuning
The following settings are made with the motor autotuning constants (T constants): Settings for autotuning.
* 1. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value 2 is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
* 3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 4. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 5. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Page
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
T1-00
Motor 1/2
selection
Set the location where the
autotuned motor constants are
to be stored.
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
1 or 2 1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 700H 4-12
Select Motor
T1-01
Autotuning
mode selec-
tion
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning
1: Stationary autotuning
2: Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance
only
0 to 2
*1
0 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 701H
4-9
4-12
Tuning Mode
Sel
T1-02
Motor output
power Set the output power of the
motor in kilowatts.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
kW
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 702H 4-12
Mtr Rated
Power
T1-03
Motor rated
voltage Set the rated voltage of the
motor in volts.
0 to
255.0*2
200.0 V
*2
No No No Yes Yes Yes 703H 4-12
Rated Voltage
T1-04
Motor rated
current Set the rated current of the
motor in amps.
0.32 to
6.40 *4
1.90 A
*3
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 704H 4-12
Rated Current
T1-05
Motor base
frequency Set the base frequency of the
motor in hertz.
0 to
400.0*5
60.00
Hz
No No No Yes Yes Yes 705H 4-12
Rated Fre-
quency
T1-06
Number of
motor poles Set the number of motor
poles.
2 to 48
poles
4 poles No No No Yes Yes Yes 706H 4-12
Number of
Poles
T1-07
Motor base
speed Set the base speed of the
motor in min−1.
0 to
24000
1750
min−1 No No No Yes Yes Yes 707H 4-13
Rated Speed
T1-08
Number of
PG pulses
when turning
Set the number of pulses per
revolution for the PG being
used (pulse generator or
encoder) without any multi-
plication factor.
0 to
60000
600 No No Yes No Yes No 708H 4-13
PG Pulses/
Rev

5-75
U: Monitor Constants
The following settings are made with the monitor constants (U constants): Setting constants for monitoring in
drive mode.
Status Monitor Constants: U1
The constants used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
U1-01
Frequency
reference Monitors/sets the fre-
quency reference value.*
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A A A A A 40H
Frequency
Ref
U1-02
Output fre-
quency Monitors the output fre-
quency.*
0.01
Hz
A A A A A 41H
Output Freq
U1-03
Output cur-
rent Monitors the output cur-
rent.
10 V: Inverter rated output
current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value
output)
0.1 A A A A A A 42H
Output Cur-
rent
U1-04
Control
method Checks the current control
method.
(Cannot be output.) - A A A A A 43H
Control
Method
U1-05
Motor speed
Monitors the detected
motor speed.*
0.01
Hz
No A A A A 44H
Motor Speed
U1-06
Output volt-
age Monitors the output volt-
age reference value in the
Inverter.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
0.1 V A A A A A 45H
Output Volt-
age
U1-07
DC bus volt-
age Monitors the main DC
voltage in the Inverter.
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
1 V A A A A A 46H
DC Bus
Voltage
U1-08
Output
power Monitors the output power
(internally detected value).
10 V: Inverter capacity
(max. applicable motor
capacity)
0.1
kW
A A A A A 47H
Output
kWatts
U1-09
Torque refer-
ence Monitor in internal torque
reference value for vector
control.
10 V: Motor rated torque
0.1% No No A A A 48H
Torque Ref-
erence

5-76
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
U1-10
Input termi-
nal status
Shows input ON/OFF status.
Input Term
Sts
U1-11
Output ter-
minal status
Shows output ON/OFF status.
(Cannot be output.) - A A A A A 4AH
Output
Term Sts
U1-12
Operation
status
Inverter operating status.
(Cannot be output.) - A A A A A 4BH
Int Ctl Sts 1
U1-13
Cumulative
operation
time
Monitors the total operating
time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the oper-
ating time/power ON time
selection can be set in o2-07
and o2-08.
(Cannot be output.)
1
hr
A A A A A 4CH
Elapsed
Time
U1-14
Software
No. (flash
memory) (Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.) - A A A A A 4DH
FLASH ID
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON.
1: REV command
(S2) is ON.
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON.
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON.
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON.
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON.
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON.
1:Multi input 6
(S8) is ON.
U1-10= 00000000
U1-11= 00000000
1: Multi-function
contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 2
(P1) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 3
(P2) is ON.
Not used (always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is ON.
1: Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter
ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
U1-12= 00000000

5-77
U1-15
Terminal
A1 input
voltage
Monitors the input voltage of
the voltage frequency refer-
ence. An input of 10 V corre-
sponds to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
0.1
%
A A A A A 4EH
Term A1
Level
U1-16
Terminal
A2 input
voltage
the multi-function analog
input.
An input of 10 V corresponds
to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to ±10 V possible)
0.1
%
A A A A A 4FH
Term A2
Level
U1-17
Terminal
A3 input
voltage
the multi-function analog
input.
An input of 10 V corresponds
to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to ±10 V possible)
0.1
%
A A A A A 050H
Term 16
Level
U1-18
Motor sec-
ondary cur-
rent (Iq)
Monitors the calculated value
of the motor secondary cur-
rent.
The motor rated secondary
current corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
0.1
%
A A A A A 51H
Mot SEC
Current
U1-19
Motor
exciting
current (Id)
of the motor excitation cur-
rent.
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
0.1
%
No No A A A 52H
Mot EXC
Current
U1-20
Output fre-
quency
after soft-
start
Monitors the output frequency
after a soft start.
The frequency given does not
include compensations, such
as slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
0.0
1Hz
A A A A A 53H
SFS Output
U1-21
ASR input Monitors the input to the speed
control loop.
The maximum frequency cor-
responds to 100%.
0.0
1%
No A No A A 54H
ASR Input
U1-22
ASR output Monitors the output from the
speed control loop.
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
0.0
1%
No A No A A 55HASR Out-
put
U1-24
PID feed-
back value
Monitors the feedback value
when PID control is used.
The input for the max. fre-
quency corresponds to 100%.
0.0
1%
A A A A A 57H
PID Feed-
back
U1-25
DI-16H2
input status
Monitors the reference value
from a DI-16H2 Digital Refer-
ence Card.
The value will be displayed in
binary or BCD depending on
user constant F3-01.
DI-16 Ref-
erence
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-78
U1-26
Output volt-
age refer-
ence (Vq)
Monitors the Inverter internal
voltage reference for motor
secondary current control.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
0.1
V
No No A A A 59H
Voltage Ref
(Vq)
U1-27
Output volt-
age refer-
ence (Vd)
Monitors the Inverter internal
voltage reference for motor
excitation current control.
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
0.1
V
No No A A A 5AH
Voltage Ref
(Vd)
U1-28
Software
No. (CPU) (Manufacturer’s CPU software
No.)
(Cannot be output.) - A A A A A 5BH
CPU ID
U1-32
ACR out-
put of q axis Monitors the current control
output value for the motor sec-
ondary current.
10 V: 100%
0.1
%
No No A A A 5FH
ACR(q)
Output
U1-33
ACR out-
put of d axis Monitors the current control
output value for the motor
excitation current.
10 V: 100%
0.1
%
No No A A A 60H
ACR(d)
Output
U1-34
OPE fault
constant Shows the first constant num-
ber where an OPE fault was
detected.
(Cannot be output.)
- A A A A A 61H
OPE
Detected
U1-35
Zero servo
movement
pulses
Shows the number of PG
pulses times 4 for the move-
ment range when stopped at
zero.
1 No No No A No 62H
Zero Servo
Pulse
U1-36
PID input
volume
PID feedback volume
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
0.0
1%
A A A A A 63H
PID Input
U1-37
PID output
volume
PID control output
100%
0.0
1%
A A A A A 64H
PID Output
U1-38
PID com-
mand
PID command + PID com-
mand bias
100%
0.0
1%
A A A A A 65H
PID Set-
point
U1-39
MEMO-
BUS
communi-
cations
error code
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
Transmit
Err
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
1: Parity
error
1: Overrun
error
1: Framing
error
1: Timeout
U1-40= 00000000

5-79
U1-40
Cooling fan
operating
time Monitors the total operating
time of the cooling fan. The
time can be set in 02-10.
(Cannot be output.)
1
hr
A A A A A 68H
FAN
Elapsed
Time
U1-42
Estimated
motor flux
of the motor flux. 100% is dis-
played for the rated motor
flux.
10 V: Rated motor flux
0.1
%
No No No No A 69H
Mot Flux
EST
U1-43
Motor flux
current
compensa-
tion
Monitors motor flux current
compensation value. 100% is
displayed for the rated second-
ary current of the motor.
10 V: Rated secondary cur-
rent of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.1
%
No No No No A 6AH
Id Comp
Value
U1-44
ASR out-
put without
filter
Monitors the output from the
speed control loop (i.e., the
primary filter input value).
100% is displayed for rated
secondary current of the
motor.
rent of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.0
1%
No No No A A 6BH
ASR Out-
put w Fil
U1-45
Feed for-
ward con-
trol output
Monitors the output from feed
forward control. 100% is dis-
played for rated secondary
current of the motor.
rent of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.0
1%
No No No A A 6CH
FF Cout
Output
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-80
Fault Trace: U2
User constants for error tracing are shown in the following table.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
U2-01
Current fault
The contents of the current fault.
(Cannot be output.)
- A A A A A 80H
Current Fault
U2-02
Previous fault The contents of the error that
occurred just prior to the current
fault.
- A A A A A 81H
Last Fault
U2-03
Reference
frequency at
fault The reference frequency when
the previous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A A A A A 82H
Frequency
Ref
U2-04
Output fre-
quency at
fault
The output frequency when the
previous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A A A A A 83H
Output Freq
U2-05
Output cur-
rent at fault The output current when the pre-
vious fault occurred.
0.1 A A A A A A 84H
Output Cur-
rent
U2-06
Motor speed
at fault The motor speed when the previ-
ous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
No A A A A 85H
Motor Speed
U2-07
Output volt-
age reference
at fault The output reference voltage
when the previous fault occurred.
0.1 V A A A A A 86H
Output Volt-
age
U2-08
DC bus volt-
age at fault The main current DC voltage
when the previous fault occurred.
1 V A A A A A 87H
DC Bus Volt-
age
U2-09
Output power
at fault The output power when the pre-
0.1
kW
A A A A A 88H
Output
kWatts
U2-10
Torque refer-
ence at fault
The reference torque when the
previous fault occurred. The
motor rated torque corresponds
to 100%.
0.1% No No A No A 89H
Torque Refer-
ence

5-81
Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
U2-11
Input termi-
nal status at
fault
The input terminal status when
the previous fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U1-
10.
(Cannot be output.)
- A A A A A 8AH
Input Term
Sts
U2-12
Output termi-
nal status at
fault
The output terminal status when
the previous fault occurred. The
format is the same as for U1-11.
- A A A A A 8BH
Output Term
Sts
U2-13
Operation
status at fault The operating status when the
previous fault occurred. The for-
mat is the same as for U1-12.
- A A A A A 8CH
Inverter Sta-
tus
U2-14
Cumulative
operation
time at fault
The operating time when the pre-
1
hr
A A A A A 8DH
Elapsed time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

5-82
Fault History: U3
User constants for the error log are shown in the following table.
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Regis-
ter
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
-loop
Vec-
tor
2
U3-01
Most recent
fault The error contents of 1st
previous fault.
(Cannot be output.)
- A A A A A 90H
Last Fault
U3-02
Second most
recent fault The error contents of 2nd
previous fault.
- A A A A A 91H
Fault Mes-
sage 2
U3-03
Third most
recent fault The error contents of 3rd
previous fault.
- A A A A A 92H
Fault Mes-
sage 3
U3-04
Fourth/oldest
fault The error contents of 4th
previous fault.
- A A A A A 93H
Fault Mes-
sage 4
U3-05
Cumulative
operation
time at fault
The total operating time
when the 1st previous fault
occurred.
1
hr
A A A A A 94H
Elapsed Time
1
U3-06
Accumulated
time of sec-
ond fault
when the 2nd previous fault
occurred.
1
hr
A A A A A 95H
Elapsed Time
2
U3-07
Accumulated
time of third
fault
when the 3rd previous fault
occurred.
1
hr
A A A A A 96H
Elapsed Time
3
U3-08
Accumulated
time of
fourth/oldest
fault
when the 4th previous fault
occurred.
1
hr
A A A A A 97H
Elapsed Time
4

5-83
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Setting Range Unit
Factory Setting
Display V/f
Control
V/f with
PG
Open-
loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b3-01
Speed search selection
0 to 3 1 2 3 2 - 2
SpdSrch at Start
b3-02
Speed search operating current
0 to 200 1% 120 - 100 - 10
SpdSrch Current
b8-02
Energy-saving gain
0.0 to 10.0 0.1 - - 0.7 1.0 0.7
Energy Save Gain
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time constant
0.0 to 10.00 0.01 s - - 0.50 0.01 0.50
Energy Save F.T
C3-01
Slip compensation gain
0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 - 1.0 1.0 1.0
Slip Comp Gain
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay time
0 to 10000 1 ms 2000 - 200 - -
Slip Comp Time
C4-02
Torque compensation primary delay time
constant 0 to 10000 1 ms 200 200 20 - -
Torq Comp Time
C5-01
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
0.00 to 300.00 0.01 - 0.20 - 20.00 10.00
ASR P Gain 1
C5-02
ASR integral (I) time
0.000 to 10.000 0.001 s - 0.200 - 0.500 0.500
ASR I Time 1
C5-03
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
0.00 to 300.00 0.01 - 0.02 - 20.00 10.00
ASR P Gain 2
C5-04
ASR integral (I) time 2
0.000 to 10.000
0.001
sec.
- 0.050 - 0.500 0.500
ASR I Time 2
C5-06
ASR primary delay time
0.000 to 0.500 0.001 - - - 0.004 0.010
ASR Delay Time
d5-02
Torque reference delay time
0 to 1000 1 ms - - - 0 10
Torq Ref Filter
E1-04
E3-02
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz
60.0
*3
60.0
*3
60.0 60.0 60.0
Max Frequency
E1-05
E3-03
Max. voltage (VMAX)
0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V
200.0
*3
200.0
*3
200.0 200.0 200.0
Max Voltage
E1-06
E3-04
Base frequency (FA)
0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz
60.0
*3
60.0
*3
60.0 60.0 60.0
Base Frequency
E1-07
E3-05
Mid. output frequency (FB)
0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz
3.0
*3
3.0
*3
3.0 0.0 0.0
Mid Frequency A
E1-08
E3-06
Mid. output frequency voltage (VC)*2
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
15.0
*3
15.0
*3
11.0 0.0 0.0
Mid Voltage A

5-84
* 1. The settings will be 0.05 (Flux vector)/2.00 (Open-loop vector) for inverters of 55kW or larger.
* 2. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
* 3. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
* The setting shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW
E1-09
E3-07
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz
1.5
*3
1.5
*3
0.5 0.0 0.3
Min Frequency
E1-10
E3-08
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)*2
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
9.0
*3
9.0
*3
2.0 0.0 1.0
Min Voltage
F1-09
Overspeed detection delay time
0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s - 1.0 - 0.0 0.0
PG Overspd Time
N5-01
Feed forward control selection
0, 1 1 - - - 0 1
Feedfoward Sel
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Unit Factory Setting
Open
Loop
Vector
Con-
trol
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Con-
trol
2
Flux
Vector
Con-
trol
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 0.0
E1-07 Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 0.0
E1-08
*
V 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 19.0 24.0 19.0 24.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 13.3 0.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.3 0.0
E1-10
*
V 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 11.0 13.0 11.0 15.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 2.0 1.3 0.0
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Open
Loop
Vector
Con-
trol
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Con-
trol
2
Flux
Vector
Con-
trol
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 0.0
E1-07 Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 0.0
E1-08
*
V 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 18.0 23.0 18.0 23.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 11.0 13.3 0.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.3 0.0
E1-10
*
V 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 9.0 13.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 2.0 1.3 0.0
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Setting Range Unit
Factory Setting
Display V/f
Control
V/f with
PG
Open-
loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2

5-85
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
Open
Loop
Vector
Con-
trol
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Con-
trol
2
Flux
Vector
Con-
trol
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 0.0
E1-07 Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 0.0
E1-08
*
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 15.0 20.0 15.0 20.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 11.0 13.3 0.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.3 0.0
E1-10
*
V 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 7.0 11.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 2.0 1.3 0.0

5-86
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the Inverter capacity (o2-04) is changed.
200 V Class Inverters
Con-
stant
Number
Name Unit Factory Setting
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s 0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient - 288.20 223.70 169.40 156.80 122.90 94.75 72.69 70.44 63.13
C6-02
Carrier frequency selec-
tion*1 - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop vector control
2*2
- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
-
upper limit
- 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current A 1.90 3.30 6.20 8.50 14.00 19.60 26.60 39.7 53.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 2.50 2.60 2.90 2.73 1.50 1.30 1.70 1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current A 1.20 1.80 2.80 3.00 4.50 5.10 8.00 11.2 15.2
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resis-
tance
Ω 9.842 5.156 1.997 1.601 0.771 0.399 0.288 0.230 0.138
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance % 18.2 13.8 18.5 18.4 19.6 18.2 15.5 19.5 17.2
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W 14 26 53 77 112 172 262 245 272
L2-02
Momentary power loss ride-
thru time
s 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time s 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 100 95 95 95 95 90 100
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.178 0.142 0.166 0.145 0.154 0.168 0.175 0.265 0.244

5-87
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 0: Low noise PWM, 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier
frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 5.5 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
* 2. The initial settings for C6-11 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz.
Con-
stant
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
o2-04 kVA selection - 9 A B C D E F 10 11
b8-03
constant
s 0.50 (Open-loop vector control) 2.00 (Open-loop vector control)
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient - 57.87 51.79 46.27 38.16 35.78 31.35 23.10 20.65 18.12
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection - 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1
C6-11
2*2
- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1
-
upper limit
- 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 1 1
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current A 65.8 77.2 105.0 131.0 160.0 190.0 260.0 260.0 260.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip Hz 1.67 1.70 1.80 1.33 1.60 1.43 1.39 1.39 1.39
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current A 15.7 18.5 21.9 38.2 44.0 45.6 72.0 72.0 72.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
tance
Ω 0.101 0.079 0.064 0.039 0.030 0.022 0.023 0.023 0.023
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance % 20.1 19.5 20.8 18.8 20.2 20.5 20.0 20.0 20.0
E2-10
compensation
W 505 538 699 823 852 960 1200 1200 1200
L2-02
thru time
s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time s 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.7
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 90 90 95 100 100 110 100 95 95
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.317 0.355 0.323 0.320 0.387 0.317 0.533 0.592 0.646

5-88
400 V Class Inverters
Con-
stant
Num-
ber
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection - 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
b8-03
constant
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient - 576.40 447.40 338.80 313.60 245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
C6-02
tion*1 - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
C6-11
tion for open-loop vector
control 2*2
- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
-
tion upper limit
- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current A 1.00 1.60 3.10 4.20 7.00 7.00 9.80 13.30 19.9 26.5
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 2.60 2.50 3.00 2.70 2.70 1.50 1.30 1.70 1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current A 0.60 0.80 1.40 1.50 2.30 2.30 2.60 4.00 5.6 7.6
E2-05
(E4-05)
tance
Ω 38.198 22.459 10.100 6.495 3.333 3.333 1.595 1.152 0.922 0.550
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance % 18.2 14.3 18.3 18.7 19.3 19.3 18.2 15.5 19.6 17.2
E2-10
compensation
W 14 26 53 77 130 130 193 263 385 440
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0 2.0 2.0
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time s 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 90 95 95
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.178 0.142 0.166 0.145 0.154 0.154 0.168 0.175 0.265 0.244

5-89
Con-
stant
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45
o2-04 kVA selection - 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E
b8-03
constant
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient - 115.74 103.58 92.54 76.32 71.56
C6-02
tion*1 - 3 3 3 3 3
C6-11
2*2
- 3 3 3 3 3
-
upper limit
- 3 3 3 3 3
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current A 32.9 38.6 52.3 65.6 79.7
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip Hz 1.67 1.70 1.80 1.33 1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current A 7.8 9.2 10.9 19.1 22.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
tance
Ω 0.403 0.316 0.269 0.155 0.122
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance % 20.1 23.5 20.7 18.8 19.9
E2-10
compensation
W 508 586 750 925 1125
L2-02
thru time
s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time s 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.317 0.355 0.323 0.320 0.387

5-90
Note Inverters with a capacity of 185 kW or more are under development.
* 1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, 6: 15 kHz, and F: User-set (Initial setting for
400-V Inverters with a capacity of 90-kW or 110-kW: 3 kHz.).
* 2. The initial settings for C6-11 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz.
Con-
stant
Number
- Inverter Capacity kW 55 75 90 110 132 160
o2-04 kVA selection - 2F 30 31 32 33 34
b8-03
constant
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient - 67.20 46.20 38.91 36.23 32.79 30.13
C6-02
tion*1 - 2 2 F F 1 1
C6-11
2*2
- 2 2 1 1 1 1
-
upper limit
- 5.0 5.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current A 95.0 130.0 156.0 190.0 223.0 270.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip Hz 1.46 1.39 1.40 1.40 1.38 1.35
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current A 24.0 36.0 40.0 49.0 58.0 70.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
tance
Ω 0.088 0.092 0.056 0.046 0.035 0.029
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance % 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
E2-10
compensation
W 1260 1600 1760 2150 2350 2850
L2-02
thru time
s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time s 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.9
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 100 105 105 120 115 115
N5-02 Motor acceleration time s 0.317 0.533 0.592 0.646 0.673 0.777

Constant Settings by
Function
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-2
Run Command.............................................................6-7
Stopping Methods........................................................6-9
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics..........6-15
Adjusting Frequency References...............................6-24
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ..6-30
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-32
Machine Protection....................................................6-38
Continuing Operation.................................................6-55
Inverter Protection .....................................................6-64
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-66
Monitor Constants......................................................6-76
Individual Functions ...................................................6-81
Digital Operator Functions .......................................6-132
Options ....................................................................6-142

6-2
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set constant b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Constants
Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator's reference frequency setting display.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Fig 6.1 Frequency Setting Display
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open-
loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b1-01
Reference
selection
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
3: Option Card
0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q Q
Reference
Source
H6-01
Pulse train
input func-
tion selec-
tion
2: PID target value
0 to 2 0 No A A A A A
Pulse Input
Sel
H6-02
Pulse train
input scal-
ing
Set the number of pulses in hertz, taking
the reference to be 100%.
1000 to
32000
1440 Hz Yes A A A A A
PI Scaling
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0 0 0.0 0Hz
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0 0 0.0 0Hz
"0.00Hz"

Frequency Reference
6-3
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input),
or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only
When inputting a voltage for the master speed frequency reference, input the voltage to control circuit termi-
nal A1.
Fig 6.2 Voltage Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
When inputting a current for the master speed frequency reference, input the current to control circuit terminal
A2, input 0 V to terminal A1, set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2
(current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 (add to termi-
nal A1).
Fig 6.3 Current Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
Switch between 2 Step Speeds: Master/Auxiliary Speeds
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, connect the master speed frequency reference to
control circuit terminal A1 or A2 and connect the auxiliary speed frequency reference to terminal A3. The ref-
erence on terminal A1 or A2 will be used for the Inverter frequency reference when the multi-function input
allocated to multi-speed command 1 is OFF and the reference on terminal A3 will be used when it is ON.
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, set H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal
IMPORTANT
Turn ON pin 2 of DIP switch SW1 (toward I), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a current to terminal
A2. Turn OFF pin 2 of DIP switch SW1 (toward V), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a voltage to ter-
minal A2. Set H3-08 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used.
Inverter
A1
A2
A3
Master speed frequency
reference
(voltage input)
reference
(current input)
Auxiliary speed frequency
reference 1
AC Analog common
2 kΩ
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
Inverter
A1
A2
A3
reference
(voltage input)
reference
(current input)
Auxiliary speed frequency
reference 1
AC Analog common
+V
4 to 20-mA input
DIP switch
S1
IV
1
2
Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA

6-4
A3) to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference, 2nd step analog) and set on of the multi-function input terminals to
multi-step speed reference 1.
When inputting a current to terminal A2 for the master speed frequency reference, set H3-08 (Multi-function
analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2 (current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 (add to terminal A1).
Fig 6.4 Switching between Master and Auxiliary Frequencies
Setting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals
When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the 100% reference
pulse frequency to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Fig 6.5 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
Inverter
A1
A2
A3
Master speed
frequency reference
(voltage input)
Master speed
frequency reference
(current input)
Auxiliary speed
frequency reference 1
AC Analog common
2 kΩ
+V
2 kΩ
S5 Multi-step speed
reference 1
4 to 20 mA
Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
Pulse Input Specifications
Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V
Heavy duty 30 to 70%
Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz
Inverter
RP(Pulse train input termi-
nal)
AC (Analog common)
32 kHz max.
3.5 to 13.2 V
Pulse input

Frequency Reference
6-5
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-G7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps, using 16 frequency
references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step
references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch frequency references, set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the
multi-function contact inputs.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Combining Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (multi-function
contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The follow-
ing table shows the possible combinations.
* Terminal S8's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed references.
Terminal
Constant Num-
ber
Set Value Details
S5 H1-03 3
Multi-step speed reference 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)
S6 H1-04 4 Multi-step speed reference 2
S7 H1-05 5 Multi-step speed reference 3
S8 H1-06 6 Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed reference)
Speed
TerminalS5 TerminalS6 TerminalS7 TerminalS8
Selected FrequencyMulti-step
Speed Refer-
ence 1
Multi-step
Speed Refer-
ence 2
Multi-step
Speed Refer-
ence 3
Jog Fre-
quency Selec-
tion
1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
2 ON OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency 1
3 OFF ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 3 d1-03, auxiliary frequency 2
4 ON ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 4 d1-04
5 OFF OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 5 d1-05
6 ON OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 6 d1-06
7 OFF ON ON OFF Frequency reference 7 d1-07
8 ON ON ON OFF Frequency reference 8 d1-08
9 - - - ON* Jog frequency d1-17

6-6
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 to step 3, observe the following precautions.
• When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Frequency Ref-
erence 1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
• When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2, set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When
setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2, set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).
• When setting terminal A3's analog input to step 3, set H3-05 to 3 (auxiliary frequency reference 2). When
setting d1-03(Frequency Reference 3) to step 3, set H3-05 to 1F (Analog input not used).
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step
operation.
Fig 6.6 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
Fig 6.7 Multi-step speed reference/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
Inverter
S1 Forward/stop
S2 Reverse/stop
S3 External fault
S4 Fault reset
S5 Multi-step speed reference 1
SC Sequence common
S8 Jog frequency
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed
reference 1
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Multi-step speed
reference 3
Jog frequency
selection
Frequency refer-
ence 2: Auxiliary
speed frequency
Frequency
reference 3
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
reference 5
Frequency
reference 6
Jog frequency
Frequency
reference 8
Frequency
reference 7
Frequency
reference
Frequency ref-
erence 1: Mas-
ter speed
frequency

Run Command
6-7
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Constants
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
JOG, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward opera-
tion will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control cir-
cuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter
will stop.
Fig 6.8 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open-
loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b1-02
Operation
method
selection
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
input)
3: Option Card
Run Source
Inverter
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Sequence common

6-8
Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S12) is set to 0, termi-
nals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set func-
tions as a forward/reverse run command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the
input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Fig 6.9 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
Fig 6.10 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart
INFO
Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run
command self-holding in the Inverter.
Stop switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run command
(operates when ON)
Stop command
(stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common
50 ms min.
Run command
Forward/reverse
command
Motor speed
Can be either ON or OFF
OFF
(stopped)
OFF (forward) ON (reverse)
Stop Forward Reverse Stop Forward
Stop command

Stopping Methods
6-9
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent
There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is sent:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method. A DC braking stop and coasting to a stop with a
timer cannot be set for flux vector control.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open-
loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
b1-03
Stopping
method
selection
Select stopping method when stop com-
mand is sent.
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop (Stops
faster than coast to stop, no
regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
commands are disregarded during
deceleration.)
0 to 3* 0 No Q Q Q Q Q
Stopping
Method
b1-05
Operation
selection
for setting
E1-09 or
less
Used to set the method of operation
when the frequency reference input is
less than the minimum output frequency
(E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference (E1-09 not
effective).
1: STOP (Frequencies below E1-09 in
the coast to stop state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero speed (Frequencies below
E1-09 are zero)
0 to 3 0 No No No No A No
Zero-Speed
Oper
b2-01
Zero speed
level (DC
injection
braking
starting fre-
quency)
Used to set the frequency which starts
DC injection braking in units of Hz when
deceleration to stop is selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-09, E1-09
becomes the DC injection braking start-
ing frequency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz No A A A A A
DCInj Start
Freq
b2-02
DC injec-
tion brak-
ing current Sets the DC injection braking current as a
percentage of the Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50% No A A A No No
DCInj Cur-
rent

6-10
* The setting range is 0 or 1 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor deceler-
ates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time
1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-16 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.
Fig 6.11 Deceleration to Stop
b2-03
DC injec-
tion brak-
ing time at
start
Used to set the time to perform DC injec-
tion braking at start in units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it.
When the set value is 0, DC injection
braking at start is not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s No A A A A A
DCInj
Time@Start
b2-04
DC injec-
tion brak-
ing time at
stop
Used to set the time to perform DC injec-
tion braking at stop in units of 1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after the stop
command is input. When the set value is
0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not
performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s No A A A A A
DCInj
Time@Stop
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open-
loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
Decelerates to stop at
deceleration time
Output frequency
Run command
ON OFF
DC injection brake time
when stopping (b2-04)
DC injection brake

Stopping Methods
6-11
The operation after stopping depends on the setting of b1-05 when flux vector control is selected (A1-02 = 3).
Fig 6.12 Deceleration to Stop (for Flux Vector Control)
Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output
voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to the
machine and inertia including the load.
Fig 6.13 Coast to Stop
Injection brake
time at start
b2-03
Zero speed
control
b2-04Baseblock
b2-03
b2-04
b2-03 b2-04
b2-03 b2-04
Run command OFF ON OFF
Frequency reference
via analog input
0
E1-09
b1-05=0
(frequency reference)
Run command turns OFF
and zero speed control start
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
b1-05=1
(Coast)
b1-05=2
(Run on E1-09)
b1-05=3
(Zero speed)
Injection brake
time at start
Injection brake
time at start
Injection brake
time at start
Baseblock
Baseblock
Baseblock Baseblock
Baseblock
Baseblock
Baseblock
Zero speed
control
Zero speed control
Zero speed control
Frequency reference drops to less
than E1-09 and zero speed control
starts when motor speed drops to
b2-01.
Output frequency
Run command
ON OFF
Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted.

6-12
DC Braking Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 2, a wait is made for
the time set in L2-03 (Minimum Baseblock (BB) Time) and then the DC injection brake current set in b2-02 is
sent to the motor to apply a DC injection brake to stop the motor. The DC injection brake time is determined
by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the stop command is input.
Fig 6.14 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output
is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until
the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is input and
the deceleration time.
Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop with Timer
INFO
After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.
INFO
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Output frequency
Run command
ON OFF
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
DC injection brake
10% 100% (maximum output frequency)
Output frequency at
stop command input
b2-04
Output
frequency
Run command
ON ON ONOFF OFF
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T
100% (Maximum output frequency)Minimum output frequency
Output frequency at
stop command input
Operation wait time T
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)

Stopping Methods
6-13
Using the DC Injection Brake
Set constant b2-03 to apply the DC injection brake voltage to the motor while it is coasting to a stop, to stop
the motor and then restart it.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector control
with the current set in E2-03 (Motor no-load current).
Related Constants
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals
If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1- ) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can
apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake com-
mand has been set when the Inverter is being stopped. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector
control.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
Fig 6.16 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b2-02
DC injection
braking current
Sets the DC injection braking cur-
rent as a percentage of the
0 to
100
50% No A A A No No
DCInj Current
b2-03
DC injection
braking time at
start
Used to set the time to perform
DC injection braking at start in
units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and
restart it. When the set value is 0,
DC injection braking at start is not
performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s No A A A A A
DCInj
Time@Start
DC injection brake
(DC injection braking at
startup is used for flux
vector control.)
E1-09 b2-01
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake
(DC injection braking at
startup is used for flux
vector control.)
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the run command
and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will
resume.

6-14
Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 6 (DC injection brake current), you can change the DC
injection brake current level using the analog input.
At 10 V input (voltage) or 20 mA input (current), 100% of the Inverter rated current will be applied.
Fig 6.17 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1- ) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the decel-
eration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input ter-
minal (H1- ) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input
terminal (H1- ) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings
range is 0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C1-09
Emergency
stop time
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “Emergency
(fast) stop” is set to ON.
This function can be used a
stopped method when a fault has
been detected.
0.0 to
6000.0* 10.0 s No A A A A A
Fast Stop Time
DC injection brake voltage level
Inverter rated current

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
6-15
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. Deceleration
time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to reduce to 0%. The factory setting of the acceleration
time is C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.
Related Parameters
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C1-01
Acceleration
time 1
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 to the maximum
output frequency, in 1-second
units.
0.0 to
6000.0* 10.0 s
Yes Q Q Q Q Q
Accel Time 1
C1-02
Deceleration
time 1
Sets the deceleration time to
decelerate from the maximum
output frequency to 0, in 1-second
units.
Yes Q Q Q Q Q
Decel Time 1
C1-03
Acceleration
time 2
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” is set to ON.
Yes A A A A A
Accel Time 2
C1-04
Deceleration
time 2
Yes A A A A A
Decel Time 2
C1-05
Acceleration
time 3
No A A A A A
Accel Time 3
C1-06
Deceleration
time 3
No A A A A A
Decel Time 3
C1-07
Acceleration
time 4
time 1” and “accel/decel time 2”
are set to ON.
No A A A A A
Accel Time 4
C1-08
Deceleration
time 4
time 1” and “accel/decel time 2”
are set to ON.
No A A A A A
Decel Time 4
C1-10
Accel/decel
time setting
unit
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
0 or 1 1 No A A A A A
Acc/Dec Units

6-16
* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings
range is 0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. Constant C1-10 is set to 1 at the factory.
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Using the Inverter, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function
input terminals (H1- ) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/decel-
eration time selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combin-
ing the ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
C1-11
Accel/decel
time switch-
ing frequency
Sets the frequency for automatic
acceleration/deceleration switch-
ing.
Below set frequency: Accel/decel
time 4
Above set frequency: Accel/decel
time 1
The multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” or “accel/decel time
2” take priority.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A
Acc/Dec SW
Freq
C2-01
S-curve char-
acteristic time
at acceleration
start
All sections of the S-curve charac-
teristic time are set in seconds
units.
When the S-curve characteristic
time is set, the accel/decel times
will increase by only half of the S-
curve characteristic times at start
and end.
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s No A A A A A
SCrv Acc @
Start
C2-02
S-curve char-
acteristic time
at acceleration
end
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s No A A A A A
SCrv Acc @
End
C2-03
S-curve char-
acteristic time
at deceleration
start
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s No A A A A A
SCrv Dec @
Start
C2-04
S-curve char-
acteristic time
at deceleration
end
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s No A A A A A
SCrv Dec @
End
Set value Details
0 The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
1 The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Run command
Output frequency
Time
ON
OFF
C2-02 C2-03
C2-04C2-01

6-17
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the set frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Fig 6.18 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the
acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's input voltage.
The Inverter's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1-01 is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
Fig 6.19 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
Acceleration/Decelera-
tion Time Selection 1 Ter-
minal
tion Time Selection 2 Ter-
minal
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
OFF OFF C1-01 C1-02
ON OFF C1-03 C1-04
OFF ON C1-05 C1-06
ON ON C1-07 C1-08
Acceleration/
deceleration time
switching frequency
(C1-11)
C1-07 rate C1-01 rate C1-02 rate C1-08 rate
When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Output frequency
Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5)
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to
10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)

6-18
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and
stopping the machine.
Using the Inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start
time, deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time.
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Fig 6.20 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
INFO
Set the S-curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
C2-02
C2-01
C2-03 C2-04
C2-02
C2-01
C2-03
C2-04
Forward
Reverse
Output frequency

6-19
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)
The dwell function stores the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads. By temporarily storing
the output frequency, you can prevent the motor from stalling. When using the dwell function, you must select
a deceleration stop. Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0.
Related Parameters
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b6-01
Dwell fre-
quency at
start
The dwell function is used to output
frequency temporarily when driving a
motor with a heavy load.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A
Dwell Ref
@Start
b6-02
Dwell time
at start 0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s No A A A A A
Dwell
Time@Start
b6-03
Dwell fre-
quency at
stop 0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A
Dwell Ref
@Stop
b6-04
Dwell time
at stop 0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s No A A A A A
Dwell Time
@Stop
Run command
Output frequency
Time
ON
b6-03
OFF
b6-01
b6-04b6-02

6-20
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is placed
on the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L3-
02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3-02. With this
setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L3-01
Stall preven-
tion selection
during accel
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a heavy load, the motor
may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped
when L3-02 level is exceeded.
Acceleration starts again when
the current is returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a
basis, acceleration is
automatically adjusted. Set
acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0 to 2 1 No A A A No No
StallP Accel
Sel
L3-02
Stall preven-
tion level dur-
ing accel
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or
2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter rated
current.
Usually setting is not necessary. The
factory setting reduces the set val-
ues when the motor stalls.
0 to 200 150% No A A A No No
StallP Accel
Lvl
L3-03
Stall preven-
tion limit dur-
ing accel
Sets the lower limit for stall preven-
tion during acceleration, as a per-
centage of the Inverter rated current,
when operation is in the frequency
range above E1-06.
0 to 100 50% No A A A No No
StallP CHP
Lvl

6-21
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Fig 6.21 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, or if the motor is operated using the fac-
tory settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
L3-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being
reduced more than necessary.
• Set the constants as a percent taking the inverter rated voltage to be 100%.
Fig 6.22 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
Output current
Stall level during
acceleration
Time
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled
to prevent the motor stalling.
Stall prevention level during
acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Accelera-
tion)
L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during Ac-
celeration)
Output frequency
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)

6-22
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During
Deceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes the rate of deceleration more gentle to suppress
increases in DC bus voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during motor deceleration.
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the bus voltage, even if the decel-
eration time has been set to a considerably small value.
If L3-04 is set to 1 or 2, when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during decel-
eration, deceleration stops, and when deceleration falls below the level, is restarted. Using this operation,
deceleration time is automatically lengthened. If L3-04 is set to 1, deceleration time returns to the set value,
and if L3-04 is set to 2, deceleration is automatically adjusted to a faster deceleration time within the range of
the stall prevention level during deceleration.
Related Constants
* The setting range is 0 to 2 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L3-04
Stall preven-
tion selection
during decel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If
deceleration time is too short, a
main circuit overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main circuit
voltage exceeds the overvoltage
level. Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so that in
Inverter can decelerate in the
shortest possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
Unit)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit,
Braking Unit) is used, always set to
0 or 3.
0 to 3* 1 No Q Q Q Q Q
StallP Decel
Sel

6-23
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below.
Fig 6.23 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the Inverter capacity. Refer to the fol-
lowing table for details.
• When using the braking option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be sure to set
constant L3-04 to 0 or 3.
• To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3-04 is set to 0 with the braking option
enabled, set L3-04 to 3.
• The setting of L3-04 is ignored for flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2.
Inverter Capacity Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
200 V class 380
400 V class
E1-01 ≥ 400 V 760
E1-01 < 400 V 660
Deceleration time controlled to
prevent overvoltage
Deceleration time
(set value)
Time
Output frequency

6-24
Adjusting Frequency References
This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H3-01
Signal level
selection (ter-
minal A1)
0: 0 to ±10V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/
negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10V
Term A1 Signal
H3-02
Gain (terminal
A1) Sets the frequency when 10 V is
input, as a percentage of the maxi-
mum output frequency.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Yes A A A A A
Terminal A1
Gain
H3-03
Bias (terminal
A1) Sets the frequency when 0 V is
input, as a percentage of the maxi-
mum frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A
Terminal A1
Bias
H3-04
Signal level
selection (ter-
minal A3)
0: 0 to ±10V
negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10V
Term A3 Signal
H3-05
Multi-function
analog input
(terminal A3) Sets the function. 0 to 1F 2 No A A A A A
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
Gain (terminal
A3)
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 16 is 10V.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
0.0 to
1000.0
Terminal A3
Gain
H3-07
Bias (terminal
A3)
terminal 16 is 10V.
-100.0 to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A
Terminal A3
Bias
H3-08
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
signal level
selection
0: Limit negative frequency
settings for gain and bias
settings to 0.
1: Do not limit negative
frequency settings for gain
and bias settings to 0 (i.e.,
allow reverse operation).
Switch current and voltage input
using the switch on the control
panel.
Term A2 Signal

6-25
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants
The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using constants H3-02 and
H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform adjust-
ments using H3-10 and H3-11.
Adjustment can be made using H3-06 and H3-07 when multi-function analog input terminal A3 is used as a
frequency reference terminal.
Fig 6.24 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
H3-09
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
function selec-
tion
Select multi-function analog input
function for terminal A2.
0 to 1F 0 No A A A A A
Terminal A2
Sel
H3-10
Gain (terminal
A2)
terminal 14 is 10 V (20 mA).
for the function set for H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
Terminal A2
Gain
H3-11
Bias (terminal
A2)
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A
Terminal A2
Bias
H3-12
Analog input
filter time con-
stant
Sets primary delay filter time con-
stant in seconds for the two ana-
log input terminal (A1 and A2).
Effective for noise control etc.
0.00 to
2.00
0.03
s
No A A A A A
Filter Avg Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Frequency reference
Terminal A1, A3 input
Terminal A1 (A3)
input voltage
Frequency reference
Terminal A2 input
Terminal A2 input
voltage (current)
(H3-06)
(H3-07)

6-26
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using the analog input
terminal A2 or A3.
Fig 6.25 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the sum of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set
to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.
Setting Precautions
H3-05 cannot be set to 0.
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 or
A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Fig 6.26 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 or A3 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from
terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Frequency reference
H3-02
0 10 V
Terminal A1 input voltage
100%
50%
Frequency bias
terminal A2 or A3 input level

6-27
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
The jump frequency function operates the motor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic frequen-
cies in the machinery.
This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band.
During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Smooth operation
still used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed.
Related Constants
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
d3-01
Jump fre-
quency 1
Set the center values of the jump
frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by set-
ting the jump frequency to 0 Hz.
Always ensure that the following
applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency
range is prohibited but during
acceleration and deceleration,
speed changes smoothly without
jump.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A
Jump Freq 1
d3-02
Jump fre-
quency 2 0.0 Hz No A A A A A
Jump Freq 2
d3-03
Jump fre-
quency 3 0.0 Hz No A A A A A
Jump Freq 3
d3-04
Jump fre-
quency width
Sets the jump frequency band-
width in Hz.
The jump frequency will be the
jump frequency ± d3-04.
0.0 to
20.0
1.0 Hz No A A A A A
Jump Band-
width
Terminal A1 input voltage
Frequency reference
H3-02
10%
Bias
0 V 10 V

6-28
Fig 6.27 Jump Frequency
Setting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-func-
tion Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to A (jump frequency), you can change the jump fre-
quency using the terminal A2 input level.
Fig 6.28 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 > Analog input.
• When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
Output frequency
Jump frequency reference
Jump
frequency
width d3-04
Jump
frequency
3 (d3-03)
Jump
frequency
2 (d3-02)
Jump
frequency
1 (d3-01)
Frequency reference descending
Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
frequency
width d3-04
Jump frequency width d3-04
Jump frequency
0 V
(4 mA)
terminal A2 or A3 input level10 V
(20 mA)
Max. output frequency
E1-04

6-29
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs
The frequency reference can be adjusted when b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set
the pulse frequency in constant H6-02 to 100% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using
H6-03 and H6-04.
Related Constants
The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs.
Fig 6.29 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H6-01
Pulse train
input func-
tion selection
2: PID target value
Pulse Input
Sel
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling Set the number of pulses in hertz,
taking the reference to be 100%.
1000 to
32000
PI Scaling
H6-03
Pulse train
input gain Set the input gain level as a percent
when the pulse train set in H6-02 is
input.
0.0 to
1000.0
Pulse Input
Gain
H6-04
Pulse train
input bias Set the input bias when the pulse
train is 0.
-100.0 to
100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A
Pulse Input
Bias
H6-05
Pulse train
input filter
time
Set the pulse train input primary
delay filter time constant in sec-
onds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes A A A A A
PI Filter Time
RP
Cycle
measurement
Filter
H6-05
H6-01
Master speed
frequency
PID feedback
PID target value
=0
=2
=1
Scaling using H6-02
Gain and bias
Pulse
1
1+sT
0%
H6-04
H6-03
100%

6-30
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Func-
tion)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percent, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Fre-
quency) to be 100%.
Related Constants
Limiting Minimum Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multi-
step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
d2-01
Frequency ref-
erence upper
limit
Set the output frequency upper
limit as a percent, taking the max.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No A A A A A
Ref Upper
Limit
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
d2-02
Frequency ref-
erence lower
limit
Sets the output frequency lower
limit as a percentage of the maxi-
0.0 to
110.0
0.0% No A A A A A
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
Master speed
reference lower
limit
Set the master speed reference
lower limit as a percent, taking
the max. output frequency to be
100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0% No A A A A A
Ref1 Lower
Limit

Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
6-31
Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-
function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 9 (output frequency lower level), you can adjust the
frequency lower level using the terminal A2 input level.
Fig 6.30 Output Frequency Lower Level for Multi-function Analog Input
INFO
If constant d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set
value will become the frequency lower limit.
Output frequency lower level
0 V
(4 mA)
terminal A2 or A3 input level10 V
(20 mA)
E1-04

6-32
Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the amount of motor slip also grows large and the motor speed decreases. The slip
compensation function controls the motor at a constant speed, regardless of changes in load. When the motor
is operating at the rated load, constant E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) × the frequency in constant C3-01 is added to
the output frequency.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C3-01
Slip compensa-
tion gain
Used to improve speed accuracy
when operating with a load.
Adjust this constant at the follow-
ing times.
• When actual speed is low,
• When actual speed is high,
decrease the set value.
0.0 to
2.5
1.0* Yes A No A A A
Slip Comp Gain
C3-02
Slip compensa-
tion primary
delay time
Slip compensation primary delay
time is set in ms units.
Adjust this constant at the follow-
ing times.
• Reduce the setting when slip
compensation responsive is
slow.
• When speed is not stabilized,
increase the setting.
0 to
10000
200 ms
*
No A No A No No
Slip Comp
Time
C3-03
Slip compensa-
tion limit Sets the slip compensation limit
as a percentage of motor rated
slip.
0 to
250
200% No A No A No No
Slip Comp
Limit
C3-04
Slip compensa-
tion selection
during regener-
ation
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation dur-
ing regeneration function has
been activated, as regeneration
capacity increases momentarily, it
may be necessary to use a braking
option (braking resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit or Braking Unit.)
0 or 1 0 No A No A No No
Slip Comp
Regen
C3-05
Output voltage
limit operation
selection
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux will
be lowered automatically
when the output voltage
become saturated.)
0 or 1 0 No No No A A A
Output V limit

6-33
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain
You can switch the C3-01 constant settings as shown below by changing the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 0.0
• Open-loop vector control: 1.0
• Flux vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the rated slip set using the rated torque output status.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly.
You can calculate the motor rated slip from the values on the motor nameplate using the following for-
mula.
Amount of motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min−1
.) × No. of
motor poles / 120
Set the values for rated voltage, rated frequency, and no-load current in the motor unladen current. The
motor rated slip is set automatically in the vector control using autotuning.
2. In V/f control, set C3-01 to 1.0. Setting this constant to 0.0 disables slip compensation.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation
gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if
the speed is greater than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
For flux vector control, the slip compensation gain is used as the motor temperature compensation gain. When
the motor temperate increases, the motor’s internal constant increases, resulting in an increase in slip. If C3-01
is set, the amount of slip is adjusted as the temperature rises. Set C3-01 if the amount of torque varies with the
temperature when using torque control or a torque limit. The larger the value of C3-01, the larger the compen-
sation.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 2000 ms
• Open-loop vector control: 200 ms
Normally, there is no need to make these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set
value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit
Set the upper limit for the slip compensation amount as a percent, taking the motor rated slip amount as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation
gain, the motor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Increase the limit, and check the speed again.
Make the settings, however, to make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency
does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.

6-34
Fig 6.31 Slip Compensation Limit
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration
Set whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have to use the braking option
(braking resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, and Braking Unit) to momentarily increase the regenerative amount.
Selecting Output Voltage Limit Operation
If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled, the output current will
not change, but torque control accuracy will be lost. If torque control accuracy is required, change the settings
to enable the output voltage limit operation.
If the output voltage limit operation is enabled, motor magnetic flux current is controlled automatically, and
torque control accuracy is maintained to limit the output voltage references. Consequently, the output current
will increase by approximately 10% maximum (with rated load) compared with when the output voltage limit
operation is disabled, so check the Inverter current margin.
Setting Precautions
• If using the device at medium to low speed only, if the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than
the motor rated voltage, or if the torque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient, it is not necessary to
change the output voltage limit operation.
• If the power supply voltage is too low compared with the motor rated voltage, torque control accuracy may
be lost even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled.
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Opera-
tion (Torque Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased, and increases the output torque.
V/f control calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage (V), and
compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation
voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss × constant C4-01.
Vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque current by calculating the motor primary
current, and controlling each of the two separately.
Calculate the torque current as follows: Calculated torque reference × C4-01
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency

6-35
Related Constants
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain
Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment. Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using
open-loop vector control.
Adjust the torque compensation gain using V/f control in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method settings:
• V/f control without PG: 200 ms
• V/f control with PG: 200 ms
• Open-loop vector control: 20 ms
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C4-01
Torque com-
pensation gain
Sets torque compensation gain as
a ratio.
Adjust in the following circum-
stances:
• When the cable is long;
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter capac-
ity (Max. applicable motor
capacity), increase the set val-
ues.
• When the motor is oscillating,
decrease the set values.
Adjust the output current range at
minimum speed rotation so that it
does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current.
Do not alter the torque compensa-
tion gain from its default (1.00)
when using the open-loop vector
control method.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00 Yes A A A No No
Torq Comp
Gain
C4-02
Torque com-
pensation pri-
mary delay
time constant
The torque compensation delay
time is set in ms units.
Adjust in the following circum-
stances:
• When the motor is oscillating,
increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the
motor is low, decrease the set
values.
0 to
10000
20 ms
*
No A A A No No
Torq Comp
Time

6-36
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust the constant as shown below.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This func-
tion can be used in V/f without PG and V/f with PG.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
N1-01
Hunting-pre-
vention func-
tion selection
0: Hunting-prevention function
disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function
enabled
The hunting-prevention function
suppresses hunting when the
motor is operating with a light
load.
This function is enabled in V/f
control method only.
If high response is to be given pri-
ority over vibration suppression,
disable the hunting-prevention
function.
0 or 1 1 No A A No No No
Hunt Prev
Select
N1-02
Hunting-pre-
vention gain
Set the hunting-prevention gain
multiplication factor.
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light
load, increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce the
setting.
If the setting is too large, the volt-
age will be too suppressed and the
motor may stall.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00 No A A No No No
Hunt Prev Gain

6-37
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function measures the stability of the speed when a load is sud-
denly applied, by calculating the amount of fluctuation of the torque current feedback value, and compensat-
ing the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
N2-01
Speed feed-
back detection
control (AFR)
gain
Set the internal speed feedback
detection control gain using the
multiplication function.
make this setting.
Adjust this constant as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the
set value.
• If response is low, decrease the
set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00 No No No A No No
AFR Gain
N2-02
Speed feed-
back detection
control (AFR)
time constant
Set the time constant to decide the
rate of change in the speed feed-
back detection control.
0 to
2000
50 ms No No No A No No
AFR Time

6-38
Machine Protection
This section explains functions for protecting the machine.
Reducing Noise and Leakage Current
The switching frequency of the Inverter’s output transistor can be changed to reduce carrier noise and leakage
current from the motor.
Related Constants
* 1. The setting range depends on the control method of the Inverter.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 3. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 4. This constant can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
* 5. Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi-function input.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C6-02
Carrier fre-
quency
selection
Select F to enable detailed settings using con-
stants C6-03 to C6-05.
1 to F
6
*2
No Q Q Q A No *5
CarrierFreq
Sel
C6-03
Carrier
frequency
upper limit
Set the carrier frequency upper limit and
lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
With the vector control method, the upper
limit of the carrier frequency is fixed in C6-
03.
K is a coefficient that depends on the setting
of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
2.0 to
15.0
*3 *4
15.0
kHz
*2
No A A A A No
CarrierFreq
Max
C6-04
Carrier
frequency
lower limit
0.4 to
15.0
*3 *4
15.0
kHz
*2
No A A No No No
CarrierFreq
Min
C6-05
Carrier fre-
quency pro-
portional
gain 00 to
99
*4
00 No A A No No No
CarrierFreq
Gain
C6-11
Carrier fre-
quency
selection for
open-loop
vector con-
trol 2
Select the carrier frequency when open-loop
vector control 2 is used.
1: 2 kHz
2: 4 kHz
3: 6 kHz
4: 8 kHz
1 to 4 4 No
No
*5
No
*5
No*5 No
*5
Q
Carrier Freq
Sel
Carrier frequency
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
(Max. output frequency)
Output
frequency

Machine Protection
6-39
Control Mode and Carrier Frequency Settings
Carrier frequency settings are restricted as listed in the following table according to the control mode selec-
tion.
* The upper limit of the carrier frequency depends on the Inverter capacity.
Carrier Frequency Setting Precautions
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions.
• Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.)
If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency according to the output
frequency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04
(Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
Control Mode Carrier Frequency
V/f control with or without a PG
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: Any setting*
Detailed settings are available in C6-03, C6-04, and C6-05.
Open-loop vector control 1 or
Flux vector control
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: Any setting*
The upper limit of the carrier frequency is determined by C6-03.
Open-loop vector control 2
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 4.0 kHz
3: 6.0 kHz
4: 8.0 kHz
Wiring Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency
selection) setting
1 to 6 (15 kHz) 1 to 4 (10 kHz) 1 to 2 (5 kHz)

6-40
Fig 6.32
• With vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed to the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if user-
set or by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
• If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Constant setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04.
• Depending on the carrier frequency setting, the Inverter’s overload level may be reduced. Even when the
overload current falls to below 150%, OL2 (Inverter overload) will be detected. The Inverter overload cur-
rent reduction level is shown below.
Fig 6.33 Overload Reduction Level for V/f Control, V/f Control with PG, Open-loop Vector Control 1,
and Flux Vector Control
Fig 6.34 Overload Reduction Level for Open-loop Vector Control 2
C6-03
C6-04
Output frequency
Output frequency × C6-05
× K*
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
Carrier Frequency
K is the coefficient determined by the set
value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K=1
*
100%
15kHz0
50%
80%
200V級22kW
10kHz
200 V, 22 kW
Carrier frequency
Overload reduction level
100%
8kHz0
50%
4kHz
87%
200 V, 30 to 75 kW
Overload reduction level
Carrier frequency

Machine Protection
6-41
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
The motor torque limit function is enabled only with open-loop torque control.
In the open-loop vector control method, the user-set value is applied to the torque limit by calculating inter-
nally the torque output by the motor. Enable this function if you do not want a torque above a specified
amount to be applied to the load, or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified amount to occur.
Related Constants
Multi-function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Note The forward torque limit is the limit value when the analog input signal generates forward torque. This torque limit setting is enabled even when the
analog input signal generates forward torque while the motor is operating (regeneration).
Setting the Torque Limit in Constants
Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.
Con-
stant
Number
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L7-01
Forward
drive torque
limit
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage
of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
0 to 300 200% No No No A A A
Torq Limit
Fwd
L7-02
Reverse
drive torque
limit 0 to 300 200% No No No A A A
Torq Limit
Rev
L7-03
Forward
regenerative
torque limit 0 to 300 200% No No No A A A
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
L7-04
Reverse
regenerative
torque limit 0 to 300 200% No No No A A A
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
Set-
ting
Value
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
10 Positive torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes Yes
11 Negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes Yes
12 Regenerative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes Yes
15 Positive/negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes Yes Yes
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
Negative torque
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative
state
Regenerative
state
Forward

6-42
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input
You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi-function analog
input terminals A2 and A3.
The analog input terminal signal level is factory-set as follows:
Multi-function analog input terminal A2: 4 to 20 mA
Multi-function analog input terminal A3: 0 to 10
The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits.
Fig 6.35 Torque Limit by Analog Input
Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input
The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using constants and torque limit
using an analog input.
Fig 6.36 Torque Limit Using Constants and an Analog Input
Negative
Reverse operation
Regenerative torque limit
Forward torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Positive/negative torque limits
No. of motor rotations
Forward operation
Negative torque limit
Positive
Output torque
Terminal
A2 or A3
(set value = 10)
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11)
(set value = 12)
Positive/negative torque limit
(set value = 15)
Positive forward drive
torque
Reverse positive regenerative torque
Forward negative regenerative torque
Reverse
drive
reverse
torque
Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Constants
(L7-01)
Reverse torque limit
(L7-02)
Forward regenerative torque
limit (L7-03)
Reverse regenerative torque
limit (L7-04)
175% of Inverter rated current
Reverse torque limit
Forward regenerative
torque limit
Reverse regenerative
torque limit

Machine Protection
6-43
Setting Precautions
• When the torque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled
because torque control is given priority.
• When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this
may result in the motor falling or slipping.
• Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 10 V or 20 mA input) of 100% of the
motor rated torque. To make the torque limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input 150% of the rated torque,
set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using
H3-10 and for multi-function analog input terminal A3 using H3-06.
• The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at the output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is less
than 10 Hz, accuracy is lowered.
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during V/f control. If the Inverter output current continues to
exceed the setting in constant L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or
disable deceleration time using constant L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C1-02 (Acceleration time 1) or
C1-04 (Acceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 - 2% (Inverter Rated Output Current), the motor
will accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L3-05
Stall preven-
tion selection
during run-
ning
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a
heavy load, the motor may stall.)
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C1-02.)
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C1-04.)
0 to 2 1 No A A No No No
StallP Run
Sel
L3-06
Stall preven-
tion level dur-
ing running
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the Inverter
rated current.
The factory setting reduces the set
values when the motor stalls.
30 to
200
160% No A A No No No
StallP Run
Level

6-44
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 8 (stall prevention level during run), you can change the stall
level during operation by setting H3-10 (Gain (Terminal A2)) and H3-11 (Bias (Terminal A2)) or H3-06 (Gain
(Terminal A3)) and H3-07 (Bias (Terminal A3).
The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input
level or the set value in constant L3-06, whichever is the smaller.
Fig 6.37 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque),
you can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, or P4-C4.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/
NC) in one of the following constants: H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, P2-
PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (Inverter rated output current 100%) in V/f
control, and the motor torque (motor rated torque 100%) in vector control.
INFO
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory set-
tings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
Stall prevention level during operation
terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA)(8.8 mA) (20 mA)

Machine Protection
6-45
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L6-01
Torque detec-
tion selection
1
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with
speed agreement; operation
(warning).
continuously during operation;
3: Overtorque detection only with
speed agreement; output stopped
operation).
output stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
5: Undertorque detection only with
speed agreement; operation
(warning).
7: Undertorque detection only with
speed agreement; output stopped
operation).
output stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
Torq Det 1
Sel
L6-02
Torque detec-
tion level 1
Open-loop vector control: Motor
rated torque is set as 100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is
set as 100%.
0 to 300 150% No A A A A A
Torq Det 1
Lvl
L6-03
Torque detec-
tion time 1 Sets the overtorque/undertorque
detection time in 1-second units.
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s No A A A A A
Torq Det 1
Time
L6-04
Torque detec-
tion selection
2
multi-function contact output when
overtorque detection 1 NO or over-
torque detection 1 NC is selected.
multi-function contact output when
overtorque detection 2 NO or over-
torque detection 2 NC is selected.
Torq Det 2
Sel
L6-05
Torque detec-
tion level 2 0 to
300
150% No A A A A A
Torq Det 2
Lvl
L6-06
Torque detec-
tion time 2 0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s No A A A A A
Torq Det 2
Time

6-46
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-05)
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and LCD Indications
The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is
detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detec-
tion at ON)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
18 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
19 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Set
Value
Function
LCD Indications
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 1
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 2
0 Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled. - -
1
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
2
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
after overtorque (warning).
OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
3
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detec-
tion (protected operation).
OL3 lit OL4 lit
4
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
OL3 lit OL4 lit
5
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
6
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
after overtorque (warning).
UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
7
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon
UL3 lit UL4 lit
8
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
UL3 lit UL4 lit

Machine Protection
6-47
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection
• Undertorque Detection
* *
L6-02 or L6-05
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
Overtorque detection 1 NO
or overtorque detection 2 NO
ON ON
* Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque).
Motor current (output torque)
*
ON ON
Motor current (output torque)
Undertorque detection 1 NO
or Undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-03
or
L6-06
L6-03
or
L6-06
* The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque)
L6-02 or L6-05

6-48
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Ana-
log Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-
function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 7 (overtorque/undertorque detection level), you can
change the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
If you change the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only over-
torque/undertorque detection level 1 will be enabled.
The following diagram shows the overtorque/undertorque detection level using an analog input.
Fig 6.38 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Set-
ting
Value
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
7
Overtorque/undertorque detection
level
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Detection level
terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)

Machine Protection
6-49
Motor Overload Protection
You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
Related Constants
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. The settings range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
E2-01
Motor rated
current
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for motor protec-
tion, torque limits and torque con-
trol.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No Q Q Q Q Q
Motor Rated
FLA
E4-01
Motor 2 rated
current
units.
trol.
during autotuning.
0.32
to 6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No A A A A A
Motor Rated
FLA
L1-01
Motor protec-
tion selection
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled at
electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
Inverter power supply is turned
off, the thermal value is reset, so
even if this constant is set to 1,
protection may not be effective.
When several motors are con-
nected to one Inverter, set to 0 and
ensure that each motor is installed
with a protection device.
MOL Fault
Select
L1-02
Motor protec-
tion time con-
stant
Sets the electric thermal detection
time in seconds units.
The factory setting is 150% over-
load for one minute.
When the motor's overload resis-
tance is known, also set the over-
load resistance protection time for
when the motor is hot started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min No A A A A A
MOL Time
Const

6-50
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-05)
Setting Motor Rated Current
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2).
This set value is the electronic thermal base current.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities differ according to the speed control range. Consequently, you must
select the electronic thermal protection characteristics to match the applicable motor's tolerance load charac-
teristics.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
1F
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection
level)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
1
General-purpose
motor (standard
motor)
Use this motor for
operations using a
commercial power
supply. This motor
construction yields
best cooling effect
when operating at 50/
60 Hz.
When operating continu-
ously at 50/60 Hz or less,
motor overload detection
(OL1) is detected. The
Inverter outputs the error
contact, and the motor
coasts to a stop.
2
Inverter motor
(constant torque)
(1:10)
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
when operating at
low speeds (approx.
6 Hz).
Operates continuously at 6
to 50/60 Hz.
Short time 60 s.
Torque(%)
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
3.7 kW max.
5.5 to 15 kW
18.5 kW min.
80% ED or Frame number Max.
30 min. speed of 200 LJ min.
50% ED or 30 min.
Continuous
Frame
number
Max.
speed of
200 LJ
min.
Frame number Max.
speed of 160 MJ to 160 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)
Short time 60
Torque(%)
= 100% speed
Continuous
Frame number Max.
speed of 200 LJ min.
Frame number Max. speed
of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)

Machine Protection
6-51
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot
start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Fig 6.39 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set constant L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor,
install a thermal relay in the motor power cable, and perform overload protection on each motor.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be pro-
tected even if this constant has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
• To detect overloads in good time, set the set value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4
(fre-
quency). Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below
the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.
3
Vector motor
(1:100)
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
when operating at
extremely low speeds
(approx. 0.6 Hz).
Operates continuously at
0.6 to 60 Hz.
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
Short time 60 s.
Torque(%)
= 100% speed
Continuous
Frame number
Max. speed of
200 LJ min.
Frame number Max.
speed of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%

6-52
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to
H2-05 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to 1F
(motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value
reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC
(Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L1-03
Alarm opera-
tion selection
during motor
overheating
Set H3-09 to E and select the opera-
tion when the input motor tempera-
ture (thermistor) input exceeds the
alarm detection level (1.17 V).
1: Coast to stop
3: Continue operation (H3 on the
Operator flashes).
MOL Thm
Input
L1-04
Motor over-
heating oper-
ation
selection
Set H3-09 to E and select the opera-
tion when the motor temperature
(thermistor) input exceeds the oper-
ation detection level (2.34 V).
1: Coast to stop
MOL Filter
Time
L1-05
Motor tem-
perature input
filter time
constant
Set H3-09 to E and set the primary
delay time constant for motor tem-
perature (thermistor) inputs in sec-
onds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s No A A A A A
MOL Filter
Time

Machine Protection
6-53
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Fig 6.40 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
Operation during Motor Overheating
Set the operation if the motor overheats in constants L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter
time constant in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital
Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature input), you can detect alarm OH3 or
OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the motor. The terminal connections
are shown in the following diagram.
Fig 6.41 Mutual Connections During Motor Overheating Protection
Error Code Details
OH3 Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4 Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04.
Tr: Temperature threshold value
Tr+5Tr
550
1330
Resistance (ohms)
Class F
150°C
Class H
180°C
Temperature
Inverter
Multi-function
contact input
Branch resistance
18 kΩ
PTC thermistor
Multi-function
contact output
Multi-function
PHC output
Fault contact
output
P3
C3
C4
P4

6-54
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction
If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted even if it is input.
Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b1-04
Prohibition of
reverse opera-
tion
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
Reverse Oper

Continuing Operation
6-55
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation even if an
error occurs.
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored
Even if a temporary power loss occurs, you can restart the Inverter automatically after power is restored to
continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is restored, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, when power is restored within the time set in L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If the time set
in L2-02 is exceeded, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, when the main power supply is restored while the control power supply (i.e., power supply
to the control panel) is backed up, the Inverter will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervolt-
age) will not be detected.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L2-01
Momentary
power loss
detection
0: Disabled (main circuit
undervoltage (UV) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the
power returns within the time
for L2-02. When L2-02 is
exceeded, main circuit
undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating.
(Restarts when power returns
during control operations. Does
not detect main circuit
undervoltage.)
PwrL Selec-
tion
L2-02
Momentary
power loss
ridethru time
Ridethrough time, when Momen-
tary Power Loss Selection (L2-01)
is set to 1, in units of seconds.
0 to 25.5
0.1 s
*
No A A A A A
PwrL Ride-
thru t
L2-03
Min. base-
block time
Sets the Inverter's minimum base-
block time in units of one second,
when the Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7
times the motor secondary circuit
time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage
occurs when starting a speed search
or DC injection braking, increase
the set values.
0.1 to
5.0
0.2 s
*1
No A A A A A
PwrL Base-
block t
L2-04
Voltage
recovery time
Sets the time required to return the
Inverter output voltage to normal
voltage at the completion of a speed
search, in units of one second.
Sets the time required to recover
from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
*1
No A A A A A
PwrL V/F
Ramp t

6-56
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
Setting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that run commands from the
control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss
exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating using inertia, and then starts
smoothly from that speed. When restoring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function
switches connection from the commercial power supply, and then restarts the fan that is rotating using inertia.
Related Constants
L2-05
Undervolt-
age detection
level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage
(UV) detection level (main circuit
DC voltage) in V units.
Insert an AC reactor in the Inverter
input side to lower the main circuit
undervoltage detection level.
150 to
210
*2
190 V
*2
No A A A A A
PUV Det
Level
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b3-01
Speed search
selection (cur-
rent detection
or speed cal-
culation)
Enables/disables the speed search
function for the run command and
sets the speed search method.
0:Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified frequency
(motor direction is also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from
the frequency when power was
momentarily lost and the
maximum frequency, and the
speed is detected at the search
current level.
0 to 3 2*1 No A A A No A
SpdSrch at
Start
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-57
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector control 1 factory settings are given.)
b3-02
Speed search
operating cur-
rent (current
detection)
Sets the speed search operation cur-
rent as a percentage, taking the
Inverter rated current as 100%.
Not usually necessary to set. When
restarting is not possible with the
factory settings, reduce the value.
0 to
200
100%*1 No A No A No A
SpdSrch Cur-
rent
b3-03
Speed search
deceleration
time (current
detection)
Sets the output frequency decelera-
tion time during speed search in 1-
second units.
Set the time for deceleration from
the maximum output frequency to
the minimum output frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s No A No A No No
SpdSrch Dec
Time
b3-05
Speed search
wait time
(current detec-
tion or speed
calculation)
Sets the contactor operating delay
time when there is a contactor on
the output side of the Inverter.
When a speed search is performed
after recovering from a momentary
power loss, the search operation is
delayed by the time set here.
0.0 to
20.0 0.2 s No A A A A A
Search Delay
L2-03
Min. base-
block time
Sets the Inverter's minimum base-
block time in units of one second,
when the Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7
times the motor secondary circuit
time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvolt-
age occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
0.1 to
5.0
0.5 s
*2
No A A A A A
PwrL Base-
block t
L2-04
Voltage recov-
ery time
Sets the time required to return the
Inverter output voltage to normal
voltage at the completion of a speed
search, in units of one second.
Sets the time required to recover
from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
*2
No A A A A A
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
61 External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes
62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-58
Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG, the Unit will start from the fre-
quency detected by PG.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period
when the run command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum Base-
block Time (L2-03).
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search
Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time
by making the setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed
search.
• Constant b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When
the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the motor acceler-
ates or decelerates to the set frequency. If the motor cannot restart, lower the set value.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen
the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
• When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autotuning for only line-to-line
resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
• When using open-loop vector control, always perform rotational autotuning before using speed searches
based on estimated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance again.
IMPORTANT
The motor will not operate when stationary autotuning or stationary autotuning only for line-to-line
resistance is performed.

6-59
Speed Search Selection
Set whether to enable or disable speed search at startup, and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or
current detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the run command, set b3-01 to
1 or 3.
Estimated Speed Search
The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals us shown
below.
Fig 6.42 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)
Search Name Estimated Speed Current Detection
Search Method
Estimates the motor speed when the search
starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the
estimated speed to the set frequency. You can
also search including direction of motor rota-
tion.
Starts speed search from the frequency when
the temporary power loss was detected, or from
the highest frequency, and performs speed
detection at the current level during the search.
External Speed Search
Command
External search command 1 and external
search command 2 become the same operation,
estimating the motor speed and starting the
search from the estimated speed.
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output
frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency refer-
ence set before the search command.
Application Precau-
tions
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two
or more frames smaller than the Inverter capac-
ity, and high-speed motors (130 Hz min.)
In control method without PG, the motor may
accelerate suddenly with light loads.
OFF ON
b3-02
1.0 s
Run command
Output frequency
Output current
Start using
speed detected
Set frequency
reference
* Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) × 0.7*
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short time,
the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.

6-60
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
Fig 6.43 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
Fig 6.44 Speed Search After Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)
Current Detection Speed Search
The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below.
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
AC power supply
Output frequency
Output current
OFFON Start using
speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1
10 ms
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before the baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
*2
AC power supply
Output frequency
Output current
OFFON Start using speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
10 ms
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)

6-61
Fig 6.45 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time
Fig 6.46 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time
Fig 6.47 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)
Run command
Output frequency
Output current
OFF ON
b3-02
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
(L2-03)
Maximum output
frequency or
set frequency
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).*
AC power supply
Output frequency
Output current
OFFON Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
reference
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
Deceleration
time set in b3-03
b3-02
speed search operating current
*2
*1
AC power supply
Output frequency
Output current
OFFON Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
reference
(L2-03)
Deceleration speed set in b3-03
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Speed search wait time (b3-05)

6-62
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the frequency refer-
ence before loss when the frequency reference using an analog input is reduced 90% or more in 400 ms.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function
contact output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to C (frequency ref-
erence lost).
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L4-05
Operation
when fre-
quency refer-
ence is
missing
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed
continues. (At 80% of speed
before the frequency reference
was lost)
Frequency reference is lost: Fre-
quency reference dropped over 90%
in 400 ms.
Ref Loss Sel

6-63
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors. If an error not listed below occurs, the protec-
tion function will operate and the auto restart function will not.
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2,
M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Constants
Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed, and the error has been verified, and an fault reset
has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
• Do not use the auto restart function with variable loads.
• OC (Overcurrent) • RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• GF (Ground fault) • RR (Braking transistor error)
• PUF (Fuse blown) • OL1 (Motor overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage) • OL2 (Inverter overload)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)* • OH1 (Motor overheat)
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault) • OL3 (Overtorque)
• LF (Output phase failure) • OL4 (Overtorque)
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L5-01
Number of
auto restart
attempts
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault
and conducts a speed search from
the run frequency.
Num of
Restarts
L5-02
Auto restart
operation
selection
Sets whether a fault contact output
is activated during fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not
activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
Restart Sel

6-64
Inverter Protection
This section explains the functions for protecting the Inverter and the braking resistor.
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors
Perform overheating protection on Inverter-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resistor overheat-
ing) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Related Constants
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-05)
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L8-01
Protect selec-
tion for internal
DB resistor
(Type ERF)
0: Disabled (no overheating
protection)
1: Enabled (overheating
protection)
DB Resistor
Prot
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
INFO
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) being detected are that the deceleration
time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration
time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity.

Inverter Protection
6-65
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels
The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor, and protects the Inverter from
overheating. You can receive Inverter overheating pre-alarms in units of 10°C.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the Inverter as error protection, and
continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fins overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.
Related Constants
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L8-02
Overheat pre-
alarm level
Sets the detection temperature for
the Inverter overheat detection
pre-alarm in °C.
The pre-alarm detects when the
cooling fin temperature reaches
the set value.
50 to
130
95 °C* No A A A A A
OH Pre-Alarm
Lvl
L8-03
Operation
selection after
overheat pre-
alarm
Sets the operation for when the
Inverter overheat pre-alarm goes
ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in
deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1-
09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor
display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0
to 2 and a minor fault will be
given in setting 3.
OH Pre-Alarm
Sel

6-66
Input Terminal Functions
This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the
multi-function contact input terminals (S3 to S12).
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control
Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H1-01 to
H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote
selection).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b1-01
Reference
selection
method.
0: Digital Operator
input)
3: Option Card
Reference
Source
b1-02
Operation
method selec-
tion
method.
0: Digital Operator
(sequence input)
3: Option Card
Run Source
INFO
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.

6-67
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input
terminal S3 to S12 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF opera-
tion, and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from frequency references from the
previous baseblock command input.
Time Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.
Fig 6.48 Baseblock Commands
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
IMPORTANT
If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during oper-
ation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Input Cleared
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Search from stored frequency reference
Coast to a stop

6-68
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold)
The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration, stores the output fre-
quency at that point in time, and then continues operation.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection)
to A (acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned
ON and to store the output frequency at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the
terminal is turned OFF.
If d4-01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the output frequency is
still stored even after the power supply is turned OFF.
Related Constants
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Fig 6.49 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
d4-01
Frequency ref-
erence hold
function selec-
tion
Sets whether or not frequencies
on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is turned
on again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is turned
on again starts at the previous
hold frequency.)
This function is available when
the multi-function inputs “accel/
decel Ramp Hold” or “up/down”
commands are set.
MOP Ref
Memory
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold Hold

6-69
• When d4-01 is set to 1, the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. If
performing operations using this frequency after the Inverter has also been turned OFF, input the run com-
mand with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON.
• When d4-01 is set to 0 and a run command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is
turned ON, the output frequency will be set to zero.
• If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during posi-
tioning, deceleration may be canceled.
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/
DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12
function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that
the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair.
The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure to set b1-02 (Run command
selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Constants
Precautions
When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S12 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function
input selection) will occur:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
d2-01
Frequency ref-
erence upper
limit
Set the output frequency upper
limit as a percent, taking the max.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No A A A A A
Ref Upper
Limit
d2-02
Frequency ref-
erence lower
limit
Sets the output frequency lower
limit as a percentage of the maxi-
0.0 to
110.0
0.0% No A A A A A
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
Master speed
reference lower
limit
Set the master speed reference
lower limit as a percent, taking
the max. output frequency to be
100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0% No A A A A A
Ref1 Lower
Limit

6-70
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower
limits set in constants d2-01 to d2-03. Here, frequency references from analog frequency reference termi-
nal A1 becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference
from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either constant d2-02 or d2-03, the larger
lower limit will become the frequency reference lower limit.
• If inputting the run command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the
frequency reference lower limit.
• When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference held using
the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is
turned ON and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been
stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while
the run command is ON.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input
terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Fig 6.50 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
Constant Name Set Value
H1-01 Multi-function input (terminal S3) 10
H1-02 Multi-function input (terminal S4) 11
Inverter
0 to 10 V analog
signal
Forward
operation/Stop
Reverse
operation/Stop
Up command
Down command
Sequence
common
Frequency
reference lower limit

6-71
Fig 6.51 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit Same
frequency
Lower limit
Forward operation/stop
UP command
DOWN command
Frequency
matching signal*
Reference
frequency reset
Power supply
* The frequency matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/
decelerating while the run command is ON.

6-72
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog Refer-
ences (+/- Speed)
The +/- speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4-02 (+/-
Speed Limit) using two contact signal inputs.
To use this function, set One of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to
S12 function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command).
Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease com-
mand can be used as a pair.
Related Constants
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference
The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown
below.
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference is
from an analog input.
• When the analog frequency reference value - d4-02 < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
• If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S12, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected)
will occur.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
d4-02
+ - Speed limits Set the frequency to be add to or
subtracted from the analog fre-
quency reference as a percent,
taking the maximum output fre-
quency to be 100%.
Enabled when the increase (+)
speed command or decrease (-)
speed command is set for a multi-
function input.
0 to 100 10% No A A A A ATrim Control
Lvl
Frequency Reference
Set Frequency
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Frequency
Reference
- d4-02
Set Frequency Command
Trim Control Increase
Command Terminal
ON OFF ON OFF
Trim Control Decrease
Command Terminal
OFF ON ON OFF

6-73
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the
terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.
Fig 6.52 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precau-
tions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same
time. If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selec-
tion) will occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
• UP/DOWN command
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency references, be sure to store references of 100 ms mini-
mum. If the reference time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Con-
trol Circuit Terminals
You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection)
to 2 (Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when
the Inverter is stopped.
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Frequency reference
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.

6-74
Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals, set the
following constants.
• Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
• Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs])
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selec-
tion) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/
OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the run command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12
function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
Terminal Status Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
OFF
Inverter
(Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input termi-
nal.)
ON
Communications Option Card
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
d1-17
Jog frequency
reference
The frequency reference when the
jog frequency reference selec-
tion, FJOG command, or RJOG
command is ON.
0 to
400.00
6.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q Q Q
Jog Reference
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

6-75
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the
Inverter (External Fault Function)
The external fault function performs the error contact output, and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter
peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External fault [input
terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external fault signal. For
example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-10 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External fault detection method
• Operation during external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-
.
Note 1. Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External fault when ON; NC contact: External fault when
OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
Set
Value
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Operation During Error Detection
NO Con-
tact
NC Con-
tact
Constant
Detection
Detection
During
Operation
Deceler-
ate to Stop
(Error)
Coast to
Stop
(Error)
Emer-
gencyStop
(Error)
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
20 Yes Yes Yes
21 Yes Yes Yes
22 Yes Yes Yes
23 Yes Yes Yes
24 Yes Yes Yes
25 Yes Yes Yes
26 Yes Yes Yes
27 Yes Yes Yes
28 Yes Yes Yes
29 Yes Yes Yes
2A Yes Yes Yes
2B Yes Yes Yes
2C Yes Yes Yes
2D Yes Yes Yes
2E Yes Yes Yes
2F Yes Yes Yes

6-76
Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants.
Using the Analog Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor constants.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H4-01
Monitor
selection (ter-
minal FM)
Sets the number of the monitor item
to be output (U1- ) from termi-
nal FM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot
be set. 29 to 31 and 41 are not used.
Terminal FM
Sel
H4-02
Gain (termi-
nal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog out-
put 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item out-
put will be output in multiples of
10 V.
The maximum output from the ter-
minal is 10 V. A meter calibration
function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
(0 to
1000.0)
1.00
(100%)
Yes Q Q Q Q Q
Terminal FM
Gain
H4-03
Bias (termi-
nal FM)
put 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down
parallel movement as a percentage
of 10 V.
-10.0 to
+10.0
(-100.0
to 100.0)
0.0%
(0.0%)
Yes A A A A A
Terminal FM
Bias
H4-04
Monitor
selection (ter-
minal AM)
Sets the number of the monitor item
to be output (U1- ) from termi-
nal AM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot
Terminal AM
Sel
H4-05
Gain (termi-
nal AM)
Set the number of multiples of 10 V
to be output as the 100% output for
the monitor items. The maximum
output from the terminal is 10 V. A
meter calibration function is avail-
able.
0.00 to
2.50
(0 to
1000.0)
0.50
(200%)
Yes Q Q Q Q Q
Terminal AM
Gain
H4-06
Bias (termi-
nal AM)
put 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down
parallel movement as a percentage
of 10 V.
-10.0 to
+10.0
(0 to
1000.0)
0.0%
(0.0%)
Yes A A A A A
Terminal AM
Bias

Monitor Constants
6-77
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
The digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output
terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the values for the part of U1-
(status monitor).
Alternatively, you can output monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from analog output option terminal
channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor cards AO-08 and AO-12. Refer to the table of constants, and set the val-
ues.
H4-07
Analog out-
put 1 signal
level selec-
tion
multi-function output 1 (terminal
FM)
AO Level
Select1
F4-01
Channel 1
monitor
selection
Effective when the Analog Monitor
Card is used.
Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor item
to be output. (U1- )
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for output-
ting monitor items.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot
When the AO-12 Analog Monitor
Card is used, outputs of ± 10 V are
possible. To output ± 10 V, set F4-
07 or F4-08 to 1. When the AO-08
Analog Monitor Card is used, only
outputs of 0 to +10 V are possible.
A meter calibration function is
available.
AO Ch1
Select
F4-02
Channel 1
gain 0.00 to
2.50
1.00 Yes A A A A A
AO Ch1 Gain
F4-03
Channel 2
monitor
selection 1 to 45 3 No A A A A A
AO Ch2
Select
F4-04
Channel 2
gain 0.00 to
2.50
0.50 Yes A A A A A
AO Ch2 Gain
F4-05
Channel 1
output moni-
tor bias
Sets the channel 1 item bias to
100%/10 V when the analog moni-
tor card is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0 Yes A A A A A
AO Ch1 Bias
F4-06
Channel 2
output moni-
tor bias
Sets the channel 2 item bias to
100%/10 V when the analog moni-
tor card is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0 Yes A A A A A
AO Ch2 Bias
F4-07
Analog out-
put signal
level for
channel 1
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
AO Opt
Level Sel
F4-08
Analog out-
put signal
level for
channel 2
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
AO Opt
Level Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-78
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and
bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Ana-
log Output Option Cards AO-08 and AO-12 using the gain and bias in F4-02, F4-04, and F4-06.
Adjusting the Meter
Display the data setting display for the gain and bias constants corresponding to the output channel of the
Inverter Unit and the AO Option Card while the Inverter is stopped to output the following voltages to the ana-
log monitor terminal, to enable meter adjusting while the Inverter is stopped.
10 V/100% monitor output × output gain + output bias
Fig 6.53 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels
Monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V output 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is positive (+),
and 0 to -10 V signals when the monitor value is negative (-). For monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V,
refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.
INFO
You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option
terminals.
Output voltage
Gain x 10 V
Bias x 10/100 V
Monitor item

Monitor Constants
6-79
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents
This section explains pulse monitor constants.
Related Constants
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items
Output digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Refer
to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the part of U1- (Status monitor). The possible monitor selec-
tions are limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items
Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Set the pulse frequency output when
100% frequency is output to H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output.
When using a pulse monitor constant, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions.
If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the machinery.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H6-06
Pulse train
monitor
selection
Select the pulse train monitor output
items (value of the part of U1-
).
There are two types of monitor
items: Speed-related items and PID-
related items.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
2 Yes A A A A A
Pulse Output
Sel
H6-07
Pulse train
monitor scal-
ing
Set the number of pulses output
when speed is 100% in hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to
make the pulse train monitor output
synchronously to the output fre-
quency.
0 to
32000
PO Scaling
Using a Sourcing Output
Output Voltage
(Isolated)
VRL (V)
Load Impedance (kΩ)
+5 V min. 1.5 kΩ min.
+8 V min. 3.5 kΩ min.
+10 V min. 10 kΩ min.
Load impedance
MP
AC
VRL

6-80
Using a Sinking Input
External Power
Supply (V)
12 VDC±10%,
15 VDC±10%
Sink Current (mA) 16 mA Max
Load impedance
Sinking current
External power supply
MP
AC

Individual Functions
6-81
This section explains the individual functions used in special applications.
Using MEMOBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or simi-
lar devices using the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial com-
munications between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds.
The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address
of each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiv-
ing commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.
Fig 6.54 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Specifications
Interface RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communications Parameters
Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Parity: Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits: 1 bit fixed
Communications Protocol MEMOBUS (RTU mode only)
Number of Connectable Units 31 units max. (when using RS-485)
MEMOCON-series PLC
RS-485 connections
example
Inverter Inverter Inverter

6-82
Communications Connection Terminal
MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance
by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.
Fig 6.55 Communications Connection Terminal
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the
Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, connect the shield cover to the Inverter earth terminal,
and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise.
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.
INFO
Set the timer on the master to monitor response time from the slave. Set the master so that if the slave does
not respond to the master within the set time, the same command message will be sent from the master
again.
RS-422A
or RS-485 R+
R-
Switch
1
Terminating resistance (1/2 W, 110 Ohms)
S+
S-
+
-
S1
O
F
F
1
2
Terminating
resistanceOFF ON
R+ S+

6-83
Related Constants
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b1-01
Reference
selection
method.
0: Digital Operator
input)
3: Option Card
Reference
Source
b1-02
Operation
method selec-
tion
method.
0: Digital Operator
(sequence input)
3: Option Card
Run Source
H5-01
Station
address
Set the Inverter's node address.
0 to 20
*
1F No A A A A A
Serial Comm
Adr
H5-02
Communica-
tion speed
selection
Set the baud rate for 6CN MEMO-
BUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Serial Baud
Rate
H5-03
Communica-
tion parity
selection
Set the parity for 6CN MEMOBUS
communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
Serial Com
Sel
H5-04
Stopping
method after
communica-
tion error
Set the stopping method for com-
munications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
1: Coast to stop
Serial Fault
Sel
H5-05
Communica-
tion error
detection
selection
Set whether or not a communica-
tions timeout is to be detected as a
communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
Serial Flt Dtct
H5-06
Send wait
time Set the time from the Inverter
receiving data to when the Inverter
starts to send.
5 to 65 5 ms No A A A A A
Transmit
WaitTIM
H5-07
RTS control
ON/OFF
Select to enable or disable RTS
control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only
when sending)
RTS Control
Sel

6-84
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-
02.
• Monitoring operation status from the PLC
• Setting and reading constants
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands
input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The mes-
sage format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is
changed by the command (function) contents.
The space between messages must support the following.
Fig 6.56 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the
Inverter will not return responses).
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Command Message Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
03H Read storage register contents 8 8 7 37
08H Loopback test 8 8 8 8
10H Write multiple storage registers 11 41 8 8
Command message Response message Command message
PLC to Inverter PLC to InverterInverter to PLC
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long H5-06
setting
24 bits long 5 ms min.

6-85
Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method.
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the MEMOBUS system, set
the factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them to the CRC-16 in the
response messages.
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Storage Register Contents
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting
from a specified address. The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower
place 8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H
Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H
Start
Address
Higher
place
00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H
Lower
place
20H
Lead stor-
age register
Higher
place
00H
CRC-16
Higher
place
F1H
Quantity
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
65H
Lower
place
31H
Lower
place
04H
Next stor-
age register
Higher
place
00H
CRC-16
Higher
place
45H
Lower
place
00H
Lower
place
F0H
Next stor-
age register
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Next stor-
age register
Higher
place
01H
Lower
place
F4H
CRC-16
Higher
place
AFH
Lower
place
82H

6-86
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter.
Writing to Multiple Storage Registers
Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses. The written data must
be in the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in storage reg-
ister address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency refer-
ence of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.
Command Message
Response Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H
Test Code
Higher
place
00H
Test Code
Higher
place
00H Error Code 01H
Lower
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
CRC-16
Higher
place
86H
Data
Higher
place
A5H
Data
Higher
place
A5H
Lower
place
50H
Lower
place
37H
Lower
place
37H
CRC-16
Higher
place
DAH
CRC-16
Higher
place
DAH
Lower
place
8DH
Lower
place
8DH
Command Message
Response Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H
Start
Address
Higher
place
00H
Start
Address
Higher
place
00H Error code 02H
Lower
place
01H
Lower
place
01H
CRC-16
Higher
place
CDH
Quantity
Higher
place
00H
Quantity
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
C1H
Lower
place
02H
Lower
place
02H
No. of data 04H
CRC-16
Higher
place
10H
Lead data
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
08H
Lower
place
01H
Next data
Higher
place
02H
Lower
place
58H
CRC-16
Higher
place
63H
Lower
place
39H

6-87
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
INFO
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle
response messages in the same way.
Register No. Contents
0000H Not used
0001H
Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Forward/reverse operation 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bit 2 External fault 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3 Fault reset 1: Reset command
Bit 4 ComNet
Bit 5 ComCtrl
Bit 6 Multi-function input command 3
Bit A Multi-function input command 7
Bit B Multi-function input command 8
Bit C Multi-function input command 9
Bit D Multi-function input command 10
Bit E Multi-function input command 11
Bit F Multi-function input command 12
0002H Frequency reference (Set units using constant o1-03)
0003H Not used
0004H Torque reference
0005H Torque compensation
0006H PID target value
0007H Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 10 V/1540)
0008H Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
0009H
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3 PHC3(Contact P3-C3) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4 PHC4(Contact P4-C4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5 Not used
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used

6-88
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
000FH
Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Use MEMOBUS 0006H PID target value
Bits 2 to B Not used
C Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F Broadcast data terminal S8 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
0020H
Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3 Error 1: Error
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 8 Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits A and B Not used
0021H
Error details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4 Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External fault (EF, EFO)
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1), overtorque 1 (OL3) detected, or overtorque 2 (OL4) detected
Bit A PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Bit B Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Bit C
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush preven-
tion circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D SPO output phase open, SPI output phase open
Bit E MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Bit F Operator disconnected (OPR)
0022H
Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bit 1 Not used
Bit 2 Not used
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
0023H Frequency reference (U1-01)
0024H Output frequency (U1-02)
0025H Output voltage reference (U1-06)
0026H Output current (U1-03)
0027H Output power (U1-08)
0028H Torque reference (U1-09)

6-89
0029H Not used
002AH Not used
002BH
Sequence input status
Bit 0 1: Control circuit terminal S1 ON
Bit A 1: Control circuit terminal S11 ON
Bit B 1: Control circuit terminal S12 ON
Bits C to F Not used
002CH
Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency matching 1: Matched
Bit 3 User-defined speed matching 1: Matched
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2
Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit A Run command mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit B Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Bit C Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit D Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit E Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
002DH
Multi-function contact output status
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H Torque monitor
0033H Output power (U1-08)
0034H - 0037H Not used
0038H PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H PID input quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003AH PID output quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003BH CPU software number
003CH Flash software number

6-90
Note Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are
temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant data area,
use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as
enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
003DH
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
003EH kVA setting
003FH Control method
Register
Address
Contents
0001H
Operation signal
Bit 0 Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4 External fault 1: Error (set using H1-01)
Bit 5 Fault reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bits 6 to B Not used
Bit C Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Bit D Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Bit E Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Bit F Multi-function contact input terminal S8 input
0002H
Frequency ref-
erence
30000/100%
0900H Write constant data to EEPROM
0910H Constant data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100 thousand. Do not fre-
quently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address
will become invalid (Error code: 02H).

6-91
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command
message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is
sent to the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the mas-
ter.
Error Code Contents
01H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
21H
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing con-
stants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
22H
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
23H
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing constants from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
24H
Writing error during constants processing
Attempting to write constants from the PLC while processing constants in the Inverter.

6-92
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface cir-
cuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communica-
tions parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter, and checks if
communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Ter-
minal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.
Fig 6.57 Details of Communications Terminals
“Pass” will be displayed if self-diagnosis is completed without an error occurring.
If an error occurs, a CE (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator,
the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
S1
SC
S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7

6-93
Using the Timer Function
Multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and multi-
function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be designated as timer function output terminals.
By setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12) to 18 (timer
function input).
• Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 func-
tion selection) to 12 (timer function output).
Related Constants
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is
turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output
function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Fig 6.58 Timer Function Operation Example
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b4-01
Timer function
ON-delay time
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead band) for
the timer function input, in 1-sec-
ond units.
Enabled when a timer function is
set in H1- or H2- .
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s No A A A A A
Delay-ON
Timer
b4-02
Timer function
OFF-delay time
Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time (dead band) for
the timer function input, in 1-sec-
ond units.
Enabled when a timer function is
set in H1- or H2- .
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s No A A A A A
Delay-OFF
Timer
Timer function input
Timer function output

6-94
Using PID Control
PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combin-
ing proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets
(machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of
operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference
between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Fig 6.59 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
P control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the
deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback
value to the target value. I control is not suited, however, to rapid variations.
D control Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly to rapid
variations.
Applica-
tion
Control Details
Example of Sen-
sor Used
Speed Con-
trol
• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs
synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Tachometer genera-
tor
Pressure
Control
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control. Pressure sensor
Flow Rate
Control
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately. Flow rate sensor
Tempera-
ture Con-
trol
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control
by rotating the fan.
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
Deviation
I controlAmount of operation
D control
Time
PID control
Time
P control

6-95
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b5-01
PID control
mode selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is D-
controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-
controlled.)
(frequency reference + PID
output, D control of deviation)
(frequency reference + PID
output, D control of feedback
value).
PID Mode
b5-02
Proportional
gain (P)
Sets P-control proportional gain
as a percentage.
P-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
1.00 Yes A A A A A
PID Gain
b5-03
Integral (I) time Sets I-control integral time in 1-
second units.
I-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.0.
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s Yes A A A A A
PID I Time
b5-04
Integral (I) limit Sets the I-control limit as a per-
centage of the maximum output
frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
PID I Limit
b5-05
Derivative (D)
time
Sets D-control derivative time in
1-second units.
D-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.00.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s Yes A A A A A
PID D Time
b5-06
PID limit Sets the limit after PID-control as
a percentage of the maximum out-
put frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
PID Limit
b5-07
PID offset
adjustment
Sets the offset after PID-control
as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A
PID Offset
b5-08
PID primary
delay time con-
stant
Sets the time constant for low
pass filter for PID-control outputs
in 1-second units.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s Yes A A A A A
PID Delay
Time
b5-09
PID output
characteristics
selection
Select forward/reverse for PID
output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output code)
Output Level
Sel
b5-10
PID output gain
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0 No A A A A A
Output Gain
b5-11
PID reverse
output selection
0: 0 limit when PID output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PID output is
negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit is
selected using b1-04.
Output Rev Sel

6-96
b5-12
Selection of
PID feedback
command loss
detection
0: No detection of loss of PID
feedback.
feedback.
Operation continues during
detection, with the
malfunctioning contact not
operating.
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault contact
operates.
Fb los Det Sel
b5-13
PID feedback
command loss
detection level
Sets the PID feedback loss detec-
tion level as a percent units, with
the maximum output frequency at
100%.
0 to 100 0% No A A A A A
Fb los Det Lvl
b5-14
PID feedback
command loss
detection time
Sets the PID feedback loss detec-
tion level in s units.
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s No A A A A A
Fb los Det Time
b5-15
PID sleep func-
tion operation
level Set the PID sleep function start
level as a frequency.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz No A A A A A
PID Sleep
Level
b5-16
PID sleep oper-
ation delay time Set the delay time until the PID
sleep function starts in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s No A A A A A
PID Sleep Time
b5-17
Accel/decel
time for PID
reference
Set the accel/decel time for PID
reference in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s No A A A A A
PID SFS Time
H6-01
Pulse train
input function
selection
2: PID target value
Pulse Input Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level Dur-
ing Multi-Function Ana-
log Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
U1-24
PID feed-
back value
Monitors the feedback value
when PID control is used.
The input for the max. frequency
corresponds to 100%.
0.01
%
A A A A A
PID Feed-
back
U1-36
PID input
volume
PID feedback volume
100%
0.01
%
A A A A A
PID Input
U1-37
PID output
volume
PID control output
100%
0.01
%
A A A A A
PID Output
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-97
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
PID Control Methods
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting constant b5-01.
U1-38
PID com-
mand
PID command + PID command
bias
100%
0.01
%
A A A A A
PID Setpoint
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during
PID control)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
34 PID soft starter Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Set-
ting
Value
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
B PID feedback Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
C PID target value Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Set Value Control Method
1
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID
target value and feedback value.
2 PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
3
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
difference between PID target value and feedback value.
4
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
PID feedback value.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
log Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2

6-98
PID Input Methods
Enable PID control using constant b5-01, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value.
PID Target Value Input Methods
Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target
value as shown in the following table.
PID Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods.
PID Adjustment Methods
Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response wave-
form.
1. Set b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) to 1 or 2 (PID control enabled).
2. Increase b5-02 (Proportional Gain (P)) to within a range that does not vibrate.
3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
PID Target Input Method Setting Conditions
Multi-Function Analog Ter-
minal A2 Input
Set H3-05 or H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input
function selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
MEMOBUS register 0006H
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 to be able to use register number
0006H as the PID target value.
Pulse train input Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
Input Method Setting Conditions
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-func-
tion Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Pulse train input Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
INFO
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.

6-99
PID Fine Adjustment Methods
This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control constants.
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I).
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time
(D).
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is too strong.
Lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
After adjustment
Time

6-100
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time (D)
set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the propor-
tional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
Setting Precautions
• In PID control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a
specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, Inverter response is delayed, and the machine may be
damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
• The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from
exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
• The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum
• Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this constant to prevent
machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this
case, set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to
reduce Inverter responsiveness.
• Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value,
you can apply this constant to applications to lower the Inverter output frequency.
• Using b5-10, you can apply gain to the PID control output. Enable this constant to adjust the amount of
compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation.
• When PID control output is negative, you can use constant b5-11 to invert the Inverter. When b1-04 (Pro-
hibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, PID output limit is 0.
• With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in constant b5-17, you can
increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/
deceleration function (constant C1) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending
on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens,
reduce constant C1 until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b5-
17. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multi-
function input set value 34 (PID soft starter).
After adjustment
Time

6-101
PID Control Block
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.
Fig 6.60 PID Control Block
OptionCard
SerialCom
TerminalA1
D1-01
D1-02
D1-16
TerminalA2orA3PID
targetvalue
MEMOBUScommunications
register06HPIDtargetvalue
Frequencyreference
terminalA3PIDfeedback
Z-1
b5-03
+−
+
P
b1-01
0
1
2
3,4
Frequencyreference
usingmulti-stepcommand
PIDinputvolume
(U1-36)
SetPIDtargetvaluein
multi-functionanaloginput
Setbit1ofMEMOBUS
register0FHto1
b5-01=2,4
b5-01=1,3
Proportional
gain(P)
b5-02
+
−
+
b5-17
PulseinputterminalRP
H6-01=2
PulseinputterminalRP
-1
Selectmulti-functioninputs
PIDinputcharacteristics
0
1
PIDSFSCancel
H6-01=1
H3-05or
H3-09=B
Outputfrequency
1
T
b5-05
−
T
1
-1
PIDoutput
gain(b5-10)
Z-1
Z-1
Z-1
Frequencyreference
(U1-01)
PIDcommand(U1-38)
Integral(I)time
b5-03
Storeintegralusing
multi-functioninputs
Ilimit
b5-01=1,3
b5-01=2,4
Derivative
time
Integralrsetusing
multi-functioninputs
PIDlimit
b5-06
PIDLimit
PIDprimarydelay
timeconstant
b5-08
PIDoffset
adjustment(b5-07)
SelectPIDoutput
characteristicsselection
(b5-09)
+
+
−
+
+
+
+
−
+
++
+
PIDoutputmonitor
(U1-37)
b5-01=0
b5-01=3,4
b5-01=1,2
PIDON
PIDOFF
Multi-functioninputPIDcontrolcancel
signalisON.PIDisOFFunderthe
followingconditions:
b5-01=0
DuringJDGcommandinput
b5-11=0
b5-11=1
Enable/disablereverseoperation
whenPIoutputisnegative
Upperlimit
Fmaxx109%
Lowerlimit0
Uppwerlimit
Fmaxx109%
Lowerlimit
-(Fmaxx109%)
+
+
0
+
1
1

6-102
PID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost,
the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and
continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digi-
tal Operator and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator, the error contact will operate, and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.
Fig 6.61 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID
control target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time
continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, Inverter operation
will automatically resume.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function,
select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
Fig 6.62 PID Sleep Time Chart
PID feedback value
Loss detection
level
(b5-13)
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
No FbL
detection
FbL detection
Time
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
PID target value
Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation
delay time
Sleep operation
delay time
Run command has been input
Operation status output
Internal run command
External run command
Operating
Operation Stopped
b5-16 b5-16

6-103
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be per-
formed using both V/f control and open-loop vector control. The constants to be adjusted are different for
each. In V/f control, adjust b8-04 to b8-06, and in vector control, adjust b8-02 and b8-03.
Related Constants
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vec-
tor 1 factory settings are given.)
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b8-01
Energy-saving
mode selection
Select whether to enable or dis-
able energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Energy Save
Sel
b8-02
Energy-saving
gain Set the energy-saving gain with
the open-loop vector control
method.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
*1
Yes No No A A A
Energy Save
Gain
b8-03
Energy-saving
filter time con-
stant
Set the energy-saving filter time
constant with the open-loop vec-
tor control method.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
*2
Yes No No A A A
Energy Save
F.T
b8-04
Energy-saving
coefficient
Set the maximum motor effi-
ciency value.
Set the motor rated capacity in
E2-11, and adjust the value by 5%
at a time until output power
reaches a minimum value.
0.0 to
655.00
*3
*4
No A A No No No
Energy Save
COEF
b8-05
Powerdetection
filter time con-
stant
Set the time constant for output
power detection.
0 to
2000
20 ms No A A No No No
kW Filter Time
b8-06
Search opera-
tion voltage
limiter
Set the limit value of the voltage
control range during search opera-
tion.
Perform search operation to opti-
mize operations using minute
variations in voltage using
energy-saving control. Set to 0 to
disable the search operation.
100% is the motor base voltage.
0 to 100 0% No A A No No No
Search V Limit
E2-02
Motor rated slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz
units.
reference values for slip compen-
sation.
during autotuning.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*4
No A A A A AMotor Rated
Slip
E2-11
Motor rated
output
Set the rated output of the motor
in units of 0.01 kW.
during autotuning.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
*3
No Q Q Q Q Q
Mtr Rated
Power

6-104
* 4. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
The method of adjustment during energy-saving control operations differs depending on the control method.
Refer to the following when making adjustments.
V/f Control
In V/f control method, the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage
reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter. If the motor
capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Out-
put). Also, adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum. The larger the energy-saving
coefficient, the greater the output voltage.
• To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-05. If b8-
05 is set too small, however, motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently, control motor efficiency online to optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage
using the search operation. Constant b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that con-
trol the voltage using the search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/200 V, and for
400 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.
Vector Control
In vector control method, control the slip frequency so that motor efficiency is maximized.
• Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, calculate the optimum slip for motor
efficiency for each frequency. In vector control, be sure to perform autotuning, and set the motor rated slip.
• If the motor performs hunting when using energy-saving control in vector control, reduce the set value in
b8-02 (Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).

6-105
Setting Motor Constants
In vector control method, the motor constants are set automatically using autotuning. If autotuning does not
complete normally, set them manually.
Related Constants
* 1. The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 3. The setting range depends on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
E2-01
Motor rated
current
units.
trol.
during autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
1.90 A
*1
No Q Q Q Q Q
Motor Rated
FLA
E2-02
Motor rated slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz
units.
reference values for slip compen-
sation.
during autotuning.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*1
No A A A A AMotor Rated
Slip
E2-03
Motor no-load
current
Sets the motor no-load current in
1 A units.
during autotuning.
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
No A A A A A
No-Load Cur-
rent
E2-04
Number of
motor poles Sets the number of motor poles.
during autotuning.
2 to 48 4 poles No No Q No Q Q
Number of
Poles
E2-05
Motor line-to-
line resistance
during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842 Ω
*1
No A A A A A
Term Resis-
tance
E2-06
Motor leak
inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to motor
leakage inductance as a percent-
age of the motor rated voltage.
during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
*1
No No No A A A
Leak Induc-
tance
E2-07
Motor iron sat-
uration coeffi-
cient 1
coefficient at 50% of magnetic
flux.
during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.50
0.50 No No No A A A
Saturation
Comp1
E2-08
Motor iron sat-
uration coeffi-
cient 2
coefficient at 75% of magnetic
flux.
during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.75
0.75 No No No A A A
Saturation
Comp2
E2-10
Motor iron loss
for torque com-
pensation Sets motor iron loss in W units.
0 to
65535
14 W
*1
No A A No No No
Tcomp Iron
Loss

6-106
Manual Motor Constant Setting Methods
The motor constants settings methods are given below. Make (enter) settings referring to the motor test report.
Motor Rated Voltage Setting
Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Amount of motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min−1
) x No. of motor
poles/120.
Motor No-Load Current Setting
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency. The motor no-load current
is not normally written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting
E2-04 is displayed only when V/f control method with PG is selected. Set the number of motor poles (number
of poles) as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tun-
ing, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from the line-to-line resis-
tance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly.
• E-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leak inductance in E2-06 using the percentage over the motor
rated voltage. Make this setting when the high-speed motor inductance is small. If the inductance is not writ-
ten on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings
E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically using autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting
E2-10 is displayed only when in V/f control method. To increase the torque compensation accuracy when in
V/f control method, set the motor iron loss in Watts.
Motor Mechanical Loss
When using flux vector control, adjust mechanical loss in the following cases. (There is normally no reason to
make this adjustment.) The mechanical loss setting is used to compensate the torque.
• There is excessive torque loss from the motor bearings.
• There is excessive torque loss from a fan, pump, etc.

6-107
Setting the V/f Pattern
In V/f control method, you can set the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern as the need arises.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
E1-01
Input volt-
age setting
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt.
This setting is used as a reference value
in protection functions.
155 to
255
*1
200 V
*1
No Q Q Q Q Q
Input Voltage
E1-03
V/f pattern
selection
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns (Applicable
for settings E1-04 to E1-10.)
0 to F F No Q Q No No No
V/F Selec-
tion
E1-04
Max. output
frequency
To set V/f characteristics in a straight
line, set the same values for E1-07 and
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08
will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies
are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07
(FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
40.0 to
400.0*5
60.0 Hz
*2
No Q Q Q Q Q
Max
Frequency
E1-05
Max. voltage 0.0 to
255.0
*1
200.0 V
*1*2
No Q Q Q Q Q
Max Voltage
E1-06
Base
frequency 0.0 to
400.0*5
60.0 Hz
*2
No Q Q Q Q Q
Base
Frequency
E1-07
Mid. output
frequency 0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
*2
No A A A No No
Mid
Frequency A
E1-08
Mid. output
frequency
voltage 0.0 to
255.0 *1
11.0 V
*1 *2
No A A A No No
Mid Voltage
A
E1-09
Min. output
frequency 0.0 to
400.0*5
0.5 Hz
*2
No Q Q Q A Q
Min
Frequency
E1-10
Min. output
frequency
voltage
0.0 to
255.0
*1
2.0 V
*1 *2
No A A A No No
Min Voltage
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)

6-108
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The contents of constants E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Setting Inverter Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 to match the power supply voltage. This set value will be the
standard value for the protection function and similar functions.
Setting V/f Pattern
Set the V/f pattern in E1-03 when using V/f control (with or without a PG). There are two methods of setting
the V/f pattern: Select one of the 15 pattern types (set value: 0 to E) that have been set beforehand, or set a
user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F. The contents of E1-03 when factory-set to F are the same as when E1-03 is
set to 1.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
E1-11
Mid. output
frequency 2
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output
range. Normally, this setting is not
required.
0.0 to
400.0*5
0.0 Hz
*3
No A A A A A
Mid
Frequency B
E1-12
Mid. output
frequency
voltage 2
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*3
No A A A A A
Mid Voltage
B
E1-13
Base voltage 0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*4
No A A Q Q Q
Base Voltage
Characteristic Application
Set
Value
Specifications
Constant Torque
Characteristic
This pattern is used in general applications.
Used when the load torque is fixed, regard-
less of rotation speed, for linear transport
systems.
0 50 Hz specifications
1 (F) 60 Hz specifications
2
60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
50 Hz
3
60 Hz
Variable torque
characteristic
This pattern is used for loads with torque
proportional to two or three times the rota-
tion speed, such as fans and pumps.
4 50 Hz specifications,× 3 decrement
5 50 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-109
* The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of constants E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are
three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
High Startup
Torque (See
Note)*
Select the high startup torque V/f pattern
only in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)
• A large torque is required at startup (ele-
vator loads, etc.)
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter
input or output.
• You are operating a motor that is less
than optimum.
8
50 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
9 50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
A
60 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
B 60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
Fixed Output
Operation
This pattern is used for frequencies of 60
Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied.
C
60 Hz
D
60 Hz
E
60 Hz
Characteristic Application
Set
Value
Specifications

6-110
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to b)
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz

6-111
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
2.
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)

6-112
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
2.
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)

6-113
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set constants E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to
anything other than F, you can only refer to constants E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Fig 6.63 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
• When changing control method, constants E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that
control method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
(VMAX)
E1-13
(V Base)
E1-08
(VC)
E1-10
(VMIN)
E1-09
(FMIN)
E1-07
(FB)
E1-06
(FA)
E1-04
(FMAX)
Frequency (Hz)

6-114
Torque Control
With flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2, the motor's output torque can be controlled by a torque
reference from an analog input. Set d5-01 to 1 to control torque.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
d5-01
Torque control
selection
0: Speed control (C5-01 to C5-
07)
1: 0 to -10 V, no lower limit
To use the function for switching
between speed and torque control,
set to 0 and set the multi-function
input to “speed/torque control
change.”
0 or 1 0 No No No No A A
Torq Control
Sel
d5-02
Torque
reference delay
time
Set the torque reference filter pri-
mary delay time in ms units.
This function can be used to
adjust the noise of the torque con-
trol signal or the responsiveness
with the host controller. When
oscillation occurs during torque
control, increase the set value.
0 to
1000
0 ms* No No No No A A
Torq Ref Filter
d5-03
Speed limit
selection
Set the speed limit command
method for the torque control
mode.
1: The analog input limit from a
frequency reference
2: Limited by d5-04 constant set-
ting values.
Speed Limit Sel
d5-04
Speed limit Set the speed limit during torque
control as a percentage of the
This function is enabled when d5-
03 is set to 2. Directions are as
follows:
+: Run command direction
-: Opposite of run command
-120 to
+120
0% No No No No A ASpeed Lmt
Value
d5-05
Speed limit bias Set the speed limit bias as a per-
centage of the maximum output
frequency.
Bias is applied to the specified
speed limit. It can be used to
adjust the margin for the speed
limit.
0 to 120 10% No No No No A A
Speed Lmt Bias

6-115
d5-06
Speed/torque
control
switching timer
Set the delay time from inputting
the multi-function input “speed/
torque control change” (from ON
to OFF or OFF to ON) until the
control is actually changed in ms
units.
This function is enabled when the
multi-function input “speed/
torque control change” is set. In
the speed/torque control switch-
ing timer, the analog inputs hold
the values of when the “speed/
torque control change” changes.
Always be sure to allow time for
this process to finish completely.
0 to
1000
0 ms No No No No A A
Ref Hold Time
H3-04
Signal level
selection (ter-
minal A3)
0: 0 to ±10 V
negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10 V
Term A3 Signal
H3-05
Multi-function
analog input
(terminal A3)
Select from the functions listed in
the following table. Refer to the
next page.
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
Gain (terminal
A3)
terminal 16 is 10 V.
0.0 to
1000.0
Terminal A3
Gain
H3-07
Bias (terminal
A3)
terminal 16 is 0 V.
-100.0 to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A
Terminal A3
Bias
H3-08
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
signal level
selection
0: Limit negative frequency set-
tings for gain and bias settings
to 0.
1: Do not limit negative fre-
quency settings for gain and
bias settings to 0 (i.e., allow
reverse operation).
Switch current and voltage input
using the switch on the control
panel.
Term A2 Signal
H3-09
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
function selec-
tion
Select multi-function analog input
function for terminal A2. Refer to
the next table.
Terminal A2
Sel
H3-10
Gain (terminal
A2)
0.0 to
1000.0
Terminal A2
Gain
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-116
* Factory settings will change if the control mode is changed.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-05)
Multi-function Analog Inputs (H3-05, H3-09)
Monitor Function
H3-11
Bias (terminal
A2)
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0% Yes A A A A A
Terminal A2
Bias
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
71 Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control) No No No Yes Yes
78 Polarity reverse command for external torque reference No No No Yes Yes
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
32
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected.
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
No No No Yes Yes
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
0 Add to terminal A1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
13 Torque reference/torque limit at speed control No No No Yes Yes
14 Torque compensation No No No Yes Yes
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
log Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
U1-09
Torque refer-
ence Monitor in internal torque
reference value for vector
control.
10 V: Motor rated torque
0.1% No No A A A
Torque Refer-
ence
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-117
Inputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions
The torque reference can be changed according to an analog input by setting H3-09 (Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 selection) to 13 (torque refer-
ence) or 14 (torque compensation). The torque reference input methods are listed in the following table.
The direction of the torque output from the motor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input. It
does not depend on the direction of the run command. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive analog reference: Torque reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from
the motor output axis).
• Negative analog reference: Torque reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the
motor output axis).
If the analog signal input level is 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA, a forward torque reference will not be applied. To
apply reverse torque, use an input level of -10 V to 10 V or switch the direction using a multi-function input
set to 78 (polarity reverse command for external torque reference).
Torque Reference Input
Method
Reference Location
Selection
Method
Remarks
Voltage input (0 to ±10 V)
Between A3 and AC
H3-04 = 1
H3-05 = 13
Set H3-04 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque ref-
erence.
To switch the torque reference between
positive and negative torque, set a multi-
function analog input to 78.
Between A2 and AC
(Turn OFF pin 2 of
SW1.)
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
Set H3-08 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque ref-
erence.
The input can be used for torque compen-
sation by setting H3-09 to 14.
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Between A2 and AC
(Turn ON pin 2 of
SW1.)
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 13
Option Card (AI-14B)
(0 to ±10 V)
Between TC2 and TC4
F2-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13

6-118
Fig 6.64 Torque Control Block Diagram
Speed Limiter and Priority Circuit (Speed Limit Function)
If the external torque reference and load are not balanced during torque control, the motor will accelerate in
either the forward or reverse direction. The speed limit function is used to limit the speed to a specified value
and it consists of the speed limiter circuit and priority circuit. The speed limit circuit
There are two ways to set a speed limit: using an input from an analog input terminal and setting a speed limit
in d5-04. The inputs methods for a speed limit are listed in the following table.
Speed Limit Input Method
Location of Refer-
ence
Constant Set-
tings
Remarks
Voltage input (0 to ±10 V)
Set in d5-04 d5-03 = 2 -
Between A1 and AC
b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 1
Set H3-01 to 0 if the speed limit is always
to be positive.
Between A2 and AC
b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 1
The value will be added to the value input
on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Set H3-03 to 0 if the speed limit input on
A2 is always to be positive.
Turn OFF (V side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1
on the terminal board.
Current input (4 to 20 mA) Between A2 and AC
b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 1
The value will be added to the value input
on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Turn ON (I side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1
on the terminal board.
Option Card (AI-4B)
(0 to ±10 V)
Between TC1 and TC4
b1-01 = 3
F2-01 = 0
If H3-09 is set to 0, the sum of the input
between TC2 and TC4 will be added the
input between TC1 and TC4 to determine
the speed limit.
Torque reference
from analog input
Torque primary delay
filter d5-02
Torque compensation
from analog input
Speed limit from analog
input from terminal A1
Speed limit
d5-04
1
2
d5-03
Speed limiter
Speed feedback
Speed limit bias
d5-05
+
Torque limit Internal torque
reference
Refer to torque limit setting
via constants and analog input
Speed controller
(ASR)
Priority
circuit
+
+
+
−

6-119
Speed Limit Bias Setting
The speed limit bias can be set to limit both the forward and reverse speed to the same value. This differs from
the operation of the speed limit setting. To use the speed limit bias, set d5-04 to 0 and set the bias in d5-05 as a
percentage of the maximum output frequency.
To set 50% forward and reverse speed limits, set the speed limit setting to 0 (d5-03 = 2, d5-04 = 0, and d5-05
= 50). The range of torque control will be from -50% to 50% of the maximum output speed.
When using both the speed limit and the speed limit bias, the range of torque control will be positive and neg-
ative speed limits with the speed limit bias added to each.
The range of torque control when the forward speed limit is 50% and the speed limit bias is 10% is shown in
the following figure. This figure does not take the priority circuit into account.
Fig 6.65 Speed Limit Bias Setting
Torque Limit Operation Examples
Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation, in which the speed and motor torque
are in the same directions, and rewinding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in opposite direc-
tions.
Winding Operation
In a winding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the same direction. For the
winding operation, both the speed limit and the torque reference input are positive. The motor will accelerate
when the torque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load. If
the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter cir-
cuit. When the speed then drops below the speed limit, a positive compensation value is output. The torque
compensation is proportional to the ASR proportional gain. When the sum of the torque reference and the
torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating
and run at a constant speed.
IMPORTANT
The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction
of the run command.
• Positive voltage applied: The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation.
• Negative voltage applied: The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation.
If the direction of motor rotation and the command direction are not the same, speed will be limited to 0 as
long as b5-05 is set to 0.
Positive torque
Negative torque
Reverse
operation
Forward speed limit
50%
Forward
operation
d5-05
Speed limit bias

6-120
Rewinding Operation
In a rewinding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the opposite directions. (In
this example, we’ll assume that the line speed is positive and the torque reference input is negative.) For the
rewinding operation, the speed limit is positive and the torque reference input is negative. If the motor turns
faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. If the motor
is rotating in reverse, a negative compensation value is output. If the speed is 0 or is below the speed limit, a 0
compensation value is output. In this way, the output from the speed limiter is used to maintain the motor
speed between 0 and the speed limit. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation out-
put by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant
speed.
Torque Reference Adjustment
Consider the following information when adjusting the torque.
Torque Reference Delay Time: d5-02
The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted. This constant is used to
eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller. Increase the
setting if oscillation occurs during torque control.
Setting the Torque Compensation
Set multi-function analog input A2 or A3 to torque compensation (setting 14). When the amount of torque loss
for mechanical loss or other factor at the load is input to one of these terminals, it is added to the torque refer-
ence to compensate for the loss. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive voltage (current): Torque compensation reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as
viewed from the motor output axis).
Winding Operation Rewinding Operation
Configuration
Normal Rotation
Direction
Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
Torque Reference
Polarity (TREF)
Speed Limit Polar-
ity (SLIM)
Generated Torque
X
M
Line direction
N T
Motor
X
M
Line direction
N
T
Torque
limit
Torque
limit
Speed
SLIM
0-(d5-05)
TREF(%)
C5-01
TREF
Torque Torque
limit
Torque
limit
Speed
SLIM
0
TREF
(d5-05)
TREF(%)
C5-01
Torque Torque
limit
Torque
limit
Speed
SLIM
0
TREF
-(d5-05)
TREF(%)
C5-01
d5-05(%)
The smaller
of these
Torque
Torque
limit
Torque
limit
SpeedSLIM 0
TREF
(d5-05)
The smaller
of these
TREF(%)
C5-01
d5-05(%)
Torque

6-121
• Negative voltage: Torque compensation reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from
the motor output axis).
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can be
input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected. If you want to input reverse torque com-
pensation, be sure to select the 0 to ±10 V signal level.
Speed/Torque Control Switching Function
It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01
to H1-10) is set to 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and
torque control is performed when the input is ON. Set d5-01 to switch speed/torque control.
Setting the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer
The delay between a change in the speed/control switching function input (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) and the
corresponding change in the control mode can be set in d5-06. During the timer delay, the value of the 3 ana-
log inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF status of speed/torque control switching signal
was changed. Use this delay to complete any changes required in external signals.
• The frequency reference (during speed control) is set in b1-01. The speed limit during torque control is set
in d5-03.
• If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi-function analog input, terminal A2, or terminal A3, the
input function changes when the control mode is switched between torque control and speed control.
During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
During torque control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
• When the run command turns OFF, the control method when stopped will be for speed control. Even from
the torque control mode, the system will automatically change to speed control and decelerate to a stop
when the run command turns OFF.
• When A1-02 (control method selection) is set to 3 (flux vector control), the speed/torque change command
(a setting of 71) can be set for a multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-10) to switch between speed and torque
control during operation. An example is shown below.
Terminal No. User Constant No. Factory Setting Setting Function
8 H1-06 8 71 Speed/torque control change
A1
b1-01 1 1
Frequency reference selection
(terminals A1, A2)
C5-03 1 1 Speed limit (terminals A1, A2)
A3 H3-05 0 13 Torque reference/torque limit

6-122
A timing chart for switching between speed and torque control is shown in the following figure.
Fig 6.66 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time Chart.
Speed Control (ASR) Structure
Speed control (ASR) during vector control adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the
speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimator) is 0. Speed control (ASR) during V/
f control with a PG adjusts the output frequency so that the deviation between the speed reference and the esti-
mated speed (PG feedback or speed estimator) is 0. The following block diagram shows the structure of the
speed control for vector or V/f control with a PG.
Fig 6.67 Speed Control Block Diagrams
Speed/torque change signal
(terminal S8 input)
Run command
Control mode
Terminal A1 input
Terminal A3 input
Stop
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
Run
Speed Torque Speed Torque Speed (decel to stop)
Speed
reference
Speed limit
Speed
reference
Speed limit
Torque limit
Torque
reference
Torque limit
Torque
reference
Frequency
reference
Detected speed
Estimated speed
P
I
Torque limits
Torque reference+
+
+
−
Speed Control Block Diagram for Vector Control
Frequency
reference
Detected speed P
I
Change
rate
limiter
Limit
+
+
+
−
Speed Control Block Diagram for V/f Control with a PG
+
+
Output frequency
C5-0, C5-03
C5-02, C5-04
C5-06
I
limit
C5-08
Primary
filter
L7-01 to L7-04
C5-01
C5-03
C5-02, C5-04
C5-05

6-123
Related Constants
* 1. When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (Refer to section on constants with factory setting that depend on the con-
trol mode.)
* 2. The setting range is 1.00 to 3.00 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C5-01
ASR propor-
tional gain 1 Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop
(ASR.)
0.00 to
300.00
*2
20.00
*1
Yes No A No A A
ASR P Gain
1
C5-02
ASR inte-
gral (I) time
1 Sets the integral time of the speed loop
(ASR) in 1-second units.
0.000
to
10.000
0.500
s*1 Yes No A No A A
ASR I Time
1
C5-03
ASR propor-
tional gain 2 Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
0.00 to
300.00
*2
20.00
*1
Yes No A No A A
ASR P Gain
2
C5-04
ASR inte-
gral (I) time
2
0.000
to
10.000
0.500
s*1 Yes No A No A A
ASR I Time
2
C5-05
ASR limit Sets the upper limit for the compensation
frequency for the speed control loop (ASR)
to a percentage of the maximum output fre-
quency.
0.0 to
20.0
5.0% No No A No No No
ASR Limit
C5-06
ASR pri-
mary delay
time
Sets the filter time constant, the time from
the speed loop to the torque command out-
put, in units of 1-second.
0.000
to
0.500
0.004
*1
No No No No A A*1
ASR Delay
Time
C5-07
ASR switch-
ing fre-
quency
Set the frequency for switching between
Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1, 2
in Hz units.
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain
switching for a multi-function input takes
priority.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 No No No No A A
ASR Gain
SW Freq
C5-08
ASR inte-
gral (I) limit
Set the upper limit of the speed control loop
integral as a percentage of the value at the
rated load.
0 to 400 400 No No No No A A
ASR I Limit
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
D
Speed control disable setting for V/f control with PG
OFF: Use speed control V/f control with PG
ON: Do not use speed control for V/f control with PG
No Yes No No No
P, I
0 E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
P=C5-03
I=C5-04

6-124
Speed Control (ASR) Gain Adjustment for Vector Control
Use the following procedure to adjust C5-01 and C5-03 with the mechanical system and actual load con-
nected.
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. Constant set-
tings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed waveform.
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
• Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM): Outputs Inverter's output frequency (0 to ±10 V).
• Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM): Outputs actual motor speed (0 to ±10 V).
E
Speed control integral reset
Enables switching between PI and P control for the speed control loop.
No No No Yes Yes
77
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (switching between C5-01 and C5-03)
OFF: Use proportional gain in C5-01
ON: Use proportional gain in C5-03
No No No Yes Yes
Constant
No.
Name Setting Explanation
H4-01 Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM monitor selection 2
Settings that allow multi-func-
tion analog output 1 to be used
to monitor the output frequency.
H4-02 Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM output gain 1.00
H4-03 Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM bias 0.0
H4-04 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM monitor selection 5
Settings that allow multi-func-
tion analog output 2 to be used
to monitor the motor speed.
H4-05 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM output gain 1.00
H4-06 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM bias selection 0.00
H4-07 Multi-function analog output 1 terminal signal level selection 1 Settings that allow a 0 to ±10 V
signal range to be monitored.H4-08 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal signal level selection 1
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
At zero-speed, increase C5-01
(ASR P Gain 1) until there is no oscillation.
At zero-speed, decrease C5-02
(ASR I Time 1) until there is no oscillation.
Does oscillation develop when the motor
operates at the maximum normal operating
speed?
Decrease C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
Increase C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).
YES
NO
Adjustment completed.
(When there is higher-level position control,
adjust the position loop gain so that
overshooting/undershooting doesn’t occur.)

6-125
Terminal AC is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response delay or
deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)
This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness is increased when
this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Oscillation will occur if this setting is
increased too much.
The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional
gain is changed.
Fig 6.68 Responsiveness for Proportional Gain
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)
This constant sets the speed control (ASR) integral time.
Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences.
Oscillation will occur if this setting is too short. The following diagram shows the type of changes that can
occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed.
Fig 6.69 Responsiveness for Integral Time
Motor speed
Time
The proportional gain is high.
(Oscillation occurs when the gain is too high.)
The proportional gain is low.
Motor speed
Time
Short integral time
Long integral time

6-126
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed and High-speed
Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the
mechanical system at low speed or high speed. The proportional gain P and integral time I can be switched
according to the motor speed, as shown below.
Fig 6.70 Low-speed and High-speed Gain Settings
Setting the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07)
Set the switching frequency to about 80% of the motor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscilla-
tion occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04)
Connect the actual load and adjust these constants at zero-speed. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2)
until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) until there is no oscillation.
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01, C5-02)
Adjust these constants at normal operating speed. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) until there is no
oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) until there is no oscillation. Refer to Fine Adjustments on
page 6 - 124 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed operation.
ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting
When one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 77, the input can be used to switch between
C5-01 (proportional gain 1) and C5-03 (proportional gain 2). Proportional gain 2 is used when the multi-func-
tion input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
Fig 6.71 ASR Proportional Gain Switch
P, I
Motor speed (Hz)
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04 (Low speed)
C5-07
If C5-07 is set to 0, P = C5-01 and I = C5-02.
0
ASR Gain Switch signal
(a multi-function input)
C5-02 C5-02
OFF
ON
C5-03 gain setting
Proportional gain (P)
Proportional gain
determined
by motor speed.
The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 (C5-02).

6-127
Gain Adjustment for Speed Control during V/f Control with PG
When using V/f control with PG, set the proportional gain (P) and the integral time (I) at E1-09 (minimum out-
put frequency) and E1-04 (maximum output frequency). Fig 6.72 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjust-
ment for V/f Control with PG shows how the proportional gain and integral time change in linear fashion based
on the speed.
Fig 6.72 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f Control with PG
Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency
Operate the motor at the minimum output frequency. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) to a level
where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Monitor the Inverter's output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the Inverter rated current. If the out-
put current exceeds 50% of the Inverter's rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency
Operate the motor at the maximum output frequency. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) to a level
where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. The adjust-
ment method is the same as that for vector control.
Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration (by setting F1-07 to 1) when you want the
motor speed to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration. Reduce the setting
of C5-01 if overshooting occurs during acceleration, and reduce the setting of C5-03 and increase the setting
of C5-04 if undershooting occurs when stopping. If overshooting and undershooting cannot be eliminated by
adjusting only the gain, reduce the value of C5-05 speed control and reduce the limit of the frequency refer-
ence compensation value.
Droop Control Function
Droop control is a function that allows the user to set the amount of motor slip.
When a single load is operated with two motors (such as in a crane conveyor), a high-resistance motor is nor-
mally used. This is to use torque characteristics that exhibit proportion movements due to changes in the sec-
ondary resistor to maintain torque balance with the load and overall speed balance with the load.
If droop control is used, a high-resistance motor characteristics can be set for a general-purpose motor.
P and I setting
Motor speed (Hz)
E1-04
0
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
E1-09
Min. output frequency

6-128
Related Constants
Setting Precautions
• Droop control is disabled if b7-01 is set to 0.0.
• Set b7-01 to the amount of slip as the percentage of slip when the maximum output frequency is input and
the rated torque is generated.
• Constant b7-02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control. Increase this setting if oscillation or
hunting occur.
Setting the Droop Control Gain
Set the droop control gain as the speed reduction at a 100% motor torque, as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Fig 6.73 Droop Control Gain
Zero-servo Function
The zero-servo function holds the motor when the motor is stopped in what is call a zero-servo status. This
function can be used to stop the motor even with an external force acts on the motor or the analog reference
input is offset.
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b7-01
Droop control
gain
Sets the slip as a percentage of
maximum frequency when the
maximum output frequency is
specified and the rated torque
occurs.
Droop-control is not performed
0.0 to
100.0
0.0 Yes No No No A A
Droop Quantity
b7-02
Droop control
delay time
Droop control responsiveness
constant
When hunting or oscillation
occurs, increase the value.
0.03 to
2.00
0.05 s No A A A A A
Droop Delay
Time
Torque
Speed
Speed reference0
100%
b7-01

6-129
The zero-servo function is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 72 (zero
servo command). If the zero servo command is ON when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero
speed level, a zero-servo status is implemented.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
b2-01
Zero speed
level (DC injec-
tion braking
starting fre-
quency)
Used to set the frequency which
starts DC injection braking in
units of Hz when deceleration to
stop is selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-09,
E1-09 becomes the DC injection
braking starting frequency.
(For flux vector control, zero-
speed control from B2-01)
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz No A A A A A
DCInj Start
Freq
b9-01
Zero-servo gain Adjust the strength of the zero-
servo lock.
Enabled when the zero-servo
command is set for a multi-func-
tion input. When the zero-servo
command has been input and the
frequency reference drop below
excitation level (b2-01), a posi-
tion control loop is created and
the motor stops. Increasing the
zero-servo gain in turn increases
the strength of the lock. Increas-
ing it by too much will cause
oscillation.
0 to 100 5 No No No No A NoZero Servo
Gain
b9-02
Zero-servo
completion
width
Sets the output width of the P-
lock completion signal.
completion (end)” is set for a
multi-function input. The zero-
servo completion signal is ON
when the current position is
within the range (the zero-servo
position + zero-servo completion
width.)
Set the allowable position dis-
placement from the zero-servo
position to 4 times the pulse rate
of the PG (pulse generator,
encoder) in use.
0 to
16383
10 No No No No A No
Zero Servo
Count
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo) No No No Yes No

6-130
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-03)
To output the zero-servo status externally, assign the Zero Servo End signal (setting 33) to one of the multi-
function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03).
Monitor Function
Time Chart
A time chart for the zero servo function is given in Fig 6.74 Time Chart for Zero Servo.
Fig 6.74 Time Chart for Zero Servo
• Be sure to leave the run command input ON. If the run command is turned OFF, the output will be inter-
rupted and the zero-servo function will become ineffective.
Set-
ting
Value
Function
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
33
Zero-servo end
ON: Current position is within zero-servo start position ± the zero-servo end width.
No No No Yes No
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description
log Output
Min.
Unit
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vec-
tor
2
U1-35
Zero-servo
movement
pulses
Shows the number of PG pulses
times 4 for the movement range
when stopped at zero.
(Cannot be output.) 1 No No No A No
Zero Servo
Pulse
Run command
ON OFF
Zero servo command
Frequency (speed) reference
Excitation level
b2-01
Motor speed
Zero Servo End signal Zero-servo status
ON OFF

6-131
• The holding force of the zero-servo is adjusted in b9-01. The holding force will increase if the value of the
setting is increased, but oscillation and hunting will occur if the setting is too large. Adjust b9-01 after
adjusting the speed control gain.
• The zero-servo detection width is set as the allowable position offset from the zero-servo start position. Set
4 times the number of pulses from the PG.
• The Zero Servo End signal will go OFF when the zero servo command is turned OFF.
IMPORTANT
Do not lock the servo for extended periods of time at 100% when using the zero servo function. Inverter
errors may result. Extended periods of servo lock can be achieved by ensuring that the current during the ser-
volock is 50% or less or by increasing the Inverter capacity.

6-132
Digital Operator Functions
This section explains the Digital Operator functions.
Setting Digital Operator Functions
You can set Digital Operator-related constants such as selecting the Digital Operator display, multi-function
selections, and copy functions.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
o1-02
Monitor selec-
tion after power
up
Sets the monitor item to be dis-
played when the power is turned
on.
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
1 to 4 1 Yes A A A A A
Power-On
Monitor
o1-03
Frequency units
of reference set-
ting and moni-
tor
Sets the units that will be set and
displayed for the frequency refer-
ence and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
min−1
units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
Example: When the max. output
frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
0 to
39999
0 No A A A A A
Display Scaling
o1-04
Setting unit for
frequency con-
stants related to
V/f characteris-
tics
Set the setting unit for frequency
reference-related constants.
0: Hz
1: min−1
V/f Display
Unit
o2-01
LOCAL/
REMOTE key
enable/disable
Sets the Digital Operator Local/
Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between
the Digital Operator and the
constant settings.)
Local/Remote
Key
Set 4-digit number
point.
to display.

6-133
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant o1-03. You can change the units
for the following constants using o1-03.
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON
Using constant o1-02, select the monitor item (U1- [status monitor]) to be displayed on the Digital Oper-
ator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1- in Chapter 5
User Constants.
o2-02
STOP key dur-
ing control cir-
cuit terminal
operation
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
0: Disabled (When the run
command is issued from and
external terminal, the Stop
Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
Oper STOP
Key
o2-03
User constant
initial value
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the
set constants as user initial
values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded
user initial values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
User Defaults
o2-05
Frequency ref-
erence setting
method selec-
tion
When the frequency reference is
set on the Digital Operator fre-
quency reference monitor, sets
whether the Enter Key is neces-
sary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference
without Enter Key operation.
Operator
M.O.P.
o2-07
Cumulative
operation time
setting
Sets the cumulative operation
time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from
the set values.
0 to
65535
0 hr No A A A A A
Elapsed Time
Set
o2-10
Fan operation
time setting
Set the initial value of the fan
operation time using time units.
The operation time accumulates
from the set value.
0 to
65535
0 hr No A A A A A
Fan ON Time
Set
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-134
Setting Precautions
If selecting monitor constants other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U1-
03 (Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01, and then set o1-02 to 4.
Disabling the STOP Key
If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the stop command from the STOP Key on the Digital
Operator is an emergency stop command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency stop commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. You cannot switch Inverter ref-
erence inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator, b1-01 (Reference Selection), or b1-02
(Operation Method Selection).
Initializing Changed Constant Values
You can save to the Inverter constant set values that you have changed as constant initial values. Change the
set values from the Inverter factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory. To
clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you
can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter
Key.
For example, enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP Key to
increment the frequency reference by 0.01 Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s
thereafter. Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s
after that. The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys
are released.
Clearing Cumulative Operation Time
Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(inverter Operating Time).
Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time
Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).

6-135
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile
memory).
• Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
o3-01
Copy function
selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
Copy Function
Sel
o3-02
Read permitted
selection 0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
Copy Allow-
able

6-136
Storing Inverter Set Values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method.
An error may occur while saving to memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display.
Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Oper-
ator Copy Function.)
Table 6.1 READ Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display Explanation
1 Press the Menu Key, and select advanced programming mode.
2 Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
3
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants setting display.
5 Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start.
7 If the READ function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
Error Display Meaning
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
Initialization
-ADV-
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
COPY Function
-ADV-
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3-01= 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3-01= 1 *0*
READ
-ADV-
INV→OP READING
READ
-ADV-
READ COMPLETE
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3 - 01=0
COPY SELECT
*0*
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
IFE
READ DATA ERROR

6-137
Select READ Permitted
Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you
set o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write
operation will be stopped.
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the follow-
ing method.
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write
operation.
Table 6.2 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
1 Press the MENU Key, and select advanced programming mode.
3
Key.
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants setting display.
6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start.
7 If the COPY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
RDE
DATA ERROR
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
Initialization
-ADV-
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
COPY Function
-ADV-
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3-01= 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3-01= 2
OP→INV WRITE
*0*
COPY
-ADV-
OP→INV COPYING
COPY
-ADV-
COPY COMPLETE
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3 - 01=0
COPY SELECT
*0*

6-138
During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the 03-01 display.
Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator
Copy Function.)
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, make the settings using the following
method.
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in
the Digital Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control
method stored in the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital
Operator shows they are different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Inverter constant area
and the sum value of the Digital Operator constant area shows they are different.
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
1 Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode.
3
Key.
4 Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the function setting display.
CPE
ID UNMATCH
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATC
CRE
CONTROL UNMATCH
CYE
COPY ERROR
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
** Main Menu **
-ADV-
Programming
Initialization
-ADV-
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
COPY Function
-ADV-
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3-01= 0
COPY SELECT
*0*

6-139
An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 constant groups, and refer to drive mode, using
the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selec-
tion) to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write constants from the digital operator when the terminal
that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the frequency reference is
prohibited. You can, however, reference constants.
6
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will
start.
7 If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
• Inverter product and type • Inverter capacity and voltage
• Software number • Control method
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3-01= 3 *0*
VERIFY
-ADV-
DATA VERIFYING
VERIFY
-ADV-
VERIFY COMPLETE
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
o3 - 01=0
COPY SELECT
*0*
VYE
VERIFY ERROR

6-140
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or
change the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in
combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A1-01
Constant
access level
Used to set the constant access
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring
drive mode and setting A1-01
and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set
in both quick programming
mode and advanced
programming (A) mode.)
Access Level
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A1-01
Constant
access level
Used to set the constant access
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring
drive mode and setting A1-01
and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set
in both quick programming
mode and advanced
programming (A) mode.)
Access Level
A1-04
Password Password input when a password
has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some
constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-01
to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32
constants can no longer be
changed. (Programming mode
constants can be changed.)
0 to
9999
0 No A A A A AEnter Pass-
word

6-141
Setting Precautions
Constant A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET
Key and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.
Displaying User-set Constants Only
You can set and refer to constants necessary to the Inverter only, using the A2 constants (user-set constants)
and A1-01 (Constants Access Level).
Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. You can
set and refer to constants set in A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 only, using advanced programming mode.
Related Constants
A1-05
Password set-
ting
Used to set a four digit number as
the password.
This constant is not usually dis-
played. When the Password (A1-
04) is displayed, hold down the
RESET Key and press the Menu
Key and the password will be dis-
played.
0 to
9999
0 No A A A A A
Select Pass-
word
Con-
stant
Number
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting
constants
Used to set the constant numbers
that can be set/read. Maximum
32.
Effective when the Constant
Access Level (A1-01) is set to
User Program (1). Constants set
in constants A2-01 to A2-32 can
be set/read in programming mode.
b1-01 to
o3-02
- No A A A A A
User Param 1
to 32
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-142
Options
This section explains the Inverter option functions.
Performing Speed Control with PG
This section explains functions with V/f control with PG.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F1-01
PG constant Sets the number of PG (pulse gen-
erator or encoder) pulses.
Sets the number of pulses per
motor revolution.
0 to
60000
600 No No Q No Q No
PG Pulses/Rev
F1-02
Operation
selection at PG
open circuit
(PGO)
Sets the PG disconnection stop-
ping method.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using Deceleration Time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect
the motor or machinery, do not
normally make this setting.)
0 to 3 1 No No A No A No
PG Fdbk Loss
Sel
F1-03
Operation
selection at
overspeed (OS)
Sets the stopping method when an
overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect
the motor or machinery, do not
normally make this setting.)
0 to 3 1 No No A No A A
PG Overspeed
Sel
F1-04
Operation
selection at
deviation
Sets the stopping method when a
speed deviation (DEV) fault
occurs.
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is
displayed and operation
continued.)
0 to 3 3 No No A No A A
PG Deviation
Sel
F1-05
PG rotation 0: Phase A leads with forward
run command. (Phase B leads
with reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with forward
run command. (Phase A leads
with reverse run command.)
0 or 1 0 No No A No A No
PG Rotation Sel

Options
6-143
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Flux vector control factory settings are given.)
F1-06
PG division rate
(PG pulse mon-
itor)
Sets the division ratio for the PG
speed control card pulse output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m (n=0 or
1 m=1 to 32)
This constant is only effective
when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio set-
tings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1.
1 to 132 1 No No A No A No
PG Output
Ratio
F1-07
Integral value
during accel/
decel enable/
disable
Sets integral control during accel-
eration/deceleration to either
enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral
function isn't used while
accelerating or decelerating; it
is used at constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral function
is used at all times.)
0 or 1 0 No No A No No No
PG Ramp PI/I
Sel
F1-08
Overspeed
detection level
Sets the overspeed detection
method.
Frequencies above that set for F1-
08 (set as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency) that
continue to exceed this frequency
for the time set in F1-09 are
detected as overspeed faults.
0 to 120 115% No No A No A A
PG Overspd
Level
F1-09
Overspeed
detection delay
time 0.0 to
2.0
0.0 s* No No A No A A
PG Overspd
Time
F1-10
Excessive
speed deviation
detection level
Sets the speed deviation detection
method.
Any speed deviation above the
F1-10 set level (set as a percent-
age of the maximum output fre-
quency) that continues for the
time set in F1-11 is detected as a
speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the difference
between actual motor speed and
the reference command speed.
0 to 50 10% No No A No A A
PG Deviate
Level
F1-11
Excessive
speed deviation
detection delay
time
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 s No No A No A A
PG Deviate
Time
F1-12
Number of PG
gear teeth 1
Sets the number of teeth on the
gears if there are gears between
the PG and the motor.
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if
either of these constants is set to
0.
0 to
1000
0 No No A No No No
PG # Gear
Teeth1
F1-13
Number of PG
gear teeth 2
0 No No A No No No
PG # Gear
Teeth2
F1-14
PG open-cir-
cuit detection
time
Used to set the PG disconnection
detection time. PGO will be
detected if the detection time con-
tinues beyond the set time.
0.0 to
10.0
2.0 s No No A No A No
PGO Detect
Time
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-144
Using PG Speed Control Card
There are four types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in V/f control with PG.
• PG-A2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collector or complimentary outputs.
• PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
• PG-D2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
• PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
There are two types of PG Speed Control Cards that can be used for flux vector control.
• PG-B2: A/B phase pulse inputs, complementary outputs
• PG-X2: A/B/Z phase pulse inputs, line driver outputs
For the connection diagram, refer to page 2-32.
Setting Number of PG Pulses
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation. Set the number of A-phase or B-
phase pulses per 1 motor rotation in F1-01.
Matching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction
Constant F1-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating for-
wards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven. Make this setting when using PG-B2 or PG-X2.
Fig 6.75 PG Rotation Direction Setting
Generally, PG is A-phase driven when rotation is clockwise (CW) see from the input axis. Also, motor rota-
tion is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the output side when forward commands are output. Conse-
quently, when motor rotation is forward, PG is normally A-phase driven when a load is applied, and B-phase
driven when a load is not applied.
Inverter
Forward
command
Motor PG (encoder)
Pulse output
A-phase driven when set value = 0 B-phase driven when set value = 1
A-phase A-phase
B-phase B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor (PG used: Samtack (KK))
Forward
command
Motor output axis rotates
counter-clockwise during In-
verter forward command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
Yaskawa standard PG used is A-phase driven (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.

Options
6-145
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor
Set the number of PG gear teeth in F1-12 and F1-13. If there are gears between the motor and PG, you can
operate the motor by setting the number of gear teeth.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated
using the following formula.
No. of motor rotations (min−1.) = No. of input pulses from PC × 60 / F1-01 × F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on load
side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Matching Motor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration to Frequency Reference
You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration when using
flux vector control.
To match the motor speed as closely as possible to the frequency reference even during acceleration and decel-
eration, set F1-07 to 1.
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse
monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the lower place 2 digits.
The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are monitor outputs.
Detecting PG Open Circuit
Select the stopping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit (PGO) detection
time.
When the Inverter is operating with the frequency reference set to 1% minimum (except when operating on
direct current), if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F1-14, PGO is detected.
Detecting Motor Overspeed
An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. An overspeed (OS) is
detected when a frequency that exceeds the set value in F1-08 continues for longer than the time set in F1-09.
After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference
An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual
motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the
speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4-02, if a speed deviation great than the
set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.
IMPORTANT
If F1-01 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and decelera-
tion. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-01 to 0.
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 =
n m

6-146
Using Digital Output Cards
There are two types of Inverter digital output cards:
• DO-02C
Relay contact output (DPDT contact)
• DO-08
6 photocoupler output channels (shared commons)
2 (independent) relay contact output channels (NC contact)
Fig 6.76 Digital Output Cards
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F5-01
Channel 1 out-
put selection
Effective when a Digital Output
Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multi-func-
tion output to be output.
DO Ch1 Select
F5-02
Channel 2 out-
put selection
Effective when a Digital Output
Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.
DO Ch2 Select
F5-03
Channel 3 out-
put selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
DO Ch3 Select
F5-04
Channel 4 out-
put selection
DO Ch4 Select
F5-05
Channel 5 out-
put selection
DO Ch5 Select
F5-06
Channel 6 out-
put selection
0 to 37 37 No A A A A A
DO Ch6 Select
TD
NC
NC
NO
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
CH1
CH2
Relay contact
+24 V
3CN 3CN
Inverter
control
panel
DO-02C Digital Output Card
Photocoupler TD5
TD6
TD7
TD8
TD9
TD1
TD2
TD3
TD4
TD10
TD11
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
COM (0 V common)
Relay contact
DO-08 Digital Output Card
3CN3CN
Inverter
control
panel
Photocoupler

Options
6-147
Setting Output Items for the DO-02C Digital Output Card
If using DO-02C Digital Output Card, set the output items using F5-01 and F5-02.
Setting Output Items for the DO-08 Digital Output Card
If using DO-08 Digital Output Card, select one of the following three output modes according to the setting in
F5-09.
F5-09 Set to 0
F5-07
Channel 7 out-
put selection
0 to 37 0F No A A A A A
DO Ch7 Select
F5-08
Channel 8 out-
put selection
0 to 37 0F No A A A A A
DO Ch8 Select
F5-09
DO-08 output
mode selection
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
DO-08 Selec-
tion
Set Value
Terminal
Number
Output Details
0: 8 separate
outputs
TD5-TD11 Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
TD6-TD11 Overvoltage (OV)
TD7-TD11 Inverter overload (OL2)
TD8-TD11 Fuse blown (PUF)
TD9-TD11 Overspeed (OS)
TD10-TD11 Inverter overheated (OH1) or motor overload (OL1)
TD1-TD2 Zero speed detected
TD3-TD4 Speed agreement
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2

6-148
F5-09 Set to 1
The following table shows the code outputs.
F5-09 Set to 2
Output depends on the settings in F5-01 to F5-08.
Using an Analog Reference Card
When using a AI-14B or A1-14U Analog Reference Card, set constant b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3
(Option Card).
AI-14B provides 3 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy (and a sign bit). The func-
tion of each channel is determined by the setting of F2-01.
AI-14U provides 2 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy. Channel 1 is a voltage
input and channel 2 is a current input. The sum of channels 1 and 2 is a frequency input. F2-01 does not need
to be set for the AI-14U.
Set Value
Terminal
Number
Output Details
1: Binary code
output
TD5-TD11 bit 0
Encoded output
(Refer to table below)
TD6-TD11 bit 1
TD7-TD11 bit 2
TD8-TD11 bit 3
TD9-TD11 Zero speed detected
TD10-TD11 Speed agreement
TD1-TD2 Operating
TD3-TD4 Minor fault
Bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0
Output Details
Bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0
Output Details
0000 No error 1000 External fault (EFxx)
0001 Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF) 1001 Controller error (CPFxx)
0010 Overvoltage (OV) 1010 Motor overload (OL1)
0011 Inverter overload (OL2) 1011 Not used
0100 Inverter overheated (OH, OH1) 1100 Power loss (UV1, UV2, or UV3)
0101 Overspeed (OS) 1101 Speed deviation (DEV)
0110 Fuse blown (PUF) 1110 PG open circuit (PGO)
0111
Dynamic braking resistor (RH)
Injection brake transistor error (RR)
1111 Not used

Options
6-149
Related Constants
Setting Precautions
Always set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 1 (control circuit terminal) when using the AI-14B for three chan-
nels of independent inputs. When this is done, H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact inputs) cannot be set to
2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Using a Digital Reference Card
When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card, set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3 (Option Card).
The DI-16H2 can be used to set a frequency using a 16-bit digital reference. The DI-08 can be used to set a
frequency using a 8-bit digital reference.
Related Constants
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F2-01
Bi-polar or uni-
polar input
selection
Sets the functions for channel 1 to
3 that are effective when the AI-
14B Analog Reference Card is
used.
0: 3-channel individual (Chan-
nel 1: terminal A1, Channel 2:
terminal A2, Channel 3: termi-
nal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Addition
values are the frequency refer-
ence)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01.
In this case the multi-function
input “Option/Inverter selection”
cannot be used.
AI-14 Input Sel
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F3-01
Digital input
option
Sets the Digital Reference Card
input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5-digit
input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the DI-
16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher,
the input will be BCD, and the
units will change to the o1-03 set-
ting.
DI Input

6-150
Selecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card
The frequency reference from the DI-16H2 Card is determined by the setting of F3-01 and the 12/16-bit
switch on the Option card. The possible settings are listed in the following table.
o1-03
Frequency units
of reference set-
ting and moni-
tor
Sets the units that will be set and
displayed for the frequency refer-
ence and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
min−1 units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
Example: When the max. output
frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
0 to
39999
0 No A A A A A
Display Scaling
Con-
stant
Number
Name
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
Control Methods
Display V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-
tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Set 4-digit number
point.
to display.

Options
6-151
• The maximum frequency (100% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting: 6 or 7)
and all bits are 1.
• Setting F3-01 to 6 is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this setting, a frequency from 0.00 to
399.8 Hz can be set in BCD. The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set. Also,
the digit starts from 0, so the minimum setting is 0.02 Hz.
Selecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI-08 Digital Reference Card
The frequency reference from a DI-08 Card is determined by the setting of F3-01, as shown in the following
table.
Terminal Pin No.
12-bit Binary
with Sign
16-bit Binary
with Sign
3-digit BCD with
Sign
4-digit BCD with
Sign
4-digit BCD with-
out Sign
F3-01 = 7
S1: 12 bit
F3-01 = 7
S1: 16 bit
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 12 bit
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 16 bit
F3-01 = 6
S1: 16 bit
TC1
1 Bit 1 (20
) Bit 1 (20
) 1
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
1
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
2
BDC digit 1
(2 to 9)
2 Bit 1 (21
) Bit 1 (21
) 2 2 4
3 Bit 1 (22
) Bit 1 (22
) 4 4 8
4 Bit 1 (23) Bit 1 (23) 8 8 1
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
5 Bit 1 (24
) Bit 1 (24
) 1
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
1
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
2
6 Bit 1 (25
) Bit 1 (25
) 2 2 4
7 Bit 1 (26
) Bit 1 (26
) 4 4 8
8 Bit 1 (27
) Bit 1 (27
) 8 8 1
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
9 Bit 1 (28) Bit 1 (28) 1
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
1
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
2
10 Bit 1 (29
) Bit 1 (29
) 2 2 4
TC2
1 Bit 1 (210
) Bit 1 (210
) 4 4 8
2 Bit 1 (211
) Bit 1 (211
) 8 8 1
BDC digit 4
(0 to 9)
3 - Bit 1 (212
) - 1
BDC digit 4
(0 to 9)
2
4 - Bit 1 (213
) - 2 4
5 - Bit 1 (214) - 4 8
6 - Bit 1 (215) - 8 1 BDC digit 5
(0 to 3)7 Sign signal (0: Forward, 1: Reverse) 2
8 SET (read) signal (1: Read)
9 Input signal common (0 V)
TC3 Shield wire connection terminal

6-152
The DI-08 will not function if F3-01 is set to 6
Selecting the Digital Reference
The range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of o1-03 and F3-01. The
information monitored in U1-01 (Frequency reference) will also change.
DI-16H2 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-16H2, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
Terminal Pin No.
8-bit Binary with Sign 2-digit BCD with Sign
F3-01 = 7 F3-01 = 0 to 5
TC
1 Bit 1 (20
) 1
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
2 Bit 1 (21
) 2
3 Bit 1 (22
) 4
4 Bit 1 (23) 8
5 Bit 1 (24
) 1
BDC digit 2
(0 to 15)
6 Bit 1 (25
) 2
7 Bit 1 (26
) 4
8 Bit 1 (27
) 8
9 Sign signal
10 SET (read) signal
11 Reference common signal (0 V)
o1-03 F3-01
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
Reference Setting
Range
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0 or 1
0
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1% -110 to 110%
0.01 Hz 0.01%
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1% -110 to 110%
1
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1% -110.0 to 110.0%
2
3
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz -400 to 400 Hz
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz -400 to 400 Hz
4
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz -159.9 to 159.9 Hz
5
6 16 bits 5-digit BCD without sign, 0.01 Hz 000.00 to 399.98 Hz
7
12 bits 12-bit binary with sign, 100%/4095 -4095 to 4095
16 bits 16-bit binary with sign, 100%/30000 -33000 to 33000

Options
6-153
DI-08 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-08, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
2 to 39 -
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm -1599 to 1599 rpm 1 rpm
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm -15999 to 15999 rpm 1 rpm
40 to
39999
- 12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4-
digit setting of o1-03)
-4095 to 4095
5th digit of o1-03 set-
ting:
X = 0, unit: 1
X = 1, unit: 0.1
X = 2, unit: 0.01
X = 3, unit: 0.001
- 16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4-
digit setting of o1-03)
-10999 to 10999
(when o1-03 = 9999)
10000
x = 1
to 3
- 16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/10000 -11000 to 11000
F3-01 Reference Input Mode Reference Setting Range
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0 2-digit BCD with sign, 1% -110 to 110%
0.01 Hz 0.01%
1 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1% -15.9 to 15.9%
2 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01% -1.59 to 1.59%
3 2-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz -159 to 159 Hz
4 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz -15.9 to 15.9 Hz
5 2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz -1.59 to 1.59 Hz
6 -
7
12-bit binary with sign, 100%/
4095
-255 to 255
o1-03 F3-01
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
Reference Setting
Range
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1

Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor prob-
lems and countermeasures.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................7-17

7-2
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection,
alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing
the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping
method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the fault reset signal.
• Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
OC
Over Cur-
rent
Overcurrent
The Inverter output current exceeded
the overcurrent detection level. (200%
of rated current)
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insu-
lation, or a damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the accelera-
tion/deceleration time is too short.
• A special-purpose motor or motor
with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at
the Inverter output.
Reset the fault after correcting its
cause.
GF
Ground
Fault
Ground Fault
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approxi-
mately 50% of the Inverter rated out-
put current.
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter
output. (A ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insula-
tion, or a damaged cable.)
cause.
PUF
Main IBGT
Fuse
Blown
Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
The output transistor has failed
because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit
between the following terminals. A
short-circuit will damage the output
transistor:
B1 ( 3) ←→ U, V, W
←→ U, V, W
Replace the Inverter after correct-
ing the cause.
OV
DC Bus
Fuse Open
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: Approx. 410 V
The deceleration time is too short and
the regenerative energy from the
motor is too large.
Increase the deceleration time or
connect a braking resistor (or
Braking Resistor Unit).
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it's within
specifications.

7-3
UV1
DC Bus
Undervolt
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below
the Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05).
• An open-phase occurred with the
input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input
power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
cause.
UV2
CTL PS
Undervolt
Control Power Fault
The control power supply voltage
dropped.
-
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
UV3
MC
Answer-
back
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault
A fault occurred in the surge preven-
tion circuit.
-
off and on.
continues to occur.
PF
Input Pha
Loss
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates
unusually (not when regenerating).
This fault is detected when L8-05 is
set to “Enabled.”
• An open-phase occurred in the input
power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input
power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases
is bad.
cause.
LF
Output Pha
Loss
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
Inverter output.
This fault is detected when L8-07 is
set to “Enabled.”
• There is a broken wire in the output
cable.
• There is a broken wire in the motor
winding.
• The output terminals are loose.
cause.
The motor being used has a capacity
less than 5% of the Inverter's maxi-
mum motor capacity.
Check the motor and Inverter
capacity.
OH
(OH1)
Heatsnk
Overtemp
(Heatsnk
MAX
Temp)
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cool-
ing fins exceeded the setting in L8-02
or 105°C.
The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.
There is a heat source nearby. Remove the heat source.
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
our sales representative.)Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
(18.5 kW or higher)
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
OH3
Motor
Overheat 1
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Inverter will stop or will continue
to operate according to the setting of
L1-03.
The motor has overheated.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceler-
ation, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
OH4
Motor
Overheat 2
Motor Overheating Fault
The Inverter will stop according to the
setting of L1-04.
(E2-01).
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)

7-4
RH
DynBrk
Resistor
Installed Braking Resistor Over-
heating
Braking resistor protection function
set in L8-01 has operated.
The deceleration time is too short and
the regenerative energy from the
motor is too large.
• Reduce the load, increase the
deceleration time, or reduce the
motor speed.
• Change to a Braking Resistor
Unit.
RR
DynBrk
Transistr
Internal Braking Transistor Fault
The braking transistor is not operating
properly.
-
off and on.
continues to occur.
OL1
Motor
Overloaded
Motor Overload
The motor overload protection func-
tion has operated based on the internal
electronic thermal value.
The load is too heavy. The accelera-
tion time, deceleration time, and cycle
time are too short.
The V/f characteristics voltage is too
high.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is
incorrect.
(E2-01).
OL2
Inv Over-
loaded
Inverter Overload
The Inverter overload protection func-
tion has operated based on the internal
electronic thermal value.
The load is too heavy. The accelera-
tion time, deceleration time and cycle
time are too short.
The V/f characteristics voltage is too
high.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Replace the Inverter with one that
has a larger capacity.
OL3
Overtorque
Det 1
Overtorque Detected 1
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropri-
ate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
OL4
Overtorque
Det 2
Overtorque Detected 2
setting in L6-06.
-
• Make sure that the current set-
ting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
overtorque.
OL7
HSB-OL
High-slip Braking OL
The output frequency did not change
for longer than the time set in N3-04.
The inertia returned to the load is too
large.
• Make sure the load is an inertial
load.
• Set the system so that the decel-
eration time that does not pro-
duce 0 V is 120 s or less.
UL3
Undertorq
Det 1
Undertorque Detected 1
There has been a current less than the
setting in L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropri-
ate.
overtorque.

7-5
UL4
Undertorq
Det 2
Undertorque Detected 2
setting in L6-06.
-
• Make sure that the current set-
ting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
overtorque.
OS
Overspeed
Det
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
setting in F1-09.
Overshooting/Undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and
reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't
appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
PGO
PG Open
PG Disconnection Detected
PG pulses were input when the
Inverter was outputting a frequency.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Fix the broken/disconnected wir-
ing.
The PG is wired incorrectly. Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG. Supply power to the PG properly.
-
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
DEV
Speed
Deviation
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11.
The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration
time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time
and deceleration time.
The load is locked. Check the mechanical system.
appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
-
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
CF
Out of
Control
Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continu-
ously for 3 seconds or longer during a
deceleration stop during open-loop
vector control 1.
Motor constant settings are not cor-
rect.
• Check the motor constants.
• Perform autotuning.
An error occurred in the speed estima-
tion calculation for open-loop vector
control 2.
Motor constant settings are not cor-
rect.
Run command was received when the
motor was coasting.
• Perform autotuning.
• Input the run command after the
motor stops.
• Set b3-01 (Speed search selec-
tion) to 1 or 3 (speed search
enabled at startup).
• Refer to Precautions When
Using Open-loop Vector Con-
trol 2 on page 10-4.
FBL
Feedback
Loss
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feed-
back input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
- -

7-6
EF0
Opt Exter-
nal Flt
External fault input from Communi-
cations Option Card
-
Check the Communications
Option Card and communications
signals.
EF3
Ext Fault
S3
External fault (Input terminal 3)
An “external fault” was input from a
multi-function input terminal.
• Reset external fault inputs to the
• Remove the cause of the exter-
nal fault.
EF4
Ext Fault
S4
EF5
Ext Fault
S5
EF6
Ext Fault
S6
EF7
Ext Fault
S7
EF8
Ext Fault
S8
EF9
Ext Fault
S9
EF10
Ext Fault
S10
EF11
Ext Fault
S11
EF12
Ext Fault
S12
SVE
Zero Servo
Fault
Zero Servo Fault
The rotation position moved during
zero servo operation.
The torque limit is too small. Increase the limit.
The load torque is too large. Reduce the load torque.
- Check for signal noise.
OPR
Oper Dis-
connect
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator
was broken during operation for a
RUN command from the Digital
Operator.
-
Check the connection to the Digi-
tal Operator.
CE
Memobus
Com Err
MEMOBUS Communications Error
A normal reception was not possible
for 2 s or longer after control data was
received once.
-
Check the communications
devices and communications sig-
nals.

7-7
BUS
Option
Com Err
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected
during a run command or while setting
a frequency reference from a Commu-
nications Option Card.
-
Check the communications
devices and communications sig-
nals.
E-15
SI-F/G
Com Err
SI-F/G Communications Error
Detected
when a run command or frequency
reference was set from an Option Card
and continuous operation was set for
the E-15 operation selection.
-
Check the communications sig-
nals.
E-10
SI-F/G
CPU down
SI-F/G Option Card CPU Failure
SI-F/G Option Card operation failed.
Digital Operator connection is faulty.
Disconnect and then reconnect the
Digital Operator.
Inverter control circuit is faulty. Replace the Inverter.
CPF00
CPF
Digital Operator Communications
Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5
seconds after the power was turned
on.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't
connected properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
CPU External RAM Fault
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuits were destroyed. Replace the Inverter.
CPF01
CPF01
Digital Operator Communications
Error 2
After communications were estab-
lished, there was a communications
error with the Digital Operator for
more than 2 seconds.
The Digital Operator isn't connected
properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
CPF02
BB Circuit
Err
Baseblock circuit error
-
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.
CPF03
EEPROM
Error
EEPROM error
-
and on again.
CPF04
Internal
A/D Err
CPU internal A/D converter error
-
and on again.
CPF05
External
A/D Err
CPU internal A/D converter error
-
and on again.
CPF06
Option
error
Option Card connection error
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Replace the Option Card or the
Inverter.

7-8
CPF07
RAM-Err
ASIC internal RAM fault
-
and on again.
CPF08
WAT-Err
Watchdog timer fault
-
and on again.
CPF09
CPU-Err
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault
-
and on again.
CPF10
ASIC-Err
ASIC version fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter.
CPF20
Option
A/D error
Communications Option Card A/D
converter error
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Option Card's A/D converter is
faulty.
Replace the Communications
Option Card.
CPF21
Option
CPU down
Communications Option Card self
diagnostic error
Communications Option Card fault. Replace the Option Card.
CPF22
Option
Type Err
model code error
CPF23
Option
DPRAM
Err
DPRAM error

7-9
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The
system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm is output from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-
03).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
EF
(blinking)
External
Fault
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and reverse run com-
mands have been ON for more than
0.5 s.
-
Check the sequence of the forward and
reverse run commands.
Since the rotational direction is
unknown, the motor will be deceler-
ated to a stop when this minor fault
occurs.
UV
(blinking)
DC Bus
Under-
volt
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was
below the Undervoltage Detection
Level Setting (L2-05).
• The surge current limiting contactor
opened.
• The control power supply voltage
when below the CUV level.
See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3
faults in the previous table.
See corrective actions for UV1, UV2,
and UV3 faults in the previous table.
OV
(blinking)
DC Bus
Overvolt
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
the overvoltage detection level.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it's within
specifications.
OH
(blinking)
Heat-
sink
Over-
temp
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cool-
ing fins exceeded the setting in L8-02.
The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.
There is a heat source nearby. Remove the heat source
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
Yaskawa representative.)
OH2
(blinking)
Over
Heat 2
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter over-
heating alarm signal) was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
-
Clear the multi-function input termi-
nal's overheating alarm input.
OH3
(blinking)
Motor
Over-
heat 1
Motor overheating
E was set for H3-09 and the motor
temperature thermistor input exceeded
the alarm detection level.
length of the acceleration, decelera-
tion, and cycle times.
Check the motor temperature input on
terminals A1 and A2.
OL3
(blinking)
Over-
torque
Det 1
Overtorque 1
setting in L6-03.
-
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.

7-10
OL4
(blinking)
Over-
torque
Det 2
Overtorque 2
setting in L6-06.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
appropriate.
UL3
(blinking)
Under-
torq Det
1
Undertorque 1
setting in L6-03.
-
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
UL4
(blinking)
Under-
torq Det
2
Undertorque 2
setting in L6-06.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
appropriate.
OS
(blinking)
Over-
speed
Det
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
setting in F1-09.
Overshooting/undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and refer-
ence gain.
appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09.
PGO
(blinking)
PG Open
The PG is disconnected
The Inverter is outputting a frequency,
but PG pulses aren't being input.
There is a break in the PG wiring. Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly. Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG. Supply power to the PG properly.
DEV
(blinking)
Speed
Devia-
tion
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11.
The load is too large. Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and decelera-
tion time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time and
deceleration time.
The load is locked. Check the mechanical system.
appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-11.
EF0
Opt
External
Flt
External fault detected for Commu-
nications Card other than SI-K2
Continuing operation was specified
for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external
fault was input from the Option Card.
- Remove the cause of the external fault.
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)

7-11
EF3
(blinking)
ExtFault
S3
External fault (Input terminal S3)
An external fault was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
• Reset external fault inputs to the
• Remove the cause of the external
fault.
EF4
(blinking)
ExtFault
S4
EF5
(blinking)
ExtFault
S5
EF6
(blinking)
ExtFault
S6
EF7
(blinking)
ExtFault
S7
EF8
(blinking)
ExtFault
S8
EF9
(blinking)
ExtFault
S9
EF10
(blinking)
ExtFault
S10
EF11
(blinking)
ExtFault
S11
EF12
(blinking)
ExtFault
S12
FBL
(blinking)
Feed-
back
Loss
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feed-
back input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
- -
CE
(blinking)
MEMO-
BUS
Com Err
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal reception was not possible for
2 s or longer after received control
data.
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.

7-12
BUS
(blinking)
Option
Com Err
Option Card Communications
Error
A communications error occurred in a
mode where the run command or a
frequency reference is set from an
Communications Option Card.
-
and signals.
CALL
(blinking)
Com
Call
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally
received when power was turned ON.
-
and signals.
E-15
SI-F/G
Com Err
SI-F/G Communications Error
Detected
when a run command or frequency
reference was set from an Option Card
and continuous operation was set for
the E-15 operation selection.
- Check the communications signals.

7-13
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It
won't be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault
contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
errors.
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Display Meaning Incorrect settings
OPE01
kVA Selec-
tion
Incorrect Inverter
capacity setting
The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa repre-
sentative.)
OPE02
Limit
Constant setting range
error
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range. When this error is dis-
played, press the ENTER Key to display U1-34 (OPE fault constant).
OPE03
Terminal
Multi-function input
selection error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-
10) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used
together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were
selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set fre-
quency) were selected at the same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control Mode
Selection (b5-01) was enabled.
• Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time.
• The emergency stop command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
OPE05
Sequence
Select
Option Card selection
error
The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an Option Card isn't connected (C option).
OPE06
PG Opt Miss-
ing
Control method selec-
tion error
V/f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1-02 to 1, but a PG Speed
Control Card isn't connected.
OPE07
Analog
Selection
Multi-function analog
input selection error
The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID func-
tion selection.
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2
b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
OPE08 Constant selection error
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A
function used only with open-loop vector control was selected for V/f control. When
this error is displayed, press the ENTER Key to display U1-34 (OPE fault constant).
OPE09
PID control selection
error
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Set-
ting
V/f data setting error
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB) ≥ E3-07 (FMIN)

7-14
OPE11
Carr Freq/
On-Delay
Constant setting error
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
• C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
> the Carrier Frequency Gain(C6-05)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.
• C6-01 is 0 and C6-02 is 2 to E.
• C6-01 is 1 and C6-02 is 7 to E.
ERR
EEPROM
R/W Err
EEPROM write error
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)
Display Meaning Incorrect settings

7-15
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor
will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and
alarm output will not function.
Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning
Data Invalid Motor data error
There is an error in the data input for
autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship
between the motor output and the motor
rated current.
The is an error between the no-load cur-
rent setting and the input motor rated
current (when autotuning for only line-
to-line resistance is performed for vector
control).
• Check the input data.
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and
motor.
• Check the motor rated current and no-
load current.
Minor Fault Alarm
A minor fault occurred during autotun-
ing (xxx). • Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.STOP key STOP key input
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel
autotuning.
Resistance
Line-to-line resis-
tance error Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
The results of autotuning has exceeded
the setting range for a user constant.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
No-Load Current No-load current error
Rated Slip Rated slip error
Accelerate
Acceleration error
(detected only for
rotational autotuning)
The motor did not accelerate in the spec-
ified time.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02 (Reverse
Torque Limits) if they are low.
Motor Speed
Motor speed error
(detected only for
rotational autotuning)
The torque reference was too high
(100%) during acceleration (for open-
loop vector control only).
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Check the input data (particularly the
number of PG pulses and the number
of motor poles).
I-det. Circuit
Current detection
error
The current flow exceeded the motor
rated current.
Check the current detection circuit,
motor wiring, current detector, and
installation methods.
The detected current sign was the oppo-
site of what it should be.
There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.
Leak Inductance
Leakage inductance
error
Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
Check motor wiring.
V/f Over Setting
V/f settings exces-
sive*
The torque reference exceeded 100%
and the no-load torque exceeded 70%
during autotuning.
• Check and correct the settings.
• Disconnect the load from the motor.

7-16
* Displayed after autotuning has been completed.
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following
table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an
error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output
and alarm output will not function.
Saturation
Motor core satura-
tion error (detected
only for rotational
autotuning)*
The results of autotuning has exceeded
the setting range for a user constant so a
temporary setting was made for the
motor core saturation coefficient.
• Check motor wiring.
Rated FLA Alm
Rated current setting
alarm* The rated current is set high.
Check the input data (particularly the
motor output current and motor rated
current).
Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Func-
tion
Read
PRE
READ
IMPOSSIBLE
Digital Operator
write-protected
o3-01 was set to 1 to write a constant
when the Digital Operator was write-
protected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing con-
stants with the Digital Operator.
IFE
READ DATA
ERROR
Illegal read data
The read data length does not agree. Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
Replace the Digital Operator.The write data is incorrect.
RDE
DATA ERROR
Illegal write status
An attempted write of a constant to
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed.
A low Inverter voltage has been
detected.
Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.
Copy
CPE
ID UNMATCH
ID not matched
The Inverter product code or software
number is different.
Use the copy function for the same
product code and software number.
VAE
INV. KVA
UNMATCH
Inverter capacity
matched
The capacity of the Inverter being
copied and the capacity in the Digital
Operator are different.
Inverter capacity.
CRE
CONTROL
UNMATCH
Control method
matched
The control method of the Inverter
being copied and the control method
in the Digital Operator are different.
control method.
CYE
COPY ERROR
Verify error
The constant written to the Inverter
was compared with the constant in the
Digital Operator and they were differ-
ent.
Retry the copy.
CSE
SUM CHECK
ERROR
Checksum error
The checksum in the Inverter constant
area was compared with the checksum
in the Digital Operator constant area
and they were different.
Retry the copy.
Verify
VYE
VERIFY
ERROR
Verify error
The Digital Operator and Inverter set-
tings do not agree.
Retry the copy and verify again.
Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning (Continued)

Troubleshooting
7-17
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the
appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if an Inverter constant cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings.
Constant write enable is input.
This occurs when “constant write enable” (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-10). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the
constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the
initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and
the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password
in constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.

7-18
If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
The motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The operation method setting is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate
when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* to switch to Digital Operator opera-
tion or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the
frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key to
display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. “-Rdy-” will be dis-
played when drive mode is entered.
IMPORTANT
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to dis-
play the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. “-Rdy-” will be displayed
when drive mode is entered.
INFO
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.

Troubleshooting
7-19
The operation method selection is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an exter-
nal operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again to return to the original setting.
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2-
wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable
for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-10, terminals S3 to
S11) to a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Selection) and H3-09
(Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) are set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current)
is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value
are correct.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost func-
tion, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
“Reverse run prohibited” is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run pro-
hibited), the Inverter will not receive reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set
b1-04 to 0.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a for-
ward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer
and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W.
INFO
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.

7-20
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
Use the following information is the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value
set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05 or H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to
be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before out-
putting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not be perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference
Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.
The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that
the set value is suitable.
A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal A1.
When 1F (frequency reference) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function
Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency ref-
erence. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision
If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function, the slip compensation limit has been
reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensa-
tion limit set in constant C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

Troubleshooting
7-21
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-
loop Vector Control Mode
The motor's rated voltage is high.
The Inverter's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input,
then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage refer-
ence value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use
a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control), or change to flux vector
control.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.
“Stall prevention during deceleration enabled” is set.
When braking resistor is connected, set constant L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking
resistor does not fully function.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider
increasing the motor capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suit-
able.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input terminal A2 Function H3-09 (set value: 10 to
12 or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
The sequence is incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration
is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output ter-
minals (M1 and Mw) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0
to 5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz). Change the
setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run
signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.

7-22
If the Motor Overheats
Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too big.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not contin-
uous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/decelera-
tion time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating
temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and
the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage
(i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that
is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V class Inverter, use a special
motor for Inverters.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning, or set the motor
constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/f control (0
or 1).
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio
If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
• Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
• Ground the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.

Troubleshooting
7-23
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Invert-
ers). It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the
carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation.
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the
carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may
indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants
C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output fre-
quency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install
rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control 1.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(torque compensation time constant), C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-02
(Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time
setting.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the control method selection (A1-
02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant), N1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain), and C3-02 (Slip
Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (constant N1-01) to 0
(disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.

7-24
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vector control.
The gain adjustment is insufficient. Adjust the various gains for speed control (ASR). If the oscillation points
overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the primary delay time constant for
speed control (ASR) in C5-06 and then readjust the gains.
If autotuning is not performed, proper performance cannot be achieved for vector control. Perform autotuning
or set the motor constants according to calculations.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I,
and D constants. (Refer to page 6-97.)
Autotuning has not been performed with vector control.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control.
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the
motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been
executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking
as follows:
• Increase the constant b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the constant b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls
Generation of 0 V (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC
injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the
constant b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise to the frequency reference.
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (con-
stant d3-04) settings are suitable.

Troubleshooting
7-25
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) × Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.

Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2

8-2
Outline of Maintenance
The maintenance period of the Inverter is as follows:
Maintenance Period: Within 18 months of shipping from the factory or within 12 months of being delivered to
the final user, whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LCD and LED indicators on
the front cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the
inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in
electric shock.
Table 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item Inspection Corrective Procedure
External terminals,
mounting bolts, connec-
tors, etc.
Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Are connectors tight? Reconnect the loose connectors.
Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2
).
PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the PCBs?
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2
).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Cooling fan
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
has the total operating time exceeded
20,000 hours?
Replace the cooling fan.
Power elements
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the elements?
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104
to 58.8 x 104
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2
).
Smoothing capacitor
Are there any irregularities, such as dis-
coloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.

8-3
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use
of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage condi-
tions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform
period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30°C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
Table 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Part Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part.
Smoothing capacitor 5 years
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Breaker relays - Determine need by inspection.
Fuses 10 years Replace with new part.
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs 5 years
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
inspection.)

8-4
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 15 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in
the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 15 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above
faces into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter.
A ir f lo w d ir e c t io n

8-5
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the con-
troller.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the
back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow faces the top of the Inverter.
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or More)
Controller bracket
Controller
Gate driver
Fan cover
Connector
Air flow direction

8-6
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the card.
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on
the card.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter operation.
Fig 8.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
IMPORTANT
Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal
card.
22
11
11
NCNCFEFE
Removing and Mounting the
Control Circuit Terminal Card

Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications..................................9-2
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices.......9-5

9-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. The voltage of the cooling fan for 200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW is three-phase, 200, 208, or 220 V at 50 Hz or 200, 208, 220, or 230 V at 60 Hz.
* 3. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-G7C 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
1.2 2.3 3.0 4.6 6.9 10 13 19 25 30 37 50 61 70 85 110 140 160
Rated output current (A) 3.2 6 8 12 18 27 34 49 66 80 96 130 160 183 224 300 358 415
Max. output voltage (V)
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
(Hz)
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz) 3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz*2
Allowable voltage fluctua-
tion
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluc-
tuation
±5%
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
DC reactor Optional Built in
12-phase rec-
tification
Not possible Possible*3
OutputratingsPowersupplycharacteristics

Standard Inverter Specifications
9-3
400 V Class
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer (optional) is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-G7C 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018
(kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
(kVA)
1.4 2.6 3.7 4.7 6.9 11 16 21 26 32
Rated output current (A) 1.8 3.4 4.8 6.2 9 15 21 27 34 42
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
tion
+ 10%, - 15%
tuation
±5%
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
DC reactor Optional Built in
12-phase rec-
tification
Not possible Possible*2
Model Number CIMR-G7C 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4132 4160 4185 4220 4300
(kW)*1 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 300
(kVA)
40 50 61 74 98 130 150 180 210 230 280 340 460
Rated output current (A) 52 65 80 97 128 165 195 240 270 302 370 450 605
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
(Hz)
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
tion
+ 10%, - 15%
tuation
±5%
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
DC reactor Built in
12-phase rec-
tification Possible*2
OutputratingsPowersupplycharacteristicsOutputratingsPowersupplycharacteristics

9-4
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
* 1. Rotational autotuning must be performed to ensure obtaining the specifications given for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 1 and 2.
* 2. When connecting a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit, set L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) to 0 (disabled). Stopping may not be pos-
sible in the specified deceleration time if this function is not disabled.
* 3. The maximum output frequency for open-loop vector control 2 is 60 Hz.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-G7C
Specification
Control method
Sine wave PWM
Flux vector control, open-loop vector control 1 or 2, V/f control without PG, V/f control with PG (switched by constant setting)
Torque characteristics 150%/0.3 Hz (Open-loop vector control 2), 150%/0 min−1 (Flux vector control)*1
Speed control range 1:200 (Open-loop vector control 2), 1:1000 (Flux vector control)*1
Speed control accuracy ±0.2% (Open-loop vector control, 25°C ± 10°C), ±0.02% (Flux vector control, 25°C ± 10°C)
Speed control response 10 Hz (Open-loop vector control 2), 30 Hz (Flux vector control)
Torque limits Provided for vector control only (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.)
Torque accuracy ±5%
Frequency control range 0.01 to 400 Hz*3
Frequency accuracy (tem-
perature characteristics)
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)
Analog references: ±0.1% (25°C ±10°C)
Frequency setting resolu-
tion
Digital references: 0.01 Hz, Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bit with no sign)
Output frequency resolu-
tion
0.001 Hz
Overload capacity and
maximum current*2 150% of rated output current per minute, 200% for 5 s
Frequency setting signal -10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
tion time
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Braking torque
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option, braking transformer built into 200 V and 400 V Class
Inverters for 15 kW or less.)*2
Main control functions
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, torque limits, 17-speed control (maximum), accelera-
tion/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning (rotational or stationary), dwell
functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for
frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving
control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, function copying, droop control, torque
control, speed/torque control switching, etc.
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
protection
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown.
Overload protection 150% of rated output current per minute, 200% for 5 s
Overvoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
Undervoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss
ridethrough
Stops for 15 ms or more.
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits.
Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Ambient operating tem-
perature
-10°C to 40°C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
10°C to 45°C (Open chassis type)
Ambient operating humid-
ity
95% max. (with no condensation)
Storage temperature - 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Application site Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude 1000 m max.
Vibration Tolerance for vibration frequency less than 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max
ControlcharacteristicsProtectivefunctionsEnvironment

Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
9-5
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the
application.
* 1. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter
must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example: NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)
* 2. The finement zero-phase reactor is manufactured by Hitachi Metals.
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose Name Model (Code) Descriptions
Protect Inverter wiring
MCCB or Ground
Fault Interrupter*1 NF
Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to pro-
tect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable
for high frequencies.
Prevents burning when
a Braking Resistor is
used.
Magnetic Contac-
tor
HI- J
Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out
when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the
coil.
Contains switching
surge
Surge Absorber DCR2-
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control
relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors
and relays near the Inverter.
Isolates I/O signals Isolator DGP
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective
against inductive noise.
Improve the input
power factor of the
Inverter
DC Reactor
AC Reactor
UZDA-
UZBA-
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All
Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher contain built-in DC reac-
tors. These are optional for Inverters of 15 kW or less.
Install DC and AC reactors for applications with a large
power supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Reduce the affects of
radio and control device
noise
Input Noise Filter
(Single phase) LNFB-
(3 phase) LNFD- HF
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power
supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter
into the power supply line. Connect as close to the
Inverter as possible.
Finemet zero-
phase reactor to
reduce radio
noise*2
F6045GB
(FIL001098)
F11080GB
(FIL001097)
Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the Inverter
input power system. Insert as close to the Inverter as pos-
sible.
Can be use on both the input side and output side.
Output Noise Fil-
ter
LF-o
Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close
to the Inverter as possible.
Enable stopping the
machine in a set time
Braking Resistor
ERF-150WJ
(R00 )
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED).
Braking Resistor
Unit
LKEB-
(75600-K 0)
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
Braking Unit
CDBR-
(72600-R 0)
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the decelera-
tion time of the motor.
Operates the Inverter
externally
VS Operator
(small plastic
Operator)
JVOP-95•
(73041-0905X- )
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF opera-
tion control to be performed by analog references from a
remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
VS Operator
(Standard steel-
plate Operator)
JVOP-96•
(73041-0906X- )
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF opera-
tion control to be performed by analog references from a
remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Digital Operator
Connection Cable
1 m cable: (72606-
WV001)
3 m cable: (72606-
WV003)
Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
Controls an Inverter
system
VS System Mod-
ule
JGSM-
A system controller that can be match to the automatic
control system to produce an optimum system configura-
tion.
Provides Inverter
momentary power loss
recovery time
Momentary Power
Loss Recovery
Unit
P00 0
(73600-P00 0)
Handles momentary power losses for the control power
supply for models 2.2 kW or less (maintains power for
2 s).
Set/monitor frequen-
cies and voltages exter-
nally.
Frequency Meter DCF-6A
Devices to set or monitor frequencies externally.
Frequency Setter RV30YN20S (2 kΩ)
Frequency Setter
Knob
CM-3S
Output Voltmeter SCF-12NH
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for
use with a PWM Inverter.
Correct frequency refer-
ence input, frequency
meter, ammeter scales
Variable Resistor
Board for Fre-
quency Reference
2 kΩ (ETX003270)
20 kΩ (ETX003120)
Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a fre-
quency reference.
Frequency Meter
Scale Correction
Resistor
(RH000850) Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters.
Power supply
MCCB or
ground fault
interrupter
Magnetic
contactor
AC reactor to
improve power
factor
Braking
resistor
Inverter
Input-line
noise filter
DC
reactor
Ground
Ground
Output-line
noise filter
Motor
Frequency
meter
VS Operator
Zerophase
reactor

9-6
The following Option Cards are available
Table 9.5 Option Cards
Type Name
Code Num-
ber
Function
Document
Number
Built-in
(con-
nect to
con-
nector)
Speed
(Fre-
quency)
Refer-
ence
Option
Cards
Analog Ref-
erence Card
AI-14U
73600-
C001X
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog
speed references.
• Input signal ranges: 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 1 channel
• Input resolution: 14-bit (1/16384)
TO-C736-
30.13
Analog Ref-
erence Card
AI-14B
73600-
C002X
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog
speed references.
• Input signal ranges: 0 to ±10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (500 Ω), 3 channels
• Input resolution: 13-bit + sign (1/8192)
TO-C736-
30.14
Digital Refer-
ence Card
DI-08
73600-
C003X
Enables 8-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 8-bit binary
2-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
TO-C736-
30.15
Digital Refer-
ence Card
DI-16H2
73600-
C016X
Enables 16-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 16-bit binary
4-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
With 16-bit/12-bit switch.
TO-C736-
40.7
Moni-
toring
Optional
Cards
Analog Mon-
itor Card
AO-08
73600-
D001X
Converts analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.) to absolute values and
outputs them.
• Output resolution: 8 bits (1/256)
• Output voltage: 0 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TO-C736-
30.21
Analog Mon-
itor Card
AO-12
73600-
D002X
Output analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.).
• Output resolution: 11 bits (1/2048) + sign
• Output voltage: -10 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TO-C736-
30.22
Digital Out-
put Card
DO-08
73600-
D004X
Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the Inverters oper-
ating status (alarm signals, zero speed detection, etc.)
Output form: Photocoupler output, 6 channels
(48 V, 50 mA max.)
Relay contact outputs, 2 channels
(250 VAC: 1 A max., 30VDC: 1 A max.)
TO-C736-
30.24
2C-Relay
Output Card
DO-02C
73600-
D007X
Provides two multi-function outputs (DPDT relay contacts) in
addition to those provided by the Inverter.
TO-C736-
40.8

9-7
Built-in
(con-
nect to
con-
nector)
PG
Speed
Con-
trol
Cards
PG-A2
73600-
A012X
Used for V/f with PG control. Speed feedback is performed
using the PG attached to the motor to compensate for speed
fluctuations caused by slipping.
• A-phase pulse (single pulse) input (voltage, complemen-
tary, open-collector input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: +12 V, 20 mA
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C736-
40.1
PG-B2
73600-
A013X
• Used for V/f control.
• A-, B-phase input (complimentary input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: Open-collector
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C736-
40.2
PG-D2
73600-
A014X
• Differential input.
• A-phase pulse (differential pulse) input, for V/f control
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Input: Conforms to RS-422
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C736-
40.3
PG-X2
73600-
A015X
• A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Input: Conforms to RS-422
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C736-
40.4
Table 9.5 Option Cards (Continued)
Type Name
Code Num-
ber
Function
Document
Number

9-8
* Under development.
Built-in
(con-
nected
to con-
nector)
Com-
muni-
cations
Option
Cards
DeviceNet
Communica-
tions Inter-
face Card
SI-N
73600-
C021X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using DeviceNet communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
tion, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (out-
put frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
ProfiBus-DP
Communica-
tions Inter-
face Card
SI-P
73600-
C022X
using ProfiBus-DP communications to start/stop Inverter
operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
InterBus-S
Communica-
tions Inter-
face Card
SI-R
*
using InterBus-S communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
-
CANopen
Communica-
tions Inter-
face Card
SI-S
*
using CANopen communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
-
ControlNet
Communica-
tions Inter-
face Card
SI-U
*
using ControlNet communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
-
CC-Link
Communica-
tions Inter-
face Card
SI-C
73600-
C032X
using CC-Link communications to start/stop Inverter opera-
-
Table 9.5 Option Cards (Continued)
Type Name
Code Num-
ber
Function
Document
Number

Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also pro-
vides lists of constants.
Varispeed G7 Control Modes.....................................10-2
Inverter Application Precautions................................10-7
Motor Application Precautions.................................10-10
Conformance to CE Markings..................................10-12
User Constants ........................................................10-19

10-2
Varispeed G7 Control Modes
Details of the Varispeed G7-Series Inverter control modes and their features are provided in this section.
Control Modes and Features
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters support the following five control modes, allowing the selection of a control
mode to suit the required purpose. Table 10.1 provides an overview of the control modes and their features.
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes
Control Mode
V/f Control with-
out PG
V/f Control with
PG
Open-loop Vec-
tor Control 1
Flux Vector Con-
trol
Open-loop Vec-
tor Control 2
Constant Setting A1-02 = 0 A1-02 = 1
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
A1-02 = 3 A1-02 = 4
Basic Control
Voltage/frequency
fixed ratio control
Voltage/frequency
fixed ratio control
with speed com-
pensation using a
PG
Current vector
control without a
PG
Current vector
control with a PG
Current vector
control without a
PG using a high-
performance mag-
netic flux and
speed estimator
(software)
Main Applications
Variable speed
control, particu-
larly for control of
multiple motors
with a single
Inverter and for
replacing existing
Inverters
Applications
requiring high-
precision speed
control using a PG
on the machine
side
Variable speed
control, applica-
tions requiring
high performance
without a PG on
the motor side,
and for replacing
open-loop vector
control of the pre-
vious VS-616G5.
Very high-perfor-
mance control
with a PG on the
motor side (sim-
ple servodrives,
high-precision
speed control,
torque control, and
torque limiting)
Very high-perfor-
mance control
without a PG on
the motor side
(such as simple
servodrives,
torque control, and
torque limiting),
and function appli-
cations between
flux vector and
open-loop vector 1
control.
PG Speed Control Card
(Option)
Not required.
Required (PG-A2
or PG-D2).
Not required.
Required (PG-B2
or PG-X2).
Not required.
Basic
Perfor-
mance
Speed Control
Range*1 1:40 1:40 1:100 1:1000 1:200*13
Speed Control
Accuracy*2 ±2 to 3% ±0.03% ±0.2% ±0.02% ±0.2%
Speed
Response*3 Approx. 1 Hz Approx. 1 Hz 5 Hz 40 Hz 10 Hz
Maximum
Output Fre-
quency
400 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz 60 Hz*13
Starting
Torque*4 150%/3 Hz 150%/3 Hz 150%/1 Hz 150%/0 min−1 150%/0.3 Hz

10-3
* 1. The variable speed control range. (For continuous operation, the motor's temperature rise must be considered.)
* 2. The speed deviation in relation to the maximum speed with a rated load and when the load is stable. (For open-loop vector control 1 and 2, the motor temperature
must be 25 °C ± 10 °C.)
* 3. The speed response guidelines indicating the extent of the motor's actual speed gain in proportion to the speed reference, which changes in a sinusoidal wave
form, within a range where motor torque does not become saturated.
* 4. A guideline for the motor torque that can be generated when started at a low speed and its output frequency (rotations) at that time.
* 5. This function limits the maximum motor torque to protect the machine and the load.
* 6. This function directly controls the amount of torque being generated at the motor and its rotation direction, e.g., to control force.
* 7. This function controls the amount of motor slip that occurs to prevent mechanical shock, when replacing a torque motor, etc.
* 8. This function performs simple positioning control (servo lock), without using an external positioning control device.
* 9. This function instantaneously estimates (or detects) the speed and rotation direction of a coasting motor, and quickly starts it without subjecting it to shock.
* 10.This function automatically adjusts the voltage applied to the motor to optimize the motor's efficiency with light loads.
* 11.This function improves the deceleration time without using a braking resistor by making the motor winding absorb regenerative power. As a standard, this func-
tion is effective with a motor running on 160 kW or less with a high-inertia load.
* 12.This function enables proportional gain in relation to changes in the speed reference, even for low rigidity (corresponds to the servo's model gain control).
* 13.Set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) for open-loop vector control 2 to a value not exceeding 60 Hz. Use within a speed control range of 1:10 for torque
control on the regenerative side.
Appli-
cation
Func-
tions
Autotuning
Line-to-line resis-
tance (Normally
not required.)
Line-to-line resis-
tance (Normally
not required.)
Rotational auto-
tuning, stationary
autotuning, sta-
tionary autotuning
for line-to-line
resistance only
Rotational auto-
tuning, stationary
autotuning, sta5
ionary autotuning
for line-to-line
resistance only
Rotational auto-
tuning, stationary
autotuning, sta-
tionary autotuning
for line-to-line
resistance only
Torque Limit-
ing*5 No No
Yes (except dur-
ing acceleration/
deceleration,
below minimum
frequency, or dur-
ing reverse rota-
tion)
Yes
Yes (except below
minimum fre-
quency and dur-
ing reverse
rotation)
Torque Con-
trol*6 No No No Yes
Yes (except below
minimum fre-
quency and dur-
ing reverse
rotation)
Droop Con-
trol*7 No No No
Yes (except for
0 min−1 and dur-
ing reverse rota-
tion)
Yes (Except below
minimum fre-
quency and dur-
ing reverse
rotation)
Zero-servo
Control*8 No No No Yes No
Speed Estima-
tion (Detec-
tion)
Instantaneous
Speed
Search*9
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Yes (speed detec-
tion and rotation
direction estima-
tion)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
detection)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Automatic
Energy-sav-
ing Control*10
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
High-slip
Braking*11 Yes Yes
(Under develop-
ment)
(Under develop-
ment)
(Under develop-
ment)
Feed For-
ward Con-
trol*12
No No No Yes Yes
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes
Control Mode
V/f Control with-
out PG
V/f Control with
PG
Open-loop Vec-
tor Control 1
Flux Vector Con-
trol
Open-loop Vec-
tor Control 2

10-4
Application Function Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the application functions.
• Perform rotational autotuning during trial operation whenever it is possible to separate the motor and
machine. To achieve the characteristics of vector control described in Table 10.1, the control must be
adjusted within a range that the machine will not vibrate after rotational autotuning has been performed.
• With vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. Vector control is not possible when
multiple motors are connected to a single Inverter. Select an Inverter capacity so the rated motor current is
50% to 100% of the rated Inverter current.
• For estimated speed searching, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The speed search must be
performed at a frequency of 130 Hz or less and with a motor with the same number of frames as or one
frame less than the Inverter capacity.
• During high-slip braking, motor loss increases, so use a high-slip braking frequency of 5% ED or less, and
a braking time of 90 seconds or less. Once high-slip braking has started, the motor cannot be restarted until
it has stopped.
• Feed forward control is a function that improves the proportional gain of the motor speed in relation to the
change in the speed reference. Adjust the response to interference loads using the speed controller (ASR)
constants.
• The torque limit function will not operate during acceleration or deceleration (during soft start transition)
when using a control mode such as open-loop vector control 1. Even if the motor speed drops due to torque
limiting while set to a fixed speed, the speed will not fall below the minimum frequency and the motor will
not slip into reverse rotation. These conditions also apply to open-loop vector control 2 and other applica-
tion functions.
Precautions When Using Open-loop Vector Control 2
Using open-loop vector control 2 (A1-02=4) gives a higher level of control than conventional open-loop vec-
tor control (A1-02=2). When using open-loop vector control 2, pay attention to the points listed below. For a
comparison with other control modes, refer to Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes.
General Precautions
• The maximum possible setting for the maximum output frequency (E1-04) is 60 Hz.
• Be sure to perform autotuning. Refer to the precautions given under Autotuning in Chapter 4 Trial Opera-
tion.
Precaution on Regeneration
With speed control, in the low speed range (approx. 6 Hz max.), the speed increases for large regenerative
loads, and it may not be possible to maintain speed accuracy. Examples are given below for forward rota-
tion at frequencies of 0.3, 1, 3, 6, and 60 Hz.

10-5
With torque control, operate within a speed control range of 1:10 on the regenerative side.
Precautions on Setting Constants
If the constants are not set properly, performance may be adversely affected.
• If there is a possibility of starting with the motor already rotating, enable the speed search function (b3-
01=1).
• When lowering a torque limit (L7- ), set it to as high a value as possible within the range allowed by
the system.
• If torque limit acceleration is performed, or if the motor slips at the torque limit causing a CF (control
fault), increase N4-08 (proportional gain of speed estimator) in steps of 5 until acceleration and decelera-
tion are performed smoothly. When N4-08 is increased, the torque reference (U1-09) may oscillate. If so,
increase C5-06 (ASR primary delay time) by about 0.050 s.
Precaution on Torque Accuracy
To ensure torque accuracy within the speed control range of 1:10 when the motor is operated by itself at
the minimum frequency and the torque reference (U1-09) is higher than in the medium- and high-speed
ranges, increase the setting of the torque adjustment gain (N4-17) and adjust the torque reference so that it
is about the same as that in the medium and high speed ranges.
Control Modes and Applications
Application examples for the Inverter control modes are provided here.
V/f Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
V/f control without a PG is suitable for applications where multiple motors are operated with a single Inverter,
such as with multi-motor drives.
0
100
200
-100
-200
60631
0.3
Load torque (%)
Speed (Hz)
Driving torque
Regenerative torque

10-6
Fig 10.1
V/f Control with PG (A1-02 = 1)
V/f control with a PG enables precise control of machine line speed. Speed control using the speed feedback
of the machine shaft is possible in this mode.
Fig 10.2
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 2 or 4)
Flux vector control enables the use of high-performance drives without a speed detector. PG (pulse generator)
wiring is not required.
Fig 10.3
Vector Control with PG (A1-02 = 3)
Vector control with a PG is suitable for applications using high-precision drives with PG feedback. High-pre-
cision positioning, zero-speed control, and torque control are possible with this mode.
Fig 10.4
Inverter M1
M2
M3
(Thermal relay)
Inverter
M
PG
(PG-A2 or PG-D2)
Conveyor
Inverter M
Inverter M
PG
(PG-B2 or PG-X2)

Inverter Application Precautions
10-7
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling Inverters.
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can
destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power sup-
ply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Fig 10.5
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when start-
ing using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter.
Emergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop
immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emer-
gency stop.
Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa.
Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
Power supply
capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)

10-8
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, airborne matter, dust, and other contami-
nants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel
space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not
install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz (depends on the car-
rier frequency). Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set
upper limits. (The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD2
/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera-
tion or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase
the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.

10-9
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing
so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more
than one time every 30 minutes.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before
performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.

10-10
Motor Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for motor application.
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a
commercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard
motor.
Low Speed Ranges
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore,
the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a motor not made by Yaskawa. If
100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special inverter or vector motor.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must
be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing
durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when oper-
ated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the
motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A constant can be set to select low carrier,
PWM modulation control as well.) When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the
same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed
mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function
to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the
motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is
operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).

Motor Application Precautions
10-11
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an
appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the
number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or over-
current protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with
the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If
the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually
turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher
than 60 Hz.

10-12
Conformance to CE Markings
Points regarding conformance to CE markings are given below.
CE Markings
CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental standards that apply to business transactions
(including production, imports, and sales) in Europe. There are unified European standards for mechanical
products (Machine Directive), electrical products (Low Voltage Directive), and electrical noise (EMC Direc-
tive). CE markings are required for business transactions in Europe (including production, imports, and sales).
The Varispeed G7-Series Inverters bear CE markings indicating conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
and the EMC Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
• EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
Machinery and installations that incorporate the Inverter are also subject to CE markings. It is ultimately the
responsibility of customers making products incorporating the Inverter to attach CE markings to the finished
products. The customer must confirm that the finished products (machines or installations) conform to the
European Standards.
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings
Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive under the condi-
tions described in European Standard EN50178.
Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters must satisfy the following conditions in order to conform to the Low Voltage
Directive.
• It must be used under conditions corresponding to overvoltage category 3 or less and pollution degree 2 or
less as specified in IEC664.
• Input fuses:
For details on selecting fuses, refer to Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples.
• With Inverters CIMR-G7C2018 to 2110 and CIMR-G7C4018 to 4300, an enclosure preventing foreign
matter from entering from the top or front sides is required (IP4X or higher: panel installation).

10-13
Input Fuses
In order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive, fuses must be provided for inputs. Use UL-compatible input
fuses with ratings higher than the voltages and currents, and fusing I2
t specifications within the ranges shown
in the table below.
Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples
Voltage
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
Selection Requirements Input Fuse (Examples)
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I2
t
(A2
sec)
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
Fusing
I2
t
(A2
sec)
200 V
class
20P4 240 10 12 to 25 A60Q12-2 FERRAZ
600 V
12 A
17
20P7 240 15 23 to 55 CR2LS-20/UL FUJI
250 V
20 A
27
21P5 240 20 34 to 98 CR2LS-30/UL FUJI
250 V
30 A
60
22P2 240 30 82 to 220 CR2LS-50/UL FUJI
250 V
50 A
200
23P7 240 40 220 to 610 CR2LS-75/UL FUJI
250 V
75 A
560
25P5 240 50 290 to 1300 CR2LS-75/UL FUJI
250 V
75 A
560
27P5 240 60 450 to 5000 CR2LS-100/UL FUJI
250 V
100 A
810
2011 240 90 1200 to 7200 CR2L-125/UL FUJI
250 V
125 A
1570
2015 240 120 1800 to 7200 CR2L-150/UL FUJI
250 V
150 A
2260
2018 240 140 870 to 16200 CR2L-150/UL FUJI
250 V
150 A
2260
2022 240 160 1500 to 23000 CR2L-200/UL FUJI
250 V
200 A
4010
2030 240 220 2100 to 19000 CR2L-260/UL FUJI
250 V
260 A
7320
2037 240 270 2700 to 55000 CR2L-300/UL FUJI
250 V
300 A
9630
2045 240 300 4000 to 55000 CR2L-300/UL FUJI
250 V
300 A
9630
2055 240 370 7100 to 64000 CR2L-400/UL FUJI
250 V
400 A
24000
2075 240 500 11000 to 64000 CR2L-500/UL FUJI
250 V
500 A
40000
2090 240 600 13000 to 83000 CR2L-600/UL FUJI
250 V
600 A
52000
2110 240 700 13000 to 83000 A50P700-4 FERRAZ
500 V
700 A
49000

10-14
400 V
class
40P4 480 5 16 to 660 CR6L-20/UL FUJI
600 V
20 A
26
40P7 480 10 19 to 660 CR6L-20/UL FUJI
600 V
20 A
26
41P5 480 10 46 to 660 CR6L-30/UL FUJI
600 V
30 A
59
42P2 480 15 78 to 660 CR6L-50/UL FUJI
600 V
50 A
317
43P7 480 20 110 to 660 CR6L-50/UL FUJI
600 V
50 A
317
44P0 480 25 220 to 660 CR6L-50/UL FUJI
600 V
50 A
317
45P5 480 30 240 to 900 CR6L-50/UL FUJI
600 V
50 A
317
47P5 480 40 320 to 900 CR6L-75/UL FUJI
600 V
75 A
564
4011 480 50 1000 to 1800 CR6L-100/UL FUJI
600 V
100 A
1022
4015 480 60 1500 to 4100 CR6L-150/UL FUJI
600 V
150 A
3070
4018 480 70 530 to 5800 CR6L-150/UL FUJI
600 V
150 A
3070
4022 480 90 1130 to 5800 CR6L-150/UL FUJI
600 V
150 A
3070
4030 480 110 1700 to 5800 CR6L-150/UL FUJI
600 V
150 A
3070
4037 480 140 2000 to 13000 CR6L-200/UL FUJI
600 V
200 A
5200
4045 480 160 3000 to 13000 CR6L-200/UL FUJI
600 V
200 A
5200
4055 480 220 6800 to 55000 CR6L-300/UL FUJI
600 V
300 A
17700
4075 480 300 3800 to 55000 CR6L-300/UL FUJI
600 V
300 A
17700
4090 480 330 12000 to 23000 A70P400-4 FERRAZ
700 V
400 A
19000
4110 480 400 18000 to 64000 A70P450-4 FERRAZ
700 V
400 A
24000
4132 480 450 28000 to 250000 A70P600-4 FERRAZ
700 V
600 A
43000
4160 480 540 40000 to 250000 A70P700-4 FERRAZ
700 V
700 A
59000
4185 480 750 63000 to 400000 A70P900-4 FERRAZ
700 V
900 A
97000
4220 480 750 63000 to 400000 A70P1000-4 FERRAZ
700 V
900 A
97000
4300 480 1000 94000 to 920000 A70P1000-4 FERRAZ
700 V
1000 A
120000
Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples
Voltage
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
Selection Requirements Input Fuse (Examples)
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I2
t
(A2sec)
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
Fusing
I2
t
(A2sec)

10-15
EMC Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC Directive under the conditions
described in European Standard EN61800-3.
Installation Method
In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the Inverter conforms to the EMC Directive,
perform installation according to the method below.
• Install a noise filter that conforms to European Standards on the input side. (Refer to Table 10.3 EMC
Noise Filters).
• Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the Inverter and Motor. Make the wiring as short as
possible.
• To suppress harmonics, install a DC reactor in CIMR-G7C20P4, 20P7, 40P4, and 40P7 models. (Refer to
Table 10.4 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics.)
Fig 10.6 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-G7C20P4 to 2018, 40P4 to 4018)
L1L2L3PE
IM
L1L2L3 T1T2T3
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inputs
Filter
Outputs
Inverter
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Wiring length: 20 m max.

10-16
Fig 10.7 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-G7C2022 to 2110, 4022 to 4300)
PE
IM
L1L2L3
L1L2L3 T1 T3T2
Inputs
Filter
Outputs
Inverter
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Wiring length: 20 m max.

10-17
Table 10.3 EMC Noise Filters
Volt-
age
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
Noise Filter (Made by Schaffner)
Model Number Rated Current (A) Weight (kg) Dimensions
200V
class
20P4
FS 5972-10-07 10 1.1 141 x 330 x 46
20P7
21P5 FS 5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 x 330 x 46
22P2
FS 5972-35-07 35 1.4 141 x 330 x 46
23P7
25P5
FS 5972-60-07 60 3 206 x 355 x 60
27P5
2011
FS 5972-100-07 100 4.9 236 x 408 x 802015
2018
2022 FS 5972-120-35 120 4.3 90 x 366 x 180
2030
FS 5972-180-40 180 6 120 x 451 x 170
2037
2045
FS 5972-300-37 300 11 130 x 610 x 240
2055
2075 FS 5972-300-37 360 11 130 x 610 x 240
2090
FS 5972-300-37 450 11 130 x 610 x 240
2110

10-18
400V
class
40P4
Under development --- --- ---
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
Under development --- --- ---4045
4055
4075 Under development --- --- ---
4090
4110
Table 10.4 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics
Voltage Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
DC Reactor
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings Code Number
200 V class
20P4
UZDA-B YASKAWA 5.4 A 8 mH X010084
20P7
400 V class
40P4
UZDA-B YASKAWA 3.2 A 28 mH X010052
40P7
Table 10.3 EMC Noise Filters
Volt-
age
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
Noise Filter (Made by Schaffner)
Model Number Rated Current (A) Weight (kg) Dimensions

User Constants
10-19
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These setting are for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW set
to factory set control method (open-loop vector control).
Table 10.5 User Constants
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting
A1-00
Language selection for digital
operator display 1*1 b5-11 PID reverse output selection 0
A1-01 Constant access level 2 b5-12
Selection of PID feedback com-
mand loss detection
0
A1-02 Control method selection 2*1 b5-13
PID feedback command loss detec-
tion level
0
A1-03 Initialize 0 b5-14
PID feedback command loss detec-
tion time
1.0
A1-04 Password 0 b5-15 PID sleep function operation level 0.0
A1-05 Password setting 0 b5-16 PID sleep operation delay time 0.0
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting constants - b5-17
Acceleration/deceleration time for
PID reference
0.0
b1-01 Reference selection 1 b6-01 Dwell frequency at start 0.0
b1-02 Operation method selection 1 b6-02 Dwell time at start 0.0
b1-03 Stopping method selection 0 b6-03 Dwell frequency at stop 0.0
b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation 0 b6-04 Dwell time at stop 0.0
b1-05
Operation selection for setting E1-
09 or less
0 b7-01 Droop control gain 0.0
b1-06 Read sequence input twice 1 b7-02 Droop control delay time 0.05
b1-07
Operation selection after switching
to remote mode
0 b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection 0
b1-08
Run command selection in pro-
gramming modes
0 b8-02 Energy-saving gain 0.7*4
b2-01
Zero speed level (DC injection
braking starting frequency)
0.5 b8-03 Energy-saving filter time constant 0.50*5
b2-02 DC injection braking current 50 b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient *6
b2-03 DC injection braking time at start 0.00 b8-05
Power detection filter time con-
stant
20
b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop 0.50 b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter 0
b2-08
Magnetic flux compensation vol-
ume
0 b9-01 Zero-servo gain 5
b3-01 Speed search selection 2*2 *3 b9-02 Zero-servo completion width 10
b3-02 Speed search operating current 100*2 C1-01 Acceleration time 1 10.0
b3-03 Speed search deceleration time 2.0 C1-02 Deceleration time 1 10.0
b3-05 Speed search wait time 0.2 C1-03 Acceleration time 2 10.0
b4-01 Timer function ON-delay time 0.0 C1-04 Deceleration time 2 10.0
b4-02 Timer function OFF-delay time 0.0 C1-05 Acceleration time 3 10.0
b5-01 PID control mode selection 0 C1-06 Deceleration time 3 10.0
b5-02 Proportional gain (P) 1.00 C1-07 Acceleration time 4 10.0
b5-03 Integral (I) time 1.0 C1-08 Deceleration time 4 10.0
b5-04 Integral (I) limit 100.0 C1-09 Emergency stop time 10.0
b5-05 Derivative (D) time 0.00 C1-10 Accel/decel time setting unit 1
b5-06 PID limit 100.0 C1-11
Accel/decel time switching fre-
quency
0.0
b5-07 PID offset adjustment 0.0 C2-01
S-curve characteristic time at
acceleration start
0.20
b5-08 PID primary delay time constant 0.00 C2-02
acceleration end
0.20
b5-09
PID output characteristics selec-
tion
0 C2-03
deceleration start
0.20
b5-10 PID output gain 1.0 C2-04
deceleration end
0.00

10-20
C3-01 Slip compensation gain 1.0*3 d3-01 Jump frequency 1 0.0
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay
time 200*2 d3-02 Jump frequency 2 0.0
C3-03 Slip compensation limit 200 d3-03 Jump frequency 3 0.0
C3-04
Slip compensation selection during
regeneration
0 d3-04 Jump frequency width 1.0
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation
selection
0 d4-01
Frequency reference hold function
selection
0
C4-01 Torque compensation gain 1.00 d4-02 + - Speed limits 10
C4-02
Torque compensation primary
delay time constant 20*2*3 d5-01 Torque control selection 0
C4-03 Forward starting torque 0.0 d5-02 Torque reference delay time 0
C4-04 Reverse starting torque 0.0 d5-03 Speed limit selection 1
C4-05 Starting torque time constant 10 d5-04 Speed limit 0
C5-01 ASR proportional gain 1 20.00 d5-05 Speed limit bias 10
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1 0.500 d5-06
Speed/torque control switching
timer
0
C5-03 ASR proportional gain 2 20.00 d6-01 Field weakening level 80
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2 0.500 d6-02 Field frequency 0.0
C5-05 ASR limit 5.0 d6-03 Field forcing function selection 0
C5-06 ASR primary delay time 0.004 d6-05 AφR time constant 1.00
C5-07 ASR switching frequency 0.0 E1-01 Input voltage setting 200*7
C5-08 ASR integral (I) limit 400 E1-03 V/f pattern selection F
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection 6*6 E1-04 Max. output frequency 60.0
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit 15.0*6 E1-05 Max. voltage
200.0
*2 *7
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit 15.0*6 E1-06 Base frequency 60.0*2
C6-05
Carrier Frequency Proportional
Gain
00 E1-07 Mid. output frequency 3.0*2
C6-11
Carrier frequency for open-loop
vector control 2
4 E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage 15.0*2 *7
d1-01 Frequency reference 1 0.00 E1-09 Min. output frequency 1.5*2
d1-02 Frequency reference 2 0.00 E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage 9.0*2 *7
d1-03 Frequency reference 3 0.00 E1-11 Mid. output frequency 2 0.0*9
d1-04 Frequency reference 4 0.00 E1-12 Mid. output frequency voltage 2 0.0*9
d1-05 Frequency reference 5 0.00 E1-13 Base voltage 0.0*10
d1-06 Frequency reference 6 0.00 E2-01 Motor rated current 1.90*6
d1-07 Frequency reference 7 0.00 E2-02 Motor rated slip 2.90*6
d1-08 Frequency reference 8 0.00 E2-03 Motor no-load current 1.20*6
d1-09 Frequency reference 9 0.00 E2-04 Number of motor poles 4
d1-10 Frequency reference 10 0.00 E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance 9.842*6
d1-11 Frequency reference 11 0.00 E2-06 Motor leak inductance 18.2*6
d1-12 Frequency reference 12 0.00 E2-07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0.50
d1-13 Frequency reference 13 0.00 E2-08 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 0.75
d1-14 Frequency reference 14 0.00 E2-09 Motor mechanical loss 0.0
d1-15 Frequency reference 15 0.00 E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compen-
sation 14*4
d1-16 Frequency reference 16 0.00 E2-11 Motor rated output 0.40*4
d1-17 Jog frequency reference 6.00 E3-01 Motor 2 control method selection 2
d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit 100.0 E3-02
Motor 2 max. output frequency
(FMAX) 60.0*2
d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit 0.0 E3-03 Motor 2 max. voltage (VMAX) 200.0*2
d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit 0.0 E3-04
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency
(FA)
60.0
Table 10.5 User Constants (Continued)
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting

User Constants
10-21
E3-05
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
(FB) 3.0 *2 F4-08
Analog output signal level for
channel 2
0
E3-06
Motor 2 mid. output frequency
voltage 1 (VC) 11.0 *7 F5-01 Channel 1 output selection 0
E3-07
Motor 2 min. output frequency
(FMIN) 0.5 *2 F5-02 Channel 2 output selection 1
E3-08
Motor 2 min. output frequency
voltage (VMIN) 2.0 *7 F5-03 Channel 3 output selection 2
E4-01 Motor 2 rated current 1.90 *6 F5-04 Channel 4 output selection 4
E4-02 Motor 2 rated slip 2.90 *6 F5-05 Channel 5 output selection 6
E4-03 Motor 2 no-load current 1.20 *6 F5-06 Channel 6 output selection 37
E4-04
Motor 2 number of poles (number
of poles)
4 F5-07 Channel 7 output selection 0F
E4-05 Motor 2 line-to-line resistance 9.842*6 F5-08 Channel 8 output selection 0F
E4-06 Motor 2 leak inductance 18.2*6 F5-09 DO-08 output mode selection 0
E4-07 Motor 2 rated capacity 0.40*6 F6-01
Operation selection after commu-
nications error
1
F1-01 PG constant 600 F6-02
Input level of external fault from
0
F1-02
Operation selection at PG open cir-
cuit (PGO)
1 F6-03
Stopping method for external fault
from Communications Option
Card
1
F1-03
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
1 F6-04
Trace sampling from Communica-
tions Option Card
0
F1-04 Operation selection at deviation 3 F6-06
Torque reference/torque limit
selection from optical option
1
F1-05 PG rotation 0 H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection 24
F1-06
PG division rate (PG pulse moni-
tor)
1 H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection 14
F1-07
Integral value during accel/decel
enable/disable
0 H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection 3 (0)*8
F1-08 Overspeed detection level 115 H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection 4 (3)*8
F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time 0.0 H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection 6 (4)*8
F1-10
Excessive speed deviation detec-
tion level
10 H1-06 Terminal S8 function selection 8 (6)
F1-11
Excessive speed deviation detec-
tion delay time
0.5 H1-07 Terminal S9 function selection 5
F1-12 Number of PG gear teeth 1 0 H1-08 Terminal S10 function selection 32
F1-13 Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 H1-09 Terminal S11 function selection 7
F1-14 PG open-circuit detection time 2.0 H1-10 Terminal S12 function selection 15
F2-01
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selec-
tion
0 H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 function selec-
tion (contact)
0
F3-01 Digital input option 0 H2-02
tion (open collector)
1
F4-01 Channel 1 monitor selection 2 H2-03
tion (open collector)
2
F4-02 Channel 1 gain 1.00 H2-04
Terminal P3 function selection
(open-collector)
6
F4-03 Channel 2 monitor selection 3 H2-05
Terminal P4 function selection
(open-collector)
5
F4-04 Channel 2 gain 0.50 H3-01
Signal level selection (terminal
A1)
0
F4-05 Channel 1 output monitor bias 0.0 H3-02 Gain (terminal A1) 0
F4-06 Channel 2 output monitor bias 0.0 H3-03 Bias (terminal A1) 100.0
F4-07
Analog output signal level for
channel 1
0 H3-04
Signal level selection (terminal
A3)
0
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting

10-22
H3-05
Multi-function analog input (termi-
nal A3)
2 L2-04 Voltage recovery time 0.3
H3-06 Gain (terminal A3) 100.0 L2-05 Undervoltage detection level 190*7
H3-07 Bias (terminal A3) 0.0 L2-06 KEB deceleration time 0.0
H3-08
Multi-function analog input termi-
nal A2 function selection
2 L2-07 Momentary recovery time 0*11
H3-09
Multi-function analog input termi-
nal A2 signal level selection
0 L2-08
Frequency reduction gain at KEB
start
100
H3-10 Gain (terminal A2) 100.0 L3-01
Stall prevention selection during
accel
1
H3-11 Bias (terminal A2) 0.0 L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel 150
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant 0.03 L3-03 Stall prevention limit during accel 50
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM) 2 L3-04
decel
1
H4-02 Gain (terminal FM) 1.00 L3-05
running
1
H4-03 Bias (terminal FM) 0.0 L3-06
Stall prevention level during run-
ning
160
H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM) 3 L4-01 Speed agreement detection level 0.0
H4-05 Gain (terminal AM) 0.50 L4-02 Speed agreement detection width 2.0
H4-06 Bias (terminal AM) 0.0 L4-03
Speed agreement detection level
(+/-)
0.0
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal level selec-
tion
0 L4-04
Speed agreement detection width
(+/-)
2.0
H4-08
Analog output 2 signal level selec-
tion
0 L4-05
Operation when frequency refer-
ence is missing
0
H5-01 Station address 1F L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts 0
H5-02 Communication speed selection 3 L5-02 Auto restart operation selection 0
H5-03 Communication parity selection 0 L6-01 Torque detection selection 1 0
H5-04
Stopping method after communi-
cation error
3 L6-02 Torque detection level 1 150
H5-05
Communication error detection
selection
1 L6-03 Torque detection time 1 0.1
H5-06 Send wait time 5 L6-04 Torque detection selection 2 0
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF 1 L6-05 Torque detection level 2 150
H6-01 Pulse train input function selection 0 L6-06 Torque detection time 2 0.1
H6-02 Pulse train input scaling 1440 L7-01 Forward drive torque limit 200
H6-03 Pulse train input gain 100.0 L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit 200
H6-04 Pulse train input bias 0.0 L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit 200
H6-05 Pulse train input filter time 0.10 L7-04 Reverse regenerative torque limit 200
H6-06 Pulse train monitor selection 2 L8-01
Protect selection for internal DB
resistor (Type ERF)
0
H6-07 Pulse train monitor scaling 1440 L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 95
L1-01 Motor protection selection 1 L8-03
Operation selection after overheat
pre-alarm
3
L1-02 Motor protection time constant 1.0 L8-05
Input open-phase protection selec-
tion
0
L1-03
Alarm operation selection during
motor overheating
3 L8-07
Output open-phase protection
selection
0
L1-04
Motor overheating operation selec-
tion
1 L8-09 Ground protection selection 1
L1-05
Motor temperature input filter time
constant
0.20 L8-10 Cooling fan control selection 0
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection 0 L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time 60
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru
time 0.1*6 L8-12 Ambient temperature 45
L2-03 Min. baseblock time 0.5 L8-15
OL2 characteristics selection at
low speeds
1
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting

User Constants
10-23
* 1. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-01 = 1, A1-02 = 2)
* 2. The factory setting will change if the control method is changed. The factory settings given above are for V/f without PG control.
* 3. Factory setting depends on the control method (A1-02).
* 4. For V/f with PG control: 1.0
* 5. For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more: 2.00
* 6. Setting range and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
* 7. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
* 8. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
* 9. The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.
* 10.E1-13 will have the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
* 11.If the set value is 0, acceleration will be to the speeds for the acceleration times (C1-01 to C1-08)
* 12.The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output. (The value given is for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
L8-18 Soft CLA selection 1 o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/dis-
able
1
N1-01
Hunting-prevention function selec-
tion
1 o2-02
STOP key during control circuit
terminal operation
1
N1-02 Hunting-prevention gain 1.00 o2-03 User constant initial value 0
N2-01
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
1.00 o2-04 kVA selection 0*6
N2-02
(AFR) time constant
50 o2-05
Frequency reference setting
method selection
0
N2-03
(AFR) time constant 2
750 o2-06
Operation selection when digital
operator is disconnected
0
N3-01
High-slip braking deceleration fre-
quency width
5 o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting 0
N3-02 High-slip braking current limit 150 o2-08
Cumulative operation time selec-
tion
0
N3-03 High-slip braking stop dwell time 1.0 o2-10 Fan operation time setting 0
N3-04 High-slip braking OL time 40 o2-12
Fault trace/fault history clear func-
tion
0
N4-07 Integral time of speed estimator 0.100 o3-01 Copy function selection 0
N4-08
Proportional gain of speed estima-
tor
15 o3-02 Read permitted selection 0
N4-17 Torque adjustment gain 0.8 T1-00 Motor 1/2 selection 1
N4-18 Feeder resistance adjustment gain 1.00 T1-01 Autotuning mode selection 0
N5-01 Feed forward control selection 0 T1-02 Motor output power 0.40
N5-02 Motor acceleration time 0.178 T1-03 Motor rated voltage 200.0*7
N5-03 Feed forward proportional gain 1.0 T1-04 Motor rated current 1.90*6
o1-01 Monitor selection 6 T1-05 Motor base frequency 60.00
o1-02 Monitor selection after power up 1 T1-06 Number of motor poles 4
o1-03
Frequency units of reference set-
ting and monitor
0 T1-07 Motor base speed 1750
o1-04
Setting unit for frequency con-
stants related to V/f characteristics
0 T1-08
PG pulses per revolution for teach-
ing
600
o1-05 LCD brightness adjustment 3
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting
No. Name
Fac-
tory
Setting
Set-
ting

Index
Index-1
Symbols
+/- speed, 6-72
Numerics
2-wire sequence, 6-7
3-wire sequence, 6-8
A
AC reactor, 2-15
acceleration and deceleration times, 6-15
advanced programming mode, 3-4, 3-9
ASIC internal RAM fault, 7-8
ASIC version fault, 7-8
auto restart, 6-63
autotuning, 4-9
autotuning mode, 3-4, 3-13
B
baseblock circuit error, 7-7
braking resistor, 2-19
braking resistor unit, 2-19
BUS Option Com Err, 7-7, 7-12
C
CALL Com Call, 7-12
CE MEMOBUS Com Err, 7-11
CE Memobus Com Err, 7-6
CF out of control, 7-5
circuit breaker, 2-14
common specifications, 9-4
communications on standby, 7-12
communications option card A/D converter error, 7-8
communications option card DPRAM error, 7-8
communications option card model code error, 7-8
communications option card self diagnostic error, 7-8
constant selection error, 7-13
constant setting error, 7-14
constant setting range error, 7-13
control circuit terminals, 2-20
control fault, 7-5
control method, 4-8
control method selection error, 7-13
control power fault, 7-3
cooling fin overheating, 7-3
CPF00 CPF, 7-7
CPF01 CPF01, 7-7
CPU internal A/D converter error, 7-7
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault, 7-8
crimp terminals, 2-6, 2-20, 2-36
D
daily inspection, 8-2
DC reactor, 2-15
detecting motor overspeed, 6-145
detecting motor torque, 6-44
detecting PG open circuit, 6-145
DEV Speed Deviation, 7-10
digital operator, 3-2
digital operator communications error 1, 7-7
digital operator communications error 2, 7-7
digital operator connection fault, 7-6
digital output cards, 6-146
drive mode, 3-4, 3-6
dwell function, 6-19
E
EEPROM error, 7-7
EEPROM write error, 7-14
EF External Fault, 7-9
EF0 Opt External Flt, 7-6, 7-10
emergency stop, 6-14
enclosed wall-mounted type, 1-4
ERR EEPROM R/W Err, 7-14
excessive speed deviation, 7-5, 7-10
external fault function, 6-75
F
FBL Feedback Loss, 7-5, 7-11
FJOG, 6-74
forward/reverse run commands input together, 7-9
frequency reference, 6-2, 6-24
fuse blown, 7-2

Index-2
Index
G
ground fault, 7-2
ground fault interrupter, 2-14
ground wiring, 2-18
H
high-slip braking OL, 7-4
hunting-prevention function, 6-36
I
incorrect inverter capacity setting, 7-13
inductive noise, 2-17
inrush prevention circuit fault, 7-3
installation site, 1-9
installed braking resistor overheating, 7-4
internal braking transistor fault, 7-4
inverter input voltage, 6-108
inverter overload, 7-4
inverter’s cooling fan stopped, 7-3
J
jump frequency function, 6-27
L
limiting motor rotation direction, 6-54
loaded operation, 4-14
M
magnetic contactor, 2-15
main circuit overvoltage, 7-2
main circuit undervoltage, 7-3, 7-9
main circuit voltage fault, 7-3
maintenance and inspection, 8-1
MEMOBUS communications, 6-81
MEMOBUS communications error, 7-6, 7-11
modes, 3-4
motor constants, 6-105
motor overheating, 7-9
motor overheating alarm, 7-3
motor overheating fault, 7-3
motor overload, 7-4
motor protection operation time, 6-51
mounting dimensions, 1-7
multi-function analog input, 6-41
multi-function analog input selection error, 7-13
multi-function input selection error, 7-13
multi-speed operation, 6-5
N
noise filter, 2-15
no-load operation, 4-14
number of gear teeth between PG and motor, 6-145
number of PG pulses, 6-144
O
OH Heatsink Overtemp, 7-9
OH2 Over Heat 2, 7-9
OH3 Motor Overheat 1, 7-9
OL3 Overtorque Det 1, 7-9
OL4 Overtorque Det 2, 7-10
OPE01 kVA Selection, 7-13
OPE011 Carr Freq/On-Delay, 7-14
OPE02 Limit, 7-13
OPE03 Terminal, 7-13
OPE05 Sequence Select, 7-13
OPE06 PG Opt Missing, 7-13
OPE07 Analog Selection, 7-13
OPE08, 7-13
OPE09, 7-13
OPE10 V/f Ptrn Setting, 7-13
open chassis type, 1-4
open-loop vector control, 4-9
operation errors, 7-13
OPR Oper Disconnect, 7-6
option card communications error, 7-12
option card connection error, 7-7
option card selection error, 7-13
option communications error, 7-7
OS Overspeed Det, 7-10
output open-phase, 7-3
OV DC Bus Overvolt, 7-9
overcurrent, 7-2
overspeed, 7-5, 7-10

Index
Index-3
overtorque 2, 7-10
overtorque detected 1, 7-4
overtorque detected 2, 7-4
P
password, 4-15, 6-140
periodic inspection, 8-2
periodic maintenance of parts, 8-3
PG (encoder) pulses, 2-37
PG disconnection, 7-10
PG disconnection detected, 7-5
PG pulse monitor output dividing ratio, 6-145
PG rotation direction, 6-144
PG speed control card, 6-144
PG speed control cards, 2-29
PGO PG Open, 7-10
PID control, 6-94
PID control selection error, 7-13
PID feedback reference lost, 7-5, 7-11
power ON, 4-3
Q
quick programming mode, 3-4, 3-7
R
radio interference, 2-18
rated current, 6-50
RJOG, 6-74
run command, 6-7
S
S-curve characteristics, 6-18
slip compensation function, 6-32
speed control with PG, 6-142
stabilizing speed, 6-37
stall prevention function, 6-20, 6-22, 6-44
standard connection diagrams, 2-13
standard inverter specifications, 9-2
stopping methods, 6-9
straight solderless terminals, 2-21, 2-36
surge absorber, 2-15
switching motors when the power supply is ON, 6-133
T
terminal block, 2-5
thermal overload relay, 2-17
tightening torque, 2-36
timer function, 6-93
torque compensation, 6-34
torque limit function, 6-41
trial operation, 4-1
troubleshooting, 7-1, 7-17
U
UL3 Undertorq Det 1, 7-10
UL4 Undertorq Det 2, 7-10
undertorque 1, 7-10
undertorque 2, 7-10
undertorque detected 1, 7-4
undertorque detected 2, 7-5
user constant access levels, 4-15
UV DC Bus Undervolt, 7-9
V
V/f control, 4-8
V/f control with PG, 4-8
V/f pattern, 6-107, 6-108
verify mode, 3-4, 3-12
W
watchdog timer fault, 7-8
wire size, 2-20
wiring, 2-1

Varispeed g7+instruc manual

More Related Content

What's hot (20)

Similar to Varispeed g7+instruc manual (20)

More from Toàn Huỳnh (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Varispeed g7+instruc manual